aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/doc/misc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorGlenn Morris2012-12-05 22:17:10 -0800
committerGlenn Morris2012-12-05 22:17:10 -0800
commitd8ad4d3ff9dcea9c581d72e1e9ec292ea18673b1 (patch)
tree511f16e150fca1ed64ec71800eb0e62a9d95578a /doc/misc
parentb7f3003fdd2e6baacddcd7657708e887a6580785 (diff)
parente1d51545ced3cf6f58c44891563dfaf62c34b411 (diff)
downloademacs-d8ad4d3ff9dcea9c581d72e1e9ec292ea18673b1.tar.gz
emacs-d8ad4d3ff9dcea9c581d72e1e9ec292ea18673b1.zip
Merge from emacs-24; up to 2012-11-24T16:58:43Z!cyd@gnu.org
Diffstat (limited to 'doc/misc')
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/auth.texi6
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/autotype.texi22
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/calc.texi14
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/cc-mode.texi156
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/cl.texi10
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/ebrowse.texi8
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/ede.texi18
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/ediff.texi48
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/edt.texi8
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/eieio.texi2
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi16
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/epa.texi24
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/erc.texi14
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/ert.texi2
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/eshell.texi4
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/eudc.texi2
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/faq.texi38
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/flymake.texi4
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/forms.texi8
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/gnus-coding.texi16
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi46
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/gnus.texi174
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/idlwave.texi104
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/info.texi6
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/mairix-el.texi4
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/message.texi22
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/mh-e.texi36
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/newsticker.texi4
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi22
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/org.texi154
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi18
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/pgg.texi4
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/rcirc.texi4
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/reftex.texi56
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/remember.texi2
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/sc.texi28
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/sem-user.texi4
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/ses.texi2
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/smtpmail.texi6
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/tramp.texi12
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/url.texi18
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/vip.texi14
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/viper.texi18
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/widget.texi16
-rw-r--r--doc/misc/woman.texi34
45 files changed, 614 insertions, 614 deletions
diff --git a/doc/misc/auth.texi b/doc/misc/auth.texi
index 3a1e4155e97..d18a802d600 100644
--- a/doc/misc/auth.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/auth.texi
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ password (known as the secret).
89 89
90Similarly, the auth-source library supports multiple storage backend, 90Similarly, the auth-source library supports multiple storage backend,
91currently either the classic ``netrc'' backend, examples of which you 91currently either the classic ``netrc'' backend, examples of which you
92can see later in this document, or the Secret Service API. This is 92can see later in this document, or the Secret Service API@. This is
93done with EIEIO-based backends and you can write your own if you want. 93done with EIEIO-based backends and you can write your own if you want.
94 94
95@node Help for users 95@node Help for users
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ machine yourmachine.com:80 port http login testuser password testpass
213@end example 213@end example
214 214
215This will match any realm and authentication method (basic or digest) 215This will match any realm and authentication method (basic or digest)
216over HTTP. HTTPS is set up similarly. If you want finer controls, 216over HTTP@. HTTPS is set up similarly. If you want finer controls,
217explore the url-auth source code and variables. 217explore the url-auth source code and variables.
218 218
219For Tramp authentication, use: 219For Tramp authentication, use:
@@ -238,7 +238,7 @@ KDE Wallet (these are GNOME and KDE packages respectively and should
238be available on most modern GNU/Linux systems). 238be available on most modern GNU/Linux systems).
239 239
240The auth-source library uses the @file{secrets.el} library to connect 240The auth-source library uses the @file{secrets.el} library to connect
241through the Secret Service API. You can also use that library in 241through the Secret Service API@. You can also use that library in
242other packages, it's not exclusive to auth-source. 242other packages, it's not exclusive to auth-source.
243 243
244@defvar secrets-enabled 244@defvar secrets-enabled
diff --git a/doc/misc/autotype.texi b/doc/misc/autotype.texi
index 9d7a51233ff..aa99b41f204 100644
--- a/doc/misc/autotype.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/autotype.texi
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ recognize this situation by a prompt ending in @key{RET}, @kbd{C-g}
130or @kbd{C-h}. This 130or @kbd{C-h}. This
131means that entering an empty string will simply assume that you are finished. 131means that entering an empty string will simply assume that you are finished.
132Typing quit on the other hand terminates the loop but also the rest of the 132Typing quit on the other hand terminates the loop but also the rest of the
133skeleton, e.g. an ``else'' clause is skipped. Only a syntactically necessary 133skeleton, e.g., an ``else'' clause is skipped. Only a syntactically necessary
134termination still gets inserted. 134termination still gets inserted.
135 135
136 136
@@ -147,8 +147,8 @@ reindent the wrapped code for you.
147 147
148 Skeleton commands take an optional numeric prefix argument 148 Skeleton commands take an optional numeric prefix argument
149(@pxref{(emacs)Arguments}). This is interpreted in two different ways depending 149(@pxref{(emacs)Arguments}). This is interpreted in two different ways depending
150on whether the prefix is positive, i.e. forwards oriented or negative, 150on whether the prefix is positive, i.e., forwards oriented, or negative,
151i.e. backwards oriented. 151i.e., backwards oriented.
152 152
153 A positive prefix means to wrap the skeleton around that many 153 A positive prefix means to wrap the skeleton around that many
154following words. This is accomplished by putting the words there where 154following words. This is accomplished by putting the words there where
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ ignored.
178 178
179 If, on the other hand, you marked in alphabetical order the points [] A C B, 179 If, on the other hand, you marked in alphabetical order the points [] A C B,
180and call a skeleton command with @kbd{M-- 3}, you will wrap the text from 180and call a skeleton command with @kbd{M-- 3}, you will wrap the text from
181point to A, then the text from A to C and finally the text from C to B. This 181point to A, then the text from A to C and finally the text from C to B@. This
182is done because the regions overlap and Emacs would be helplessly lost if it 182is done because the regions overlap and Emacs would be helplessly lost if it
183tried to follow the order in which you marked these points. 183tried to follow the order in which you marked these points.
184 184
@@ -241,10 +241,10 @@ put at these places. Point is left at first @code{_} where nothing is wrapped.
241Indent line according to major mode. When following element is @code{_}, and 241Indent line according to major mode. When following element is @code{_}, and
242there is a interregion that will be wrapped here, indent that interregion. 242there is a interregion that will be wrapped here, indent that interregion.
243@item @code{&} 243@item @code{&}
244Logical and. Iff preceding element moved point, i.e. usually inserted 244Logical and. Iff preceding element moved point, i.e., usually inserted
245something, do following element. 245something, do following element.
246@item @code{|} 246@item @code{|}
247Logical xor. Iff preceding element didn't move point, i.e. usually inserted 247Logical xor. Iff preceding element didn't move point, i.e., usually inserted
248nothing, do following element. 248nothing, do following element.
249@item @code{-@var{number}} 249@item @code{-@var{number}}
250Delete preceding number characters. Depends on value of 250Delete preceding number characters. Depends on value of
@@ -376,7 +376,7 @@ be inserted.
376can simply insert some text, indeed, it can be skeleton command (@pxref{Using 376can simply insert some text, indeed, it can be skeleton command (@pxref{Using
377Skeletons}). It can be a lambda function which will for example conditionally 377Skeletons}). It can be a lambda function which will for example conditionally
378call another function. Or it can even reset the mode for the buffer. If you 378call another function. Or it can even reset the mode for the buffer. If you
379want to perform several such actions in order, you use a vector, i.e. several 379want to perform several such actions in order, you use a vector, i.e., several
380of the above elements between square brackets (@samp{[@r{@dots{}}]}). 380of the above elements between square brackets (@samp{[@r{@dots{}}]}).
381 381
382 By default C and C++ headers insert a definition of a symbol derived from 382 By default C and C++ headers insert a definition of a symbol derived from
@@ -402,12 +402,12 @@ define-auto-insert}.
402 402
403@vindex auto-insert 403@vindex auto-insert
404 The variable @code{auto-insert} says what to do when @code{auto-insert} is 404 The variable @code{auto-insert} says what to do when @code{auto-insert} is
405called non-interactively, e.g. when a newly found file is empty (see above): 405called non-interactively, e.g., when a newly found file is empty (see above):
406@table @asis 406@table @asis
407@item @code{nil} 407@item @code{nil}
408Do nothing. 408Do nothing.
409@item @code{t} 409@item @code{t}
410Insert something if possible, i.e. there is a matching entry in 410Insert something if possible, i.e., there is a matching entry in
411@code{auto-insert-alist}. 411@code{auto-insert-alist}.
412@item other 412@item other
413Insert something if possible, but mark as unmodified. 413Insert something if possible, but mark as unmodified.
@@ -446,7 +446,7 @@ buffer has a comment syntax (@pxref{(emacs)Comments}), this is inserted as a com
446 @kbd{M-x copyright-update} looks for a copyright notice in the first 446 @kbd{M-x copyright-update} looks for a copyright notice in the first
447@code{copyright-limit} characters of the buffer and updates it when necessary. 447@code{copyright-limit} characters of the buffer and updates it when necessary.
448The current year (variable @code{copyright-current-year}) is added to the 448The current year (variable @code{copyright-current-year}) is added to the
449existing ones, in the same format as the preceding year, i.e. 1994, '94 or 94. 449existing ones, in the same format as the preceding year, i.e., 1994, '94 or 94.
450If a dash-separated year list up to last year is found, that is extended to 450If a dash-separated year list up to last year is found, that is extended to
451current year, else the year is added separated by a comma. Or it replaces 451current year, else the year is added separated by a comma. Or it replaces
452them when this is called with a prefix argument. If a header referring to a 452them when this is called with a prefix argument. If a header referring to a
@@ -492,7 +492,7 @@ intended for resource files, which are only meant to be read in.
492 492
493@vindex executable-insert 493@vindex executable-insert
494 The variable @code{executable-insert} says what to do when 494 The variable @code{executable-insert} says what to do when
495@code{executable-set-magic} is called non-interactively, e.g. when file has no 495@code{executable-set-magic} is called non-interactively, e.g., when file has no
496or the wrong magic number: 496or the wrong magic number:
497@table @asis 497@table @asis
498@item @code{nil} 498@item @code{nil}
diff --git a/doc/misc/calc.texi b/doc/misc/calc.texi
index 7e60f4b190f..5ed5212ad25 100644
--- a/doc/misc/calc.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/calc.texi
@@ -293,7 +293,7 @@ experience with GNU Emacs in order to get the most out of Calc,
293this manual ought to be readable even if you don't know or use Emacs 293this manual ought to be readable even if you don't know or use Emacs
294regularly. 294regularly.
295 295
296This manual is divided into three major parts:@: the ``Getting 296This manual is divided into three major parts: the ``Getting
297Started'' chapter you are reading now, the Calc tutorial, and the Calc 297Started'' chapter you are reading now, the Calc tutorial, and the Calc
298reference manual. 298reference manual.
299@c [when-split] 299@c [when-split]
@@ -10518,7 +10518,7 @@ Integers, fractions, and floats are various ways of describing real
10518numbers. HMS forms also for many purposes act as real numbers. These 10518numbers. HMS forms also for many purposes act as real numbers. These
10519types can be combined to form complex numbers, modulo forms, error forms, 10519types can be combined to form complex numbers, modulo forms, error forms,
10520or interval forms. (But these last four types cannot be combined 10520or interval forms. (But these last four types cannot be combined
10521arbitrarily:@: error forms may not contain modulo forms, for example.) 10521arbitrarily: error forms may not contain modulo forms, for example.)
10522Finally, all these types of numbers may be combined into vectors, 10522Finally, all these types of numbers may be combined into vectors,
10523matrices, or algebraic formulas. 10523matrices, or algebraic formulas.
10524 10524
@@ -13472,7 +13472,7 @@ Year: ``ad '' or blank. (Note trailing space.)
13472@item AAA 13472@item AAA
13473Year: ``AD '' or blank. 13473Year: ``AD '' or blank.
13474@item aaaa 13474@item aaaa
13475Year: ``a.d.'' or blank. 13475Year: ``a.d.@:'' or blank.
13476@item AAAA 13476@item AAAA
13477Year: ``A.D.'' or blank. 13477Year: ``A.D.'' or blank.
13478@item bb 13478@item bb
@@ -13484,7 +13484,7 @@ Year: `` bc'' or blank. (Note leading space.)
13484@item BBB 13484@item BBB
13485Year: `` BC'' or blank. 13485Year: `` BC'' or blank.
13486@item bbbb 13486@item bbbb
13487Year: ``b.c.'' or blank. 13487Year: ``b.c.@:'' or blank.
13488@item BBBB 13488@item BBBB
13489Year: ``B.C.'' or blank. 13489Year: ``B.C.'' or blank.
13490@item M 13490@item M
@@ -13548,7 +13548,7 @@ AM/PM: ``am'' or ``pm''.
13548@item PP 13548@item PP
13549AM/PM: ``AM'' or ``PM''. 13549AM/PM: ``AM'' or ``PM''.
13550@item pppp 13550@item pppp
13551AM/PM: ``a.m.'' or ``p.m.''. 13551AM/PM: ``a.m.@:'' or ``p.m.''.
13552@item PPPP 13552@item PPPP
13553AM/PM: ``A.M.'' or ``P.M.''. 13553AM/PM: ``A.M.'' or ``P.M.''.
13554@item m 13554@item m
@@ -16997,7 +16997,7 @@ this formula will return the Wednesday one week in the future. An
16997exercise for the reader is to modify this formula to yield the same day 16997exercise for the reader is to modify this formula to yield the same day
16998if the input is already a Wednesday. Another interesting exercise is 16998if the input is already a Wednesday. Another interesting exercise is
16999to preserve the time-of-day portion of the input (@code{newweek} resets 16999to preserve the time-of-day portion of the input (@code{newweek} resets
17000the time to midnight; hint:@: how can @code{newweek} be defined in terms 17000the time to midnight; hint: how can @code{newweek} be defined in terms
17001of the @code{weekday} function?). 17001of the @code{weekday} function?).
17002 17002
17003@ignore 17003@ignore
@@ -34455,7 +34455,7 @@ traversed in this way, it is compared with the original formula (from
34455before the call to @code{normalize}) and, if it has changed, 34455before the call to @code{normalize}) and, if it has changed,
34456the entire procedure is repeated (starting with @code{normalize}) 34456the entire procedure is repeated (starting with @code{normalize})
34457until no further changes occur. Usually only two iterations are 34457until no further changes occur. Usually only two iterations are
34458needed:@: one to simplify the formula, and another to verify that no 34458needed: one to simplify the formula, and another to verify that no
34459further simplifications were possible. 34459further simplifications were possible.
34460@end defun 34460@end defun
34461 34461
diff --git a/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi b/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
index 8c574be8f2a..76d9eb42883 100644
--- a/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ the second with them pointing to the XEmacs manuals.
88@c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the 88@c The following four macros generate the filenames and titles of the
89@c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the 89@c main (X)Emacs manual and the Elisp/Lispref manual. Leave the
90@c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it 90@c Texinfo variable `XEMACS' unset to generate a GNU Emacs version, set it
91@c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g. with 91@c to generate an XEmacs version, e.g., with
92@c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi". 92@c "makeinfo -DXEMACS cc-mode.texi".
93@ifset XEMACS 93@ifset XEMACS
94@macro emacsman 94@macro emacsman
@@ -646,13 +646,13 @@ you're better off getting an external program like GNU @code{indent},
646which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things. 646which will rearrange brace location, amongst other things.
647 647
648Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other 648Preprocessor directives are handled as syntactic whitespace from other
649code, i.e. they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the 649code, i.e., they can be interspersed anywhere without affecting the
650indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments. 650indentation of the surrounding code, just like comments.
651 651
652The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed 652The code inside macro definitions is, by default, still analyzed
653syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd 653syntactically so that you get relative indentation there just as you'd
654get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no 654get if the same code was outside a macro. However, since there is no
655hint about the syntactic context, i.e. whether the macro expands to an 655hint about the syntactic context, i.e., whether the macro expands to an
656expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the 656expression, to some statements, or perhaps to whole functions, the
657syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it 657syntactic recognition can be wrong. @ccmode{} manages to figure it
658out correctly most of the time, though. 658out correctly most of the time, though.
@@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ Indents the entire top-level function, class or macro definition
773encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be 773encompassing point. It leaves point unchanged. This function can't be
774used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or 774used to reindent a nested brace construct, such as a nested class or
775function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented 775function, or a Java method. The top-level construct being reindented
776must be complete, i.e. it must have both a beginning brace and an ending 776must be complete, i.e., it must have both a beginning brace and an ending
777brace. 777brace.
778 778
779@item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region}) 779@item @kbd{C-M-\} (@code{indent-region})
@@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ preprocessor statements.
1021A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages 1021A popular programming style, especially for object-oriented languages
1022such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the 1022such as C++ is to write symbols in a mixed case format, where the
1023first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by 1023first letter of each word is capitalized, and not separated by
1024underscores. E.g. @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}. 1024underscores. E.g., @samp{SymbolsWithMixedCaseAndNoUnderlines}.
1025 1025
1026These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next 1026These commands move backward or forward to the beginning of the next
1027capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times. 1027capitalized word. With prefix argument @var{n}, move @var{n} times.
@@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ Movement}. They might be removed from a future release of @ccmode{}.
1043 1043
1044Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals, 1044Since there's a lot of normal text in comments and string literals,
1045@ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal 1045@ccmode{} provides features to edit these like in text mode. The goal
1046is to do it seamlessly, i.e. you can use auto fill mode, sentence and 1046is to do it seamlessly, i.e., you can use auto fill mode, sentence and
1047paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever 1047paragraph movement, paragraph filling, adaptive filling etc. wherever
1048there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it. 1048there's a piece of normal text without having to think much about it.
1049@ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes, 1049@ccmode{} keeps the indentation, fixes suitable comment line prefixes,
@@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ set this up for you, so you probably won't have to bother.
1059@cindex paragraph filling 1059@cindex paragraph filling
1060Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of 1060Line breaks are by default handled (almost) the same regardless of
1061whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto 1061whether they are made by auto fill mode (@pxref{Auto
1062Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g. with 1062Fill,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}), by paragraph filling (e.g., with
1063@kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In 1063@kbd{M-q}), or explicitly with @kbd{M-j} or similar methods. In
1064string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the 1064string literals, the new line gets the same indentation as the
1065previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by 1065previous nonempty line.@footnote{You can change this default by
@@ -1120,7 +1120,7 @@ this function. @xref{Sample .emacs File}.
1120@findex c-context-open-line 1120@findex c-context-open-line
1121@findex context-open-line (c-) 1121@findex context-open-line (c-)
1122This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as 1122This is to @kbd{C-o} (@kbd{M-x open-line}) as
1123@code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e. it works just like 1123@code{c-context-line-break} is to @kbd{RET}. I.e., it works just like
1124@code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted 1124@code{c-context-line-break} but leaves the point before the inserted
1125line break. 1125line break.
1126@end table 1126@end table
@@ -1144,7 +1144,7 @@ editing chaotically formatted code. It can also be disconcerting,
1144especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}. 1144especially for users who are new to @ccmode{}.
1145@item auto-newline mode 1145@item auto-newline mode
1146This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type 1146This automatically inserts newlines where you'd probably want to type
1147them yourself, e.g. after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed 1147them yourself, e.g., after typing @samp{@}}s. Its action is suppressed
1148when electric mode is disabled. 1148when electric mode is disabled.
1149@item hungry-delete mode 1149@item hungry-delete mode
1150This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single 1150This lets you delete a contiguous block of whitespace with a single
@@ -1155,7 +1155,7 @@ last statement.
1155This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f} 1155This mode makes basic word movement commands like @kbd{M-f}
1156(@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the 1156(@code{forward-word}) and @kbd{M-b} (@code{backward-word}) treat the
1157parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words. 1157parts of sillycapsed symbols as different words.
1158E.g. @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS}, 1158E.g., @samp{NSGraphicsContext} is treated as three words @samp{NS},
1159@samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}. 1159@samp{Graphics}, and @samp{Context}.
1160@item syntactic-indentation mode 1160@item syntactic-indentation mode
1161When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such 1161When this is enabled (which it normally is), indentation commands such
@@ -1288,7 +1288,7 @@ A star (bound to @code{c-electric-star}) or a slash
1288(@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the 1288(@code{c-electric-slash}) causes reindentation when you type it as the
1289second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a 1289second component of a C style block comment opener (@samp{/*}) or a
1290C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the 1290C++ line comment opener (@samp{//}) respectively, but only if the
1291comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e. there's only 1291comment opener is the first thing on the line (i.e., there's only
1292whitespace before it). 1292whitespace before it).
1293 1293
1294Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at 1294Additionally, you can configure @ccmode{} so that typing a slash at
@@ -1426,7 +1426,7 @@ Auto-newline only triggers when the following conditions hold:
1426@itemize @bullet 1426@itemize @bullet
1427@item 1427@item
1428Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator 1428Auto-newline minor mode is enabled, as evidenced by the indicator
1429@samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g. @samp{C/a} or 1429@samp{a} after the mode name on the modeline (e.g., @samp{C/a} or
1430@samp{C/la}). 1430@samp{C/la}).
1431 1431
1432@item 1432@item
@@ -1446,7 +1446,7 @@ definition. These constructs are also known as @dfn{syntactic
1446whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}. 1446whitespace} since they are usually ignored when scanning C code.}.
1447 1447
1448@item 1448@item
1449No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e. it was typed as 1449No numeric argument was supplied to the command (i.e., it was typed as
1450normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix). 1450normal, with no @kbd{C-u} prefix).
1451@end itemize 1451@end itemize
1452 1452
@@ -1631,7 +1631,7 @@ trouble with this in GNU Emacs.
1631@cindex nomenclature 1631@cindex nomenclature
1632@cindex subword 1632@cindex subword
1633In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol 1633In spite of the GNU Coding Standards, it is popular to name a symbol
1634by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g. @samp{GtkWidget}, 1634by mixing uppercase and lowercase letters, e.g., @samp{GtkWidget},
1635@samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call 1635@samp{EmacsFrameClass}, or @samp{NSGraphicsContext}. Here we call
1636these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized 1636these mixed case symbols @dfn{nomenclatures}. Also, each capitalized
1637(or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a 1637(or completely uppercase) part of a nomenclature is called a
@@ -1819,7 +1819,7 @@ Lock,,, emacs, GNU Emacs Manual}, for ways to enable font locking in
1819 1819
1820@strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not 1820@strong{Please note:} The font locking in AWK mode is currently not
1821integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this 1821integrated with the rest of @ccmode{}. Only the last section of this
1822chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK. The other 1822chapter, @ref{AWK Mode Font Locking}, applies to AWK@. The other
1823sections apply to the other languages. 1823sections apply to the other languages.
1824 1824
1825@menu 1825@menu
@@ -1912,7 +1912,7 @@ additional regexps to match those you use:
1912For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types}, 1912For each language there's a variable @code{*-font-lock-extra-types},
1913where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list 1913where @samp{*} stands for the language in question. It contains a list
1914of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types, 1914of regexps that matches identifiers that should be recognized as types,
1915e.g. @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t} 1915e.g., @samp{\\sw+_t} to recognize all identifiers ending with @samp{_t}
1916as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a 1916as is customary in C code. Each regexp should not match more than a
1917single identifier. 1917single identifier.
1918 1918
@@ -2009,7 +2009,7 @@ labels.
2009@vindex font-lock-builtin-face 2009@vindex font-lock-builtin-face
2010@vindex font-lock-reference-face 2010@vindex font-lock-reference-face
2011Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it 2011Preprocessor directives get @code{font-lock-preprocessor-face} if it
2012exists (i.e. XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face} 2012exists (i.e., XEmacs). In Emacs they get @code{font-lock-builtin-face}
2013or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent. 2013or @code{font-lock-reference-face}, for lack of a closer equivalent.
2014 2014
2015@item 2015@item
@@ -2035,14 +2035,14 @@ since those aren't syntactic errors in themselves.
2035@comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 2035@comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2036 2036
2037There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as 2037There are various tools to supply documentation in the source as
2038specially structured comments, e.g. the standard Javadoc tool in Java. 2038specially structured comments, e.g., the standard Javadoc tool in Java.
2039@ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and 2039@ccmode{} provides an extensible mechanism to fontify such comments and
2040the special markup inside them. 2040the special markup inside them.
2041 2041
2042@defopt c-doc-comment-style 2042@defopt c-doc-comment-style
2043@vindex doc-comment-style (c-) 2043@vindex doc-comment-style (c-)
2044This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment 2044This is a style variable that specifies which documentation comment
2045style to recognize, e.g. @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments. 2045style to recognize, e.g., @code{javadoc} for Javadoc comments.
2046 2046
2047The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are 2047The value may also be a list of styles, in which case all of them are
2048recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't 2048recognized simultaneously (presumably with markup cues that don't
@@ -2060,7 +2060,7 @@ The default value for @code{c-doc-comment-style} is
2060Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that 2060Note that @ccmode{} uses this variable to set other variables that
2061handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when 2061handle fontification etc. That's done at mode initialization or when
2062you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it 2062you switch to a style which sets this variable. Thus, if you change it
2063in some other way, e.g. interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need 2063in some other way, e.g., interactively in a CC Mode buffer, you will need
2064to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to 2064to do @kbd{M-x java-mode} (or whatever mode you're currently using) to
2065reinitialize. 2065reinitialize.
2066 2066
@@ -2351,7 +2351,7 @@ have it enabled by default by placing the following in your
2351@cindex mode hooks 2351@cindex mode hooks
2352@comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 2352@comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
2353@c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in 2353@c The node name is "CC Hooks" rather than "Hooks" because of a bug in
2354@c some older versions of Info, e.g. the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3. 2354@c some older versions of Info, e.g., the info.el in GNU Emacs 21.3.
2355@c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC 2355@c If you go to "Config Basics" and hit <CR> on the xref to "CC
2356@c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC 2356@c Hooks" the function Info-follow-reference searches for "*Note: CC
2357@c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead 2357@c Hooks" from the beginning of the page. If this node were instead
@@ -2429,7 +2429,7 @@ file.
2429The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called 2429The variables that @ccmode{}'s style system control are called
2430@dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp 2430@dfn{style variables}. Note that style variables are ordinary Lisp
2431variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their 2431variables, which the style system initializes; you can change their
2432values at any time (e.g. in a hook function). The style system can 2432values at any time (e.g., in a hook function). The style system can
2433also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}. 2433also set other variables, to some extent. @xref{Styles}.
2434 2434
2435@dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways: 2435@dfn{Style variables} are handled specially in several ways:
@@ -2921,9 +2921,9 @@ visit the file, @ccmode{} will automatically institute these offsets
2921using @code{c-set-offset}. 2921using @code{c-set-offset}.
2922@end defvar 2922@end defvar
2923 2923
2924Note that file style settings (i.e. @code{c-file-style}) are applied 2924Note that file style settings (i.e., @code{c-file-style}) are applied
2925before file offset settings 2925before file offset settings
2926(i.e. @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set 2926(i.e., @code{c-file-offsets})@footnote{Also, if either of these are set
2927in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are 2927in a file's local variable section, all the style variable values are
2928made local to that buffer, even if 2928made local to that buffer, even if
2929@code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this 2929@code{c-style-variables-are-local-p} is @code{nil}. Since this
@@ -3001,7 +3001,7 @@ subsequent lines of C style block comments like
3001@noindent 3001@noindent
3002with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change 3002with zero or more stars at the beginning of every line. If you change
3003this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter 3003this variable, please make sure it still matches the comment starter
3004(i.e. @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside 3004(i.e., @code{//}) of line comments @emph{and} the line prefix inside
3005block comments. 3005block comments.
3006 3006
3007@findex c-setup-paragraph-variables 3007@findex c-setup-paragraph-variables
@@ -3024,7 +3024,7 @@ the line prefix from the other lines in the comment.
3024@ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU 3024@ccmode{} uses adaptive fill mode (@pxref{Adaptive Fill,,, emacs, GNU
3025Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when 3025Emacs Manual}) to make Emacs correctly keep the line prefix when
3026filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text 3026filling paragraphs. That also makes Emacs preserve the text
3027indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g. in the 3027indentation @emph{inside} the comment line prefix. E.g., in the
3028following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left 3028following comment, both paragraphs will be filled with the left
3029margins of the texts kept intact: 3029margins of the texts kept intact:
3030 3030
@@ -3055,7 +3055,7 @@ by default). A patch for that is available from
3055@c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case. 3055@c 2005/11/22: The above is still believed to be the case.
3056which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience 3056which handles things like bulleted lists nicely. There's a convenience
3057function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in 3057function @code{c-setup-filladapt} that tunes the relevant variables in
3058Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g. with 3058Filladapt for use in @ccmode{}. Call it from a mode hook, e.g., with
3059something like this in your @file{.emacs}: 3059something like this in your @file{.emacs}:
3060 3060
3061@example 3061@example
@@ -3081,7 +3081,7 @@ then as the comment prefix. It defaults to @samp{*
3081@code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default 3081@code{c-block-comment-prefix} typically gets overridden by the default
3082style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line 3082style @code{gnu}, which sets it to blank. You can see the line
3083splitting effect described here by setting a different style, 3083splitting effect described here by setting a different style,
3084e.g. @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment 3084e.g., @code{k&r} @xref{Choosing a Style}.}, which makes a comment
3085 3085
3086@example 3086@example
3087/* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */ 3087/* Got O(n^2) here, which is a Bad Thing. */
@@ -3108,7 +3108,7 @@ most common comment styles, see @ref{Line-Up Functions}.
3108@defopt c-ignore-auto-fill 3108@defopt c-ignore-auto-fill
3109@vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-) 3109@vindex ignore-auto-fill (c-)
3110When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it 3110When auto fill mode is enabled, @ccmode{} can selectively ignore it
3111depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g. to never 3111depending on the context the line break would occur in, e.g., to never
3112break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable 3112break a line automatically inside a string literal. This variable
3113takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling 3113takes a list of symbols for the different contexts where auto-filling
3114never should occur: 3114never should occur:
@@ -3123,7 +3123,7 @@ Inside a C++ style line comment.
3123@item cpp 3123@item cpp
3124Inside a preprocessor directive. 3124Inside a preprocessor directive.
3125@item code 3125@item code
3126Anywhere else, i.e. in normal code. 3126Anywhere else, i.e., in normal code.
3127@end table 3127@end table
3128 3128
3129By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp 3129By default, @code{c-ignore-auto-fill} is set to @code{(string cpp
@@ -3151,7 +3151,7 @@ Note that @ccmode{} sets @code{comment-multi-line} to @code{t} at
3151startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences 3151startup. The reason is that @kbd{M-j} could otherwise produce sequences
3152of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated 3152of single line block comments for texts that should logically be treated
3153as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code 3153as one comment, and the rest of the paragraph handling code
3154(e.g. @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to 3154(e.g., @kbd{M-q} and @kbd{M-a}) can't cope with that, which would lead to
3155inconsistent behavior. 3155inconsistent behavior.
3156 3156
3157@comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 3157@comment !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
@@ -3380,12 +3380,12 @@ giving a syntactic symbol an @dfn{action function} in
3380 3380
3381@cindex customization, brace hanging 3381@cindex customization, brace hanging
3382An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol 3382An action function is called with two arguments: the syntactic symbol
3383for the brace (e.g. @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position 3383for the brace (e.g., @code{substatement-open}), and the buffer position
3384where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an 3384where the brace has been inserted. Point is undefined on entry to an
3385action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g. by using 3385action function, but the function must preserve it (e.g., by using
3386@code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing 3386@code{save-excursion}). The return value should be a list containing
3387some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither 3387some combination of @code{before} and @code{after}, including neither
3388of them (i.e. @code{nil}). 3388of them (i.e., @code{nil}).
3389 3389
3390@defvar c-syntactic-context 3390@defvar c-syntactic-context
3391@vindex syntactic-context (c-) 3391@vindex syntactic-context (c-)
@@ -3566,7 +3566,7 @@ statements. In addition to
3566@ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function 3566@ccmode{} also comes with the criteria function
3567@code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses 3567@code{c-semi&comma-no-newlines-for-oneline-inliners}, which suppresses
3568newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions 3568newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3569(e.g. in C++ or Java). 3569(e.g., in C++ or Java).
3570@end defun 3570@end defun
3571 3571
3572 3572
@@ -3580,7 +3580,7 @@ newlines after semicolons inside one-line inline method definitions
3580@dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add) 3580@dfn{Clean-ups} are mechanisms which remove (or exceptionally, add)
3581whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon 3581whitespace in specific circumstances and are complementary to colon
3582and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into 3582and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3583@code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g. like this: 3583@code{c-cleanup-list}, e.g., like this:
3584 3584
3585@example 3585@example
3586(add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall) 3586(add-to-list 'c-cleanup-list 'space-before-funcall)
@@ -3588,7 +3588,7 @@ and brace hanging. You enable a clean-up by adding its symbol into
3588 3588
3589On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality 3589On the surface, it would seem that clean-ups overlap the functionality
3590provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups, 3590provided by the @code{c-hanging-*-alist} variables. Clean-ups,
3591however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e. to adjust 3591however, are used to adjust code ``after-the-fact'', i.e., to adjust
3592the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed. 3592the whitespace in constructs later than when they were typed.
3593 3593
3594Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are 3594Most of the clean-ups remove automatically inserted newlines, and are
@@ -3799,7 +3799,7 @@ Auto-newline minor mode are enabled:
3799@item space-before-funcall 3799@item space-before-funcall
3800Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis 3800Insert a space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3801of a function call. This produces function calls in the style 3801of a function call. This produces function calls in the style
3802mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g. @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT, 3802mandated by the GNU coding standards, e.g., @samp{signal@w{ }(SIGINT,
3803SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening 3803SIG_IGN)} and @samp{abort@w{ }()}. Clean up occurs when the opening
3804parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK 3804parenthesis is typed. This clean-up should never be active in AWK
3805Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined 3805Mode, since such a space is syntactically invalid for user defined
@@ -3810,13 +3810,13 @@ Clean up any space between the function name and the opening parenthesis
3810of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used 3810of a function call that has no arguments. This is typically used
3811together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function 3811together with @code{space-before-funcall} if you prefer the GNU function
3812call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when 3812call style for functions with arguments but think it looks ugly when
3813it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e. you will get @samp{signal 3813it's only an empty parenthesis pair. I.e., you will get @samp{signal
3814(SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the 3814(SIGINT, SIG_IGN)}, but @samp{abort()}. Clean up occurs when the
3815closing parenthesis is typed. 3815closing parenthesis is typed.
3816 3816
3817@item comment-close-slash 3817@item comment-close-slash
3818When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash 3818When inside a block comment, terminate the comment when you type a slash
3819at the beginning of a line (i.e. immediately after the comment prefix). 3819at the beginning of a line (i.e., immediately after the comment prefix).
3820This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed, 3820This clean-up removes whitespace preceding the slash and if needed,
3821inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this 3821inserts a star to complete the token @samp{*/}. Type @kbd{C-q /} in this
3822situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted. 3822situation if you just want a literal @samp{/} inserted.
@@ -3910,7 +3910,7 @@ brief and typical example:
3910@noindent 3910@noindent
3911The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a 3911The first thing inside each syntactic element is always a
3912@dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was 3912@dfn{syntactic symbol}. It describes the kind of construct that was
3913recognized, e.g. @code{statement}, @code{substatement}, 3913recognized, e.g., @code{statement}, @code{substatement},
3914@code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols}, 3914@code{class-open}, @code{class-close}, etc. @xref{Syntactic Symbols},
3915for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and 3915for a complete list of currently recognized syntactic symbols and
3916their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated 3916their semantics. The remaining entries are various data associated
@@ -3951,7 +3951,7 @@ position(s).
3951@end table 3951@end table
3952 3952
3953 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo 3953 Running this command on line 4 of this example, we'd see in the echo
3954area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e. @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the 3954area@footnote{With a universal argument (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-s}) the
3955analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current 3955analysis is inserted into the buffer as a comment on the current
3956line.}: 3956line.}:
3957 3957
@@ -4219,7 +4219,7 @@ Method Symbols}.
4219Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method 4219Lines continuing an Objective-C method call. @ref{Objective-C Method
4220Symbols}. 4220Symbols}.
4221@item extern-lang-open 4221@item extern-lang-open
4222Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g. @code{extern "C" 4222Brace that opens an @code{extern} block (e.g., @code{extern "C"
4223@{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}. 4223@{...@}}). @ref{External Scope Symbols}.
4224@item extern-lang-close 4224@item extern-lang-close
4225Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope 4225Brace that closes an @code{extern} block. @ref{External Scope
@@ -4246,10 +4246,10 @@ Analogous to the above, but for CORBA CIDL @code{composition} blocks.
4246C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}. 4246C++ template argument list continuations. @ref{Class Symbols}.
4247@item inlambda 4247@item inlambda
4248Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda 4248Analogous to @code{inclass} syntactic symbol, but used inside lambda
4249(i.e. anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement 4249(i.e., anonymous) functions. Only used in Pike mode. @ref{Statement
4250Block Symbols}. 4250Block Symbols}.
4251@item lambda-intro-cont 4251@item lambda-intro-cont
4252Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e. between the 4252Lines continuing the header of a lambda function, i.e., between the
4253@code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode. 4253@code{lambda} keyword and the function body. Only used in Pike mode.
4254@ref{Statement Block Symbols}. 4254@ref{Statement Block Symbols}.
4255@item inexpr-statement 4255@item inexpr-statement
@@ -4311,7 +4311,7 @@ top-level construct introduction so it has the syntax
4311the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the 4311the brace that opens a top-level function definition. Line 9 is the
4312corresponding 4312corresponding
4313@code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level 4313@code{defun-close} since it contains the brace that closes the top-level
4314function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e. it is 4314function definition. Line 4 is a @code{defun-block-intro}, i.e., it is
4315the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a 4315the first line of a brace-block, enclosed in a
4316top-level function definition. 4316top-level function definition.
4317 4317
@@ -4360,7 +4360,7 @@ structs, and unions are essentially equivalent syntactically (and are
4360very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the 4360very similar semantically), so replacing the @code{class} keyword in the
4361example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a 4361example above with @code{struct} or @code{union} would still result in a
4362syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even 4362syntax of @code{class-open} for line 4 @footnote{This is the case even
4363for C and Objective-C. For consistency, structs in all supported 4363for C and Objective-C@. For consistency, structs in all supported
4364languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that 4364languages are syntactically equivalent to classes. Note however that
4365the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}. 4365the keyword @code{class} is meaningless in C and Objective-C.}.
4366Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax. 4366Similarly, line 18 is assigned @code{class-close} syntax.
@@ -4668,7 +4668,7 @@ where @code{inextern-lang} is a modifier similar in purpose to
4668 4668
4669There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they 4669There are various other top level blocks like @code{extern}, and they
4670are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after 4670are all treated in the same way except that the symbols are named after
4671the keyword that introduces the block. E.g. C++ namespace blocks get 4671the keyword that introduces the block. E.g., C++ namespace blocks get
4672the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and 4672the three symbols @code{namespace-open}, @code{namespace-close} and
4673@code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are: 4673@code{innamespace}. The currently recognized top level blocks are:
4674 4674
@@ -4857,9 +4857,9 @@ Line 17 is assigned @code{stream-op} syntax.
4857@ssindex cpp-define-intro 4857@ssindex cpp-define-intro
4858@ssindex cpp-macro-cont 4858@ssindex cpp-macro-cont
4859Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like 4859Multiline preprocessor macro definitions are normally handled just like
4860other code, i.e. the lines inside them are indented according to the 4860other code, i.e., the lines inside them are indented according to the
4861syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first 4861syntactic analysis of the preceding lines inside the macro. The first
4862line inside a macro definition (i.e. the line after the starting line of 4862line inside a macro definition (i.e., the line after the starting line of
4863the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example: 4863the cpp directive itself) gets @code{cpp-define-intro}. In this example:
4864 4864
4865@example 4865@example
@@ -4875,7 +4875,7 @@ line 1 is given the syntactic symbol @code{cpp-macro}. The first line
4875of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given 4875of a cpp directive is always given that symbol. Line 2 is given
4876@code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole 4876@code{cpp-define-intro}, so that you can give the macro body as a whole
4877some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal 4877some extra indentation. Lines 3 through 5 are then analyzed as normal
4878code, i.e. @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause} 4878code, i.e., @code{substatement} on lines 3 and 4, and @code{else-clause}
4879on line 5. 4879on line 5.
4880 4880
4881The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with 4881The syntactic analysis inside macros can be turned off with
@@ -5025,7 +5025,7 @@ handled like this too.
5025@ssindex knr-argdecl-intro 5025@ssindex knr-argdecl-intro
5026@ssindex knr-argdecl 5026@ssindex knr-argdecl
5027Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C 5027Two other syntactic symbols can appear in old style, non-prototyped C
5028code @footnote{a.k.a. K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}: 5028code @footnote{a.k.a.@: K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5029 5029
5030@example 5030@example
5031 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c) 5031 1: int add_three_integers(a, b, c)
@@ -5039,7 +5039,7 @@ code @footnote{a.k.a. K&R C, or Kernighan & Ritchie C}:
5039 5039
5040Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is 5040Here, line 2 is the first line in an argument declaration list and so is
5041given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines 5041given the @code{knr-argdecl-intro} syntactic symbol. Subsequent lines
5042(i.e. lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl} 5042(i.e., lines 3 and 4 in this example), are given @code{knr-argdecl}
5043syntax. 5043syntax.
5044 5044
5045 5045
@@ -5703,7 +5703,7 @@ expressions.
5703@defun c-lineup-inexpr-block 5703@defun c-lineup-inexpr-block
5704@findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-) 5704@findex lineup-inexpr-block (c-)
5705This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the 5705This can be used with the in-expression block symbols to indent the
5706whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g. for Java 5706whole block to the column where the construct is started. E.g., for Java
5707anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword, 5707anonymous classes, this lines up the class under the @samp{new} keyword,
5708and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda} 5708and in Pike it lines up the lambda function body under the @samp{lambda}
5709keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a 5709keyword. Returns @code{nil} if the block isn't part of such a
@@ -5793,7 +5793,7 @@ In the first case the indentation is kept unchanged, in the second
5793@code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close}, 5793@code{inline-close}, @code{block-close}, @code{brace-list-close},
5794@code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro}, 5794@code{brace-list-intro}, @code{statement-block-intro},
5795@code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, 5795@code{arglist-intro}, @code{arglist-cont-nonempty},
5796@code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g. @code{inclass} 5796@code{arglist-close}, and all @code{in*} symbols, e.g., @code{inclass}
5797and @code{inextern-lang}. 5797and @code{inextern-lang}.
5798@end defun 5798@end defun
5799 5799
@@ -6053,7 +6053,7 @@ if ( x < 10
6053 6053
6054Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix 6054Since this function doesn't do anything for lines without an infix
6055operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup 6055operator you typically want to use it together with some other lineup
6056settings, e.g. as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a 6056settings, e.g., as follows (the @code{arglist-close} setting is just a
6057suggestion to get a consistent style): 6057suggestion to get a consistent style):
6058 6058
6059@example 6059@example
@@ -6087,7 +6087,7 @@ operator too, try to align it with the first one.
6087@defun c-lineup-math 6087@defun c-lineup-math
6088@findex lineup-math (c-) 6088@findex lineup-math (c-)
6089Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset} 6089Like @code{c-lineup-assignments} but indent with @code{c-basic-offset}
6090if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e. this 6090if no assignment operator was found on the first line. I.e., this
6091function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments 6091function is the same as specifying a list @code{(c-lineup-assignments
6092+)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations. 6092+)}. It's provided for compatibility with old configurations.
6093 6093
@@ -6123,7 +6123,7 @@ expressions.
6123 6123
6124@defun c-lineup-streamop 6124@defun c-lineup-streamop
6125@findex lineup-streamop (c-) 6125@findex lineup-streamop (c-)
6126Line up C++ stream operators (i.e. @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}). 6126Line up C++ stream operators (i.e., @samp{<<} and @samp{>>}).
6127 6127
6128@workswith @code{stream-op}. 6128@workswith @code{stream-op}.
6129@end defun 6129@end defun
@@ -6204,7 +6204,7 @@ to handle most of the common comment styles. Some examples:
6204@end example 6204@end example
6205 6205
6206The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize 6206The style variable @code{c-comment-prefix-regexp} is used to recognize
6207the comment line prefix, e.g. the @samp{*} that usually starts every 6207the comment line prefix, e.g., the @samp{*} that usually starts every
6208line inside a comment. 6208line inside a comment.
6209 6209
6210@workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol. 6210@workswith The @code{c} syntactic symbol.
@@ -6315,7 +6315,7 @@ int dribble() @{
6315 6315
6316If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the 6316If @code{c-syntactic-indentation-in-macros} is non-@code{nil}, the
6317function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to 6317function returns the relative indentation to the macro start line to
6318allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g. in the following cases, 6318allow accumulation with other offsets. E.g., in the following cases,
6319@code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the 6319@code{cpp-define-intro} is combined with the
6320@code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs 6320@code{statement-block-intro} that comes from the @samp{do @{} that hangs
6321on the @samp{#define} line: 6321on the @samp{#define} line:
@@ -6390,7 +6390,7 @@ The @samp{x} line is aligned to the text after the @samp{:} on the
6390This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to 6390This is done only in an @samp{asm} or @samp{__asm__} block, and only to
6391those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual 6391those lines mentioned. Anywhere else @code{nil} is returned. The usual
6392arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of 6392arrangement is to have this routine as an extra feature at the start of
6393arglist lineups, e.g. 6393arglist lineups, e.g.:
6394 6394
6395@example 6395@example
6396(c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist) 6396(c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg c-lineup-arglist)
@@ -6486,7 +6486,7 @@ another line-up function. Full details of these are in
6486 6486
6487Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the 6487Line-up functions must not move point or change the content of the
6488buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do 6488buffer (except temporarily). They are however allowed to do
6489@dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e. setting text properties for caching 6489@dfn{hidden buffer changes}, i.e., setting text properties for caching
6490purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run. 6490purposes etc. Buffer undo recording is disabled while they run.
6491 6491
6492The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is 6492The syntactic element passed as the parameter to a line-up function is
@@ -6514,7 +6514,7 @@ your setup for this by using the access functions
6514@vindex syntactic-element (c-) 6514@vindex syntactic-element (c-)
6515@vindex c-syntactic-context 6515@vindex c-syntactic-context
6516@vindex syntactic-context (c-) 6516@vindex syntactic-context (c-)
6517Some syntactic symbols, e.g. @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more 6517Some syntactic symbols, e.g., @code{arglist-cont-nonempty}, have more
6518info in the syntactic element - typically other positions that can be 6518info in the syntactic element - typically other positions that can be
6519interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed 6519interesting besides the anchor position. That info can't be accessed
6520through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can 6520through the passed argument, which is a cons cell. Instead, you can
@@ -6600,9 +6600,9 @@ Line-Up}).
6600 6600
6601When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable 6601When the indentation engine calls this hook, the variable
6602@code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context 6602@code{c-syntactic-context} is bound to the current syntactic context
6603(i.e. what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line. 6603(i.e., what you would get by typing @kbd{C-c C-s} on the source line.
6604@xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark 6604@xref{Custom Braces}.). Note that you should not change point or mark
6605inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e. you'll probably 6605inside a @code{c-special-indent-hook} function, i.e., you'll probably
6606want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The 6606want to wrap your function in a @code{save-excursion}@footnote{The
6607numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the 6607numerical value returned by @code{point} will change if you change the
6608indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point 6608indentation of the line within a @code{save-excursion} form, but point
@@ -6673,11 +6673,11 @@ customized with these variables:
6673These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation 6673These variables control the alignment columns for line continuation
6674backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that 6674backslashes in multiline macros. They are used by the functions that
6675automatically insert or align such backslashes, 6675automatically insert or align such backslashes,
6676e.g. @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}. 6676e.g., @code{c-backslash-region} and @code{c-context-line-break}.
6677 6677
6678@code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the 6678@code{c-backslash-column} specifies the minimum column for the
6679backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the 6679backslashes. If any line in the macro goes past this column, then the
6680next tab stop (i.e. next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is 6680next tab stop (i.e., next multiple of @code{tab-width}) in that line is
6681used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they 6681used as the alignment column for all the backslashes, so that they
6682remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past 6682remain in a single column. However, if any lines go past
6683@code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the 6683@code{c-backslash-max-column} then the backslashes in the rest of the
@@ -6693,7 +6693,7 @@ the automatic alignment of backslashes, use
6693@vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-) 6693@vindex auto-align-backslashes (c-)
6694Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if 6694Align automatically inserted line continuation backslashes if
6695non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted 6695non-@code{nil}. When line continuation backslashes are inserted
6696automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g. by 6696automatically for line breaks in multiline macros, e.g., by
6697@code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other 6697@code{c-context-line-break}, they are aligned with the other
6698backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set. 6698backslashes in the same macro if this flag is set.
6699 6699
@@ -6878,9 +6878,9 @@ pathological code can cause @ccmode{} to perform fairly badly. This
6878section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts 6878section gives some insight in how @ccmode{} operates, how that interacts
6879with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance. 6879with some coding styles, and what you can use to improve performance.
6880 6880
6881The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e. take 6881The overall goal is that @ccmode{} shouldn't be overly slow (i.e., take
6882more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation. 6882more than a fraction of a second) in any interactive operation.
6883I.e. it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations, 6883I.e., it's tuned to limit the maximum response time in single operations,
6884which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like 6884which is sometimes at the expense of batch-like operations like
6885reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets 6885reindenting whole blocks. If you find that @ccmode{} gradually gets
6886slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in 6886slower and slower in certain situations, perhaps as the file grows in
@@ -6898,7 +6898,7 @@ gets.
6898 6898
6899@findex beginning-of-defun 6899@findex beginning-of-defun
6900In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the 6900In earlier versions of @ccmode{}, we used to recommend putting the
6901opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g. a function in C, 6901opening brace of a top-level construct@footnote{E.g., a function in C,
6902or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost 6902or outermost class definition in C++ or Java.} into the leftmost
6903column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as 6903column. Earlier still, this used to be a rigid Emacs constraint, as
6904embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now 6904embodied in the @code{beginning-of-defun} function. @ccmode now
@@ -6940,7 +6940,7 @@ XEmacs users can set the variable
6940tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some 6940tells @ccmode{} to use XEmacs-specific built-in functions which, in some
6941circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than 6941circumstances, can locate the top-most opening brace much more quickly than
6942@code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for 6942@code{beginning-of-defun}. Preliminary testing has shown that for
6943styles where these braces are hung (e.g. most JDK-derived Java styles), 6943styles where these braces are hung (e.g., most JDK-derived Java styles),
6944this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines 6944this hack can improve performance of the core syntax parsing routines
6945from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to 6945from 3 to 60 times. However, for styles which @emph{do} conform to
6946Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero, 6946Emacs's recommended style of putting top-level braces in column zero,
@@ -6951,7 +6951,7 @@ in Emacs since the necessary built-in functions don't exist (in Emacs
695122.1 as of this writing in February 2007). 695122.1 as of this writing in February 2007).
6952 6952
6953Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace, 6953Text properties are used to speed up skipping over syntactic whitespace,
6954i.e. comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a 6954i.e., comments and preprocessor directives. Indenting a line after a
6955huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the 6955huge macro definition can be slow the first time, but after that the
6956text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've 6956text properties are in place and it should be fast (even after you've
6957edited other parts of the file and then moved back). 6957edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
@@ -6959,7 +6959,7 @@ edited other parts of the file and then moved back).
6959Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on 6959Font locking can be a CPU hog, especially the font locking done on
6960decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that 6960decoration level 3 which tries to be very accurate. Note that that
6961level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only 6961level is designed to be used with a font lock support mode that only
6962fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e. Lazy Lock or Just-in-time 6962fontifies the text that's actually shown, i.e., Lazy Lock or Just-in-time
6963Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole 6963Lock mode, so make sure you use one of them. Fontification of a whole
6964buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is 6964buffer with some thousand lines can often take over a minute. That is
6965a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen. 6965a known weakness; the idea is that it never should happen.
@@ -6998,14 +6998,14 @@ geared to be used interactively to edit new code. There's currently no
6998intention to change this goal. 6998intention to change this goal.
6999 6999
7000If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some 7000If you want to reformat old code, you're probably better off using some
7001other tool instead, e.g. @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent' 7001other tool instead, e.g., @ref{Top, , GNU indent, indent, The `indent'
7002Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than 7002Manual}, which has more powerful reformatting capabilities than
7003@ccmode{}. 7003@ccmode{}.
7004 7004
7005@item 7005@item
7006The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete. 7006The support for C++ templates (in angle brackets) is not yet complete.
7007When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents 7007When a non-nested template is used in a declaration, @ccmode{} indents
7008it and font-locks it OK. Templates used in expressions, and nested 7008it and font-locks it OK@. Templates used in expressions, and nested
7009templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify 7009templates do not fare so well. Sometimes a workaround is to refontify
7010the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}. 7010the expression after typing the closing @samp{>}.
7011 7011
@@ -7063,7 +7063,7 @@ too by adding this to your @code{c-initialization-hook}:
7063@end example 7063@end example
7064 7064
7065@xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want 7065@xref{Getting Started}. This is a very common question. If you want
7066this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS! @t{:-)} 7066this to be the default behavior, don't lobby us, lobby RMS@! @t{:-)}
7067 7067
7068@item 7068@item
7069@emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?} 7069@emph{How do I stop my code jumping all over the place when I type?}
@@ -7169,7 +7169,7 @@ to include any code that appears @emph{before} your bug example, if
7169you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it. 7169you think it might affect our ability to reproduce it.
7170 7170
7171Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any 7171Please try to produce the problem in an Emacs instance without any
7172customizations loaded (i.e. start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file} 7172customizations loaded (i.e., start it with the @samp{-q --no-site-file}
7173arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused 7173arguments). If it works correctly there, the problem might be caused
7174by faulty customizations in either your own or your site 7174by faulty customizations in either your own or your site
7175configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the 7175configuration. In that case, we'd appreciate it if you isolate the
diff --git a/doc/misc/cl.texi b/doc/misc/cl.texi
index beefa3e9c40..67d99153951 100644
--- a/doc/misc/cl.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/cl.texi
@@ -191,11 +191,11 @@ but use different function names (in fact, @file{cl.el} mainly just
191defines aliases to the @file{cl-lib.el} definitions). Where 191defines aliases to the @file{cl-lib.el} definitions). Where
192@file{cl-lib.el} defines a function called, for example, 192@file{cl-lib.el} defines a function called, for example,
193@code{cl-incf}, @file{cl.el} uses the same name but without the 193@code{cl-incf}, @file{cl.el} uses the same name but without the
194@samp{cl-} prefix, e.g.@: @code{incf} in this example. There are a few 194@samp{cl-} prefix, e.g., @code{incf} in this example. There are a few
195exceptions to this. First, functions such as @code{cl-defun} where 195exceptions to this. First, functions such as @code{cl-defun} where
196the unprefixed version was already used for a standard Emacs Lisp 196the unprefixed version was already used for a standard Emacs Lisp
197function. In such cases, the @file{cl.el} version adds a @samp{*} 197function. In such cases, the @file{cl.el} version adds a @samp{*}
198suffix, e.g.@: @code{defun*}. Second, there are some obsolete features 198suffix, e.g., @code{defun*}. Second, there are some obsolete features
199that are only implemented in @file{cl.el}, not in @file{cl-lib.el}, 199that are only implemented in @file{cl.el}, not in @file{cl-lib.el},
200because they are replaced by other standard Emacs Lisp features. 200because they are replaced by other standard Emacs Lisp features.
201Finally, in a very few cases the old @file{cl.el} versions do not 201Finally, in a very few cases the old @file{cl.el} versions do not
@@ -898,8 +898,8 @@ generalized variables.
898@node Setf Extensions 898@node Setf Extensions
899@subsection Setf Extensions 899@subsection Setf Extensions
900 900
901Several standard (e.g.@: @code{car}) and Emacs-specific 901Several standard (e.g., @code{car}) and Emacs-specific
902(e.g.@: @code{window-point}) Lisp functions are @code{setf}-able by default. 902(e.g., @code{window-point}) Lisp functions are @code{setf}-able by default.
903This package defines @code{setf} handlers for several additional functions: 903This package defines @code{setf} handlers for several additional functions:
904 904
905@itemize 905@itemize
@@ -4870,7 +4870,7 @@ direct C-language calls to the message routines rather than going
4870through the Lisp @code{message} function. 4870through the Lisp @code{message} function.
4871 4871
4872@c Bug#411. 4872@c Bug#411.
4873Note that many primitives (e.g.@: @code{+}) have special byte-compile 4873Note that many primitives (e.g., @code{+}) have special byte-compile
4874handling. Attempts to redefine such functions using @code{flet} will 4874handling. Attempts to redefine such functions using @code{flet} will
4875fail if byte-compiled. 4875fail if byte-compiled.
4876@c Or cl-flet. 4876@c Or cl-flet.
diff --git a/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi b/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi
index 6db27a38808..e13ca4714a7 100644
--- a/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi
@@ -445,7 +445,7 @@ where no highlight is displayed.
445 445
446Class trees are displayed in @dfn{tree buffers} which install their own 446Class trees are displayed in @dfn{tree buffers} which install their own
447major mode. Most Emacs keys work in tree buffers in the usual way, 447major mode. Most Emacs keys work in tree buffers in the usual way,
448e.g.@: you can move around in the buffer with the usual @kbd{C-f}, 448e.g., you can move around in the buffer with the usual @kbd{C-f},
449@kbd{C-v} etc., or you can search with @kbd{C-s}. 449@kbd{C-v} etc., or you can search with @kbd{C-s}.
450 450
451Tree-specific commands are bound to simple keystrokes, similar to 451Tree-specific commands are bound to simple keystrokes, similar to
@@ -953,7 +953,7 @@ the completion list. If necessary, the current member list is switched
953to the one containing the member. 953to the one containing the member.
954 954
955With a prefix argument (@kbd{C-u}), all members in the class tree, 955With a prefix argument (@kbd{C-u}), all members in the class tree,
956i.e.@: all members the browser knows about appear in the completion 956i.e., all members the browser knows about appear in the completion
957list. The member display will be switched to the class and member list 957list. The member display will be switched to the class and member list
958containing the member. 958containing the member.
959 959
@@ -1333,7 +1333,7 @@ This command sets point to the previous position in the position stack.
1333Directly after you performed a jump, this will put you back to the 1333Directly after you performed a jump, this will put you back to the
1334position where you came from. 1334position where you came from.
1335 1335
1336The stack is not popped, i.e.@: you can always switch back and forth 1336The stack is not popped, i.e., you can always switch back and forth
1337between positions in the stack. To avoid letting the stack grow to 1337between positions in the stack. To avoid letting the stack grow to
1338infinite size there is a maximum number of positions defined. When this 1338infinite size there is a maximum number of positions defined. When this
1339number is reached, older positions are discarded when new positions are 1339number is reached, older positions are discarded when new positions are
@@ -1415,7 +1415,7 @@ given regular expression. This command can be very useful if you
1415remember only part of a member name, and not its beginning. 1415remember only part of a member name, and not its beginning.
1416 1416
1417A special buffer is popped up containing all identifiers matching the 1417A special buffer is popped up containing all identifiers matching the
1418regular expression, and what kind of symbol it is (e.g.@: a member 1418regular expression, and what kind of symbol it is (e.g., a member
1419function, or a type). You can then switch to this buffer, and use the 1419function, or a type). You can then switch to this buffer, and use the
1420command @kbd{C-c C-m f}, for example, to jump to a specific member. 1420command @kbd{C-c C-m f}, for example, to jump to a specific member.
1421 1421
diff --git a/doc/misc/ede.texi b/doc/misc/ede.texi
index 1299f2ff062..34ec72fc193 100644
--- a/doc/misc/ede.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/ede.texi
@@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@ and has an optimized include file identification function.
1057@subsection Custom Locate 1057@subsection Custom Locate
1058 1058
1059The various simple project styles all have one major drawback, which 1059The various simple project styles all have one major drawback, which
1060is that the files in the project are not completely known to EDE. 1060is that the files in the project are not completely known to EDE@.
1061When the EDE API is used to try and file files by some reference name 1061When the EDE API is used to try and file files by some reference name
1062in the project, then that could fail. 1062in the project, then that could fail.
1063 1063
@@ -1074,7 +1074,7 @@ To enable one of these tools, set the variable
1074@code{ede-locate-setup-options} with the names of different locate 1074@code{ede-locate-setup-options} with the names of different locate
1075objects. @ref{Miscellaneous commands}. 1075objects. @ref{Miscellaneous commands}.
1076 1076
1077Configure this in your @file{.emacs} before loading in CEDET or EDE. 1077Configure this in your @file{.emacs} before loading in CEDET or EDE@.
1078If you want to add support for GNU Global, your configuration would 1078If you want to add support for GNU Global, your configuration would
1079look like this: 1079look like this:
1080 1080
@@ -1083,7 +1083,7 @@ look like this:
1083@end example 1083@end example
1084 1084
1085That way, when a search needs to be done, it will first try using 1085That way, when a search needs to be done, it will first try using
1086GLOBAL. If global is not available for that directory, then it will 1086GLOBAL@. If global is not available for that directory, then it will
1087revert to the base locate object. The base object always fails to 1087revert to the base locate object. The base object always fails to
1088find a file. 1088find a file.
1089 1089
@@ -1100,7 +1100,7 @@ bugs in @ede{}. A knowledge of Emacs Lisp, and some @eieio{}(CLOS) is
1100required. 1100required.
1101 1101
1102@ede{} uses @eieio{}, the CLOS package for Emacs, to define two object 1102@ede{} uses @eieio{}, the CLOS package for Emacs, to define two object
1103superclasses, specifically the PROJECT and TARGET. All commands in 1103superclasses, specifically the PROJECT and TARGET@. All commands in
1104@ede{} are usually meant to address the current project, or current 1104@ede{} are usually meant to address the current project, or current
1105target. 1105target.
1106 1106
@@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ The function @code{ede-directory-project-p} will call
1273@code{ede-dir-to-projectfile} on every @code{ede-project-autoload} 1273@code{ede-dir-to-projectfile} on every @code{ede-project-autoload}
1274until one of them returns true. The method 1274until one of them returns true. The method
1275@code{ede-dir-to-projectfile} in turn gets the @code{:proj-file} slot 1275@code{ede-dir-to-projectfile} in turn gets the @code{:proj-file} slot
1276from the autoload. If it is a string (ie, a project file name), it 1276from the autoload. If it is a string (i.e., a project file name), it
1277checks to see if that exists in BUFFER's directory. If it is a 1277checks to see if that exists in BUFFER's directory. If it is a
1278function, then it calls that function and expects it to return a file 1278function, then it calls that function and expects it to return a file
1279name or nil. If the file exists, then this directory is assumed to be 1279name or nil. If the file exists, then this directory is assumed to be
@@ -1379,7 +1379,7 @@ List all documentation a project or target is responsible for.
1379@ede{} projects track source file / target associates via source code 1379@ede{} projects track source file / target associates via source code
1380objects. The definitions for this is in @file{ede-source.el}. A source 1380objects. The definitions for this is in @file{ede-source.el}. A source
1381code object contains methods that know how to identify a file as being 1381code object contains methods that know how to identify a file as being
1382of that class, (ie, a C file ends with @file{.c}). Some targets can 1382of that class, (i.e., a C file ends with @file{.c}). Some targets can
1383handle many different types of sources which must all be compiled 1383handle many different types of sources which must all be compiled
1384together. For example, a mixed C and C++ program would have 1384together. For example, a mixed C and C++ program would have
1385instantiations of both sourcecode types. 1385instantiations of both sourcecode types.
@@ -1635,7 +1635,7 @@ This is a URL to be sent to a web site for documentation.
1635@item :web-site-directory @* 1635@item :web-site-directory @*
1636 1636
1637A directory where web pages can be found by Emacs. 1637A directory where web pages can be found by Emacs.
1638For remote locations use a path compatible with ange-ftp or EFS. 1638For remote locations use a path compatible with ange-ftp or EFS@.
1639You can also use TRAMP for use with rcp & scp. 1639You can also use TRAMP for use with rcp & scp.
1640@refill 1640@refill
1641 1641
@@ -1978,7 +1978,7 @@ The function symbol must take two arguments:
1978 NAME - The name of the file to find. 1978 NAME - The name of the file to find.
1979 DIR - The directory root for this cpp-root project. 1979 DIR - The directory root for this cpp-root project.
1980 1980
1981It should return the fully qualified file name passed in from NAME. If that file does not 1981It should return the fully qualified file name passed in from NAME@. If that file does not
1982exist, it should return nil. 1982exist, it should return nil.
1983@refill 1983@refill
1984 1984
@@ -2565,7 +2565,7 @@ Optional @var{DEPTH} is the depth we start at.
2565@end deffn 2565@end deffn
2566 2566
2567@deffn Method ede-buffer-header-file :AFTER this buffer 2567@deffn Method ede-buffer-header-file :AFTER this buffer
2568There are no default header files in EDE. 2568There are no default header files in EDE@.
2569Do a quick check to see if there is a Header tag in this buffer. 2569Do a quick check to see if there is a Header tag in this buffer.
2570@end deffn 2570@end deffn
2571 2571
diff --git a/doc/misc/ediff.texi b/doc/misc/ediff.texi
index 0afcdd923d6..55bfb9f6cb8 100644
--- a/doc/misc/ediff.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/ediff.texi
@@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ Many Ediff commands take numeric prefix arguments. For instance, if you
409type a number, say 3, and then @kbd{j} (@code{ediff-jump-to-difference}), 409type a number, say 3, and then @kbd{j} (@code{ediff-jump-to-difference}),
410Ediff moves to the third difference region. Typing 3 and then @kbd{a} 410Ediff moves to the third difference region. Typing 3 and then @kbd{a}
411(@code{ediff-diff-to-diff}) copies the 3rd difference region from variant A 411(@code{ediff-diff-to-diff}) copies the 3rd difference region from variant A
412to variant B. Likewise, 4 followed by @kbd{ra} restores the 4th difference 412to variant B@. Likewise, 4 followed by @kbd{ra} restores the 4th difference
413region in buffer A (if it was previously written over via the command 413region in buffer A (if it was previously written over via the command
414@kbd{a}). 414@kbd{a}).
415 415
@@ -490,7 +490,7 @@ compares three files simultaneously).
490@kindex a 490@kindex a
491@emph{In comparison sessions:} 491@emph{In comparison sessions:}
492Copies the current difference region (or the region specified as the prefix 492Copies the current difference region (or the region specified as the prefix
493to this command) from buffer A to buffer B. 493to this command) from buffer A to buffer B@.
494Ediff saves the old contents of buffer B's region; it can 494Ediff saves the old contents of buffer B's region; it can
495be restored via the command @kbd{rb}, which see. 495be restored via the command @kbd{rb}, which see.
496 496
@@ -512,31 +512,31 @@ be reinstated via the command @kbd{ra} in comparison sessions and
512@item ab 512@item ab
513@kindex ab 513@kindex ab
514Copies the current difference region (or the region specified as the prefix 514Copies the current difference region (or the region specified as the prefix
515to this command) from buffer A to buffer B. This (and the next five) 515to this command) from buffer A to buffer B@. This (and the next five)
516command is enabled only in sessions that compare three files 516command is enabled only in sessions that compare three files
517simultaneously. The old region in buffer B is saved and can be restored 517simultaneously. The old region in buffer B is saved and can be restored
518via the command @kbd{rb}. 518via the command @kbd{rb}.
519@item ac 519@item ac
520@kindex ac 520@kindex ac
521Copies the difference region from buffer A to buffer C. 521Copies the difference region from buffer A to buffer C@.
522The old region in buffer C is saved and can be restored via the command 522The old region in buffer C is saved and can be restored via the command
523@kbd{rc}. 523@kbd{rc}.
524@item ba 524@item ba
525@kindex ba 525@kindex ba
526Copies the difference region from buffer B to buffer A. 526Copies the difference region from buffer B to buffer A@.
527The old region in buffer A is saved and can be restored via the command 527The old region in buffer A is saved and can be restored via the command
528@kbd{ra}. 528@kbd{ra}.
529@item bc 529@item bc
530@kindex bc 530@kindex bc
531Copies the difference region from buffer B to buffer C. 531Copies the difference region from buffer B to buffer C@.
532The command @kbd{rc} undoes this. 532The command @kbd{rc} undoes this.
533@item ca 533@item ca
534@kindex ca 534@kindex ca
535Copies the difference region from buffer C to buffer A. 535Copies the difference region from buffer C to buffer A@.
536The command @kbd{ra} undoes this. 536The command @kbd{ra} undoes this.
537@item cb 537@item cb
538@kindex cb 538@kindex cb
539Copies the difference region from buffer C to buffer B. 539Copies the difference region from buffer C to buffer B@.
540The command @kbd{rb} undoes this. 540The command @kbd{rb} undoes this.
541 541
542@item p 542@item p
@@ -713,12 +713,12 @@ over. @xref{Selective Browsing}, for more.
713 713
714@item A 714@item A
715@kindex A 715@kindex A
716Toggles the read-only property in buffer A. 716Toggles the read-only property in buffer A@.
717If file A is under version control and is checked in, it is checked out 717If file A is under version control and is checked in, it is checked out
718(with your permission). 718(with your permission).
719@item B 719@item B
720@kindex B 720@kindex B
721Toggles the read-only property in buffer B. 721Toggles the read-only property in buffer B@.
722If file B is under version control and is checked in, it is checked out. 722If file B is under version control and is checked in, it is checked out.
723@item C 723@item C
724@kindex C 724@kindex C
@@ -795,7 +795,7 @@ While merging with an ancestor file, Ediff is determined to reduce user's
795wear and tear by saving him and her much of unproductive, repetitive 795wear and tear by saving him and her much of unproductive, repetitive
796typing. If it notices that, say, file A's difference region is identical to 796typing. If it notices that, say, file A's difference region is identical to
797the same difference region in the ancestor file, then the merge buffer will 797the same difference region in the ancestor file, then the merge buffer will
798automatically get the difference region taken from buffer B. The rationale 798automatically get the difference region taken from buffer B@. The rationale
799is that this difference region in buffer A is as old as that in the 799is that this difference region in buffer A is as old as that in the
800ancestor buffer, so the contents of that region in buffer B represents real 800ancestor buffer, so the contents of that region in buffer B represents real
801change. 801change.
@@ -820,7 +820,7 @@ To be more precise, this toggles the check for whether the current merge is
820identical to its default setting, as originally decided by Ediff. For 820identical to its default setting, as originally decided by Ediff. For
821instance, if Ediff is merging according to the `combined' policy, then the 821instance, if Ediff is merging according to the `combined' policy, then the
822merge region is skipped over if it is different from the combination of the 822merge region is skipped over if it is different from the combination of the
823regions in buffers A and B. (Warning: swapping buffers A and B will confuse 823regions in buffers A and B@. (Warning: swapping buffers A and B will confuse
824things in this respect.) If the merge region is marked as `prefer-A' then 824things in this respect.) If the merge region is marked as `prefer-A' then
825this region will be skipped if it differs from the current difference 825this region will be skipped if it differs from the current difference
826region in buffer A, etc. 826region in buffer A, etc.
@@ -1238,7 +1238,7 @@ Keep in mind that hooks executing before @code{ediff-cleanup-mess} start
1238in @code{ediff-control-buffer;} they should also leave 1238in @code{ediff-control-buffer;} they should also leave
1239@code{ediff-control-buffer} as the current buffer when they finish. 1239@code{ediff-control-buffer} as the current buffer when they finish.
1240Hooks that are executed after @code{ediff-cleanup-mess} should expect 1240Hooks that are executed after @code{ediff-cleanup-mess} should expect
1241the current buffer be either buffer A or buffer B. 1241the current buffer be either buffer A or buffer B@.
1242@code{ediff-cleanup-mess} doesn't kill the buffers being compared or 1242@code{ediff-cleanup-mess} doesn't kill the buffers being compared or
1243merged (see @code{ediff-cleanup-hook}, below). 1243merged (see @code{ediff-cleanup-hook}, below).
1244 1244
@@ -1361,7 +1361,7 @@ the variable @code{ediff-help-message}, which is local to
1361@section Window and Frame Configuration 1361@section Window and Frame Configuration
1362 1362
1363On a non-windowing display, Ediff sets things up in one frame, splitting 1363On a non-windowing display, Ediff sets things up in one frame, splitting
1364it between a small control window and the windows for buffers A, B, and C. 1364it between a small control window and the windows for buffers A, B, and C@.
1365The split between these windows can be horizontal or 1365The split between these windows can be horizontal or
1366vertical, which can be changed interactively by typing @kbd{|} while the 1366vertical, which can be changed interactively by typing @kbd{|} while the
1367cursor is in the control window. 1367cursor is in the control window.
@@ -1999,7 +1999,7 @@ represented as a list of the form @code{(STRING1 Symbol1 STRING2 Symbol2
1999STRING3 Symbol3 STRING4)}. The symbols here must be atoms of the form 1999STRING3 Symbol3 STRING4)}. The symbols here must be atoms of the form
2000@code{A}, @code{B}, or @code{Ancestor}. They determine the order in which 2000@code{A}, @code{B}, or @code{Ancestor}. They determine the order in which
2001the corresponding difference regions (from buffers A, B, and the ancestor 2001the corresponding difference regions (from buffers A, B, and the ancestor
2002buffer) are displayed in the merged region of buffer C. The strings in the 2002buffer) are displayed in the merged region of buffer C@. The strings in the
2003template determine the text that separates the aforesaid regions. The 2003template determine the text that separates the aforesaid regions. The
2004default template is 2004default template is
2005 2005
@@ -2062,7 +2062,7 @@ you copy a difference region from buffer A to buffer C then
2062@samp{=diff(B)} will change to @samp{diff-A} and the mode line will 2062@samp{=diff(B)} will change to @samp{diff-A} and the mode line will
2063display @samp{=diff(A) prefer-B}. This indicates that the difference 2063display @samp{=diff(A) prefer-B}. This indicates that the difference
2064region in buffer C is identical to that in buffer A, but originally 2064region in buffer C is identical to that in buffer A, but originally
2065buffer C's region came from buffer B. This is useful to know because 2065buffer C's region came from buffer B@. This is useful to know because
2066you can recover the original difference region in buffer C by typing 2066you can recover the original difference region in buffer C by typing
2067@kbd{r}. 2067@kbd{r}.
2068 2068
@@ -2090,7 +2090,7 @@ buffer A consists of the white space only (or if it is empty), Ediff will
2090not take it into account for the purpose of computing fine differences. The 2090not take it into account for the purpose of computing fine differences. The
2091result is that Ediff can provide a better visual information regarding the 2091result is that Ediff can provide a better visual information regarding the
2092actual fine differences in the non-white regions in buffers B and 2092actual fine differences in the non-white regions in buffers B and
2093C. Moreover, if the regions in buffers B and C differ in the white space 2093C@. Moreover, if the regions in buffers B and C differ in the white space
2094only, then a message to this effect will be displayed. 2094only, then a message to this effect will be displayed.
2095 2095
2096@vindex ediff-merge-window-share 2096@vindex ediff-merge-window-share
@@ -2388,7 +2388,7 @@ In merging, this is the merge buffer.
2388In two-way comparison, this variable is @code{nil}. 2388In two-way comparison, this variable is @code{nil}.
2389 2389
2390@item ediff-window-A 2390@item ediff-window-A
2391The window displaying buffer A. If buffer A is not visible, this variable 2391The window displaying buffer A@. If buffer A is not visible, this variable
2392is @code{nil} or it may be a dead window. 2392is @code{nil} or it may be a dead window.
2393 2393
2394@item ediff-window-B 2394@item ediff-window-B
@@ -2407,7 +2407,7 @@ the control buffer is in its own frame.
2407@chapter Credits 2407@chapter Credits
2408 2408
2409Ediff was written by Michael Kifer <kifer@@cs.stonybrook.edu>. It was inspired 2409Ediff was written by Michael Kifer <kifer@@cs.stonybrook.edu>. It was inspired
2410by emerge.el written by Dale R.@: Worley <drw@@math.mit.edu>. An idea due to 2410by emerge.el written by Dale R. Worley <drw@@math.mit.edu>. An idea due to
2411Boris Goldowsky <boris@@cs.rochester.edu> made it possible to highlight 2411Boris Goldowsky <boris@@cs.rochester.edu> made it possible to highlight
2412fine differences in Ediff buffers. Alastair Burt <burt@@dfki.uni-kl.de> 2412fine differences in Ediff buffers. Alastair Burt <burt@@dfki.uni-kl.de>
2413ported Ediff to XEmacs, Eric Freudenthal <freudent@@jan.ultra.nyu.edu> 2413ported Ediff to XEmacs, Eric Freudenthal <freudent@@jan.ultra.nyu.edu>
@@ -2424,15 +2424,15 @@ Adrian Aichner (aichner at ecf.teradyne.com),
2424Drew Adams (drew.adams at oracle.com), 2424Drew Adams (drew.adams at oracle.com),
2425Steve Baur (steve at xemacs.org), 2425Steve Baur (steve at xemacs.org),
2426Neal Becker (neal at ctd.comsat.com), 2426Neal Becker (neal at ctd.comsat.com),
2427E.@: Jay Berkenbilt (ejb at ql.org), 2427E. Jay Berkenbilt (ejb at ql.org),
2428Lennart Borgman (ennart.borgman at gmail.com) 2428Lennart Borgman (ennart.borgman at gmail.com)
2429Alastair Burt (burt at dfki.uni-kl.de), 2429Alastair Burt (burt at dfki.uni-kl.de),
2430Paul Bibilo (peb at delcam.co.uk), 2430Paul Bibilo (peb at delcam.co.uk),
2431Kevin Broadey (KevinB at bartley.demon.co.uk), 2431Kevin Broadey (KevinB at bartley.demon.co.uk),
2432Harald Boegeholz (hwb at machnix.mathematik.uni-stuttgart.de), 2432Harald Boegeholz (hwb at machnix.mathematik.uni-stuttgart.de),
2433Bradley A.@: Bosch (brad at lachman.com), 2433Bradley A. Bosch (brad at lachman.com),
2434Michael D.@: Carney (carney at ltx-tr.com), 2434Michael D. Carney (carney at ltx-tr.com),
2435Jin S.@: Choi (jin at atype.com), 2435Jin S. Choi (jin at atype.com),
2436Scott Cummings (cummings at adc.com), 2436Scott Cummings (cummings at adc.com),
2437Albert Dvornik (bert at mit.edu), 2437Albert Dvornik (bert at mit.edu),
2438Eric Eide (eeide at asylum.cs.utah.edu), 2438Eric Eide (eeide at asylum.cs.utah.edu),
@@ -2491,7 +2491,7 @@ Paul Raines (raines at slac.stanford.edu),
2491Stefan Reicher (xsteve at riic.at), 2491Stefan Reicher (xsteve at riic.at),
2492Charles Rich (rich at merl.com), 2492Charles Rich (rich at merl.com),
2493Bill Richter (richter at math.nwu.edu), 2493Bill Richter (richter at math.nwu.edu),
2494C.S.@: Roberson (roberson at aur.alcatel.com), 2494C.S. Roberson (roberson at aur.alcatel.com),
2495Kevin Rodgers (kevin.rodgers at ihs.com), 2495Kevin Rodgers (kevin.rodgers at ihs.com),
2496Sandy Rutherford (sandy at ibm550.sissa.it), 2496Sandy Rutherford (sandy at ibm550.sissa.it),
2497Heribert Schuetz (schuetz at ecrc.de), 2497Heribert Schuetz (schuetz at ecrc.de),
diff --git a/doc/misc/edt.texi b/doc/misc/edt.texi
index af0069fb1bc..12e65100e4e 100644
--- a/doc/misc/edt.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/edt.texi
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ of DEC's EDT editor.
65This manual describes version 4.0 of the EDT Emulation for Emacs. 65This manual describes version 4.0 of the EDT Emulation for Emacs.
66It comes with special functions which replicate nearly all of 66It comes with special functions which replicate nearly all of
67EDT's keypad mode behavior. It sets up default keypad and function key 67EDT's keypad mode behavior. It sets up default keypad and function key
68bindings which closely match those found in EDT. Support is provided so 68bindings which closely match those found in EDT@. Support is provided so
69that users may reconfigure most keypad and function key bindings to 69that users may reconfigure most keypad and function key bindings to
70their own liking. 70their own liking.
71 71
@@ -321,7 +321,7 @@ restores the original key bindings in effect just prior to invoking the
321emulation. 321emulation.
322 322
323Emacs binds keys to @acronym{ASCII} control characters and so does the 323Emacs binds keys to @acronym{ASCII} control characters and so does the
324real EDT. Where EDT key bindings and Emacs key bindings conflict, 324real EDT@. Where EDT key bindings and Emacs key bindings conflict,
325the default Emacs key bindings are retained by the EDT emulation by 325the default Emacs key bindings are retained by the EDT emulation by
326default. If you are a diehard EDT user you may not like this. The 326default. If you are a diehard EDT user you may not like this. The
327@ref{Control keys} section explains how to change this so that the EDT 327@ref{Control keys} section explains how to change this so that the EDT
@@ -527,7 +527,7 @@ add mod2 = Num_Lock
527@end example 527@end example
528 528
529So, after executing @samp{xmodmap .xmodmaprc}, a press of the physical 529So, after executing @samp{xmodmap .xmodmaprc}, a press of the physical
530@key{F12} key looks like a Num_Lock keypress to X. Also, a press of the 530@key{F12} key looks like a Num_Lock keypress to X@. Also, a press of the
531physical @key{NumLock} key looks like a press of the @key{F12} key to X. 531physical @key{NumLock} key looks like a press of the @key{F12} key to X.
532 532
533Now, @file{edt-mapper.el} will see @samp{f12} when the physical 533Now, @file{edt-mapper.el} will see @samp{f12} when the physical
@@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ two-thirds of the current window. (There is also an
674 674
675@item 675@item
676Cursor movement and deletion involving word entities is identical to 676Cursor movement and deletion involving word entities is identical to
677EDT. This, above all else, gives the die-hard EDT user a sense of being 677EDT@. This, above all else, gives the die-hard EDT user a sense of being
678at home. Also, an emulation of EDT's @samp{SET ENTITY WORD} command is 678at home. Also, an emulation of EDT's @samp{SET ENTITY WORD} command is
679provided, for those users who like to customize movement by a word at a 679provided, for those users who like to customize movement by a word at a
680time to their own liking. 680time to their own liking.
diff --git a/doc/misc/eieio.texi b/doc/misc/eieio.texi
index 6b3a87f19fc..fc92a76ff36 100644
--- a/doc/misc/eieio.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/eieio.texi
@@ -1921,7 +1921,7 @@ In @eieio{} tags are in lower case, not mixed case.
1921@node Wish List 1921@node Wish List
1922@chapter Wish List 1922@chapter Wish List
1923 1923
1924@eieio{} is an incomplete implementation of CLOS. Finding ways to 1924@eieio{} is an incomplete implementation of CLOS@. Finding ways to
1925improve the compatibility would help make CLOS style programs run 1925improve the compatibility would help make CLOS style programs run
1926better in Emacs. 1926better in Emacs.
1927 1927
diff --git a/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi b/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi
index e57fcc8adf1..966cace7f6e 100644
--- a/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ When displaying inline images that are larger than the window, Emacs
382does not enable scrolling, which means that you cannot see the whole 382does not enable scrolling, which means that you cannot see the whole
383image. To prevent this, the library tries to determine the image size 383image. To prevent this, the library tries to determine the image size
384before displaying it inline, and if it doesn't fit the window, the 384before displaying it inline, and if it doesn't fit the window, the
385library will display it externally (e.g. with @samp{ImageMagick} or 385library will display it externally (e.g., with @samp{ImageMagick} or
386@samp{xv}). Setting this variable to @code{t} disables this check and 386@samp{xv}). Setting this variable to @code{t} disables this check and
387makes the library display all inline images as inline, regardless of 387makes the library display all inline images as inline, regardless of
388their size. If you set this variable to @code{resize}, the image will 388their size. If you set this variable to @code{resize}, the image will
@@ -427,7 +427,7 @@ or @kbd{I} instead.}
427 427
428@item mm-w3m-safe-url-regexp 428@item mm-w3m-safe-url-regexp
429@vindex mm-w3m-safe-url-regexp 429@vindex mm-w3m-safe-url-regexp
430A regular expression that matches safe URL names, i.e. URLs that are 430A regular expression that matches safe URL names, i.e., URLs that are
431unlikely to leak personal information when rendering @acronym{HTML} 431unlikely to leak personal information when rendering @acronym{HTML}
432email (the default value is @samp{\\`cid:}). If @code{nil} consider 432email (the default value is @samp{\\`cid:}). If @code{nil} consider
433all URLs safe. In Gnus, this will be overridden according to the value 433all URLs safe. In Gnus, this will be overridden according to the value
@@ -489,7 +489,7 @@ Delete all control characters.
489@item mm-file-name-delete-gotchas 489@item mm-file-name-delete-gotchas
490@findex mm-file-name-delete-gotchas 490@findex mm-file-name-delete-gotchas
491Delete characters that could have unintended consequences when used 491Delete characters that could have unintended consequences when used
492with flawed shell scripts, i.e. @samp{|}, @samp{>} and @samp{<}; and 492with flawed shell scripts, i.e., @samp{|}, @samp{>} and @samp{<}; and
493@samp{-}, @samp{.} as the first character. 493@samp{-}, @samp{.} as the first character.
494 494
495@item mm-file-name-delete-whitespace 495@item mm-file-name-delete-whitespace
@@ -922,7 +922,7 @@ each case the most efficient of quoted-printable and base64 should be
922used. 922used.
923 923
924@code{qp-or-base64} has another effect. It will fold long lines so that 924@code{qp-or-base64} has another effect. It will fold long lines so that
925MIME parts may not be broken by MTA. So do @code{quoted-printable} and 925MIME parts may not be broken by MTA@. So do @code{quoted-printable} and
926@code{base64}. 926@code{base64}.
927 927
928Note that it affects body encoding only when a part is a raw forwarded 928Note that it affects body encoding only when a part is a raw forwarded
@@ -1443,13 +1443,13 @@ This is a version from which the regexp for the Q encoding pattern of
1443@item rfc2047-encode-encoded-words 1443@item rfc2047-encode-encoded-words
1444@vindex rfc2047-encode-encoded-words 1444@vindex rfc2047-encode-encoded-words
1445The boolean variable specifies whether encoded words 1445The boolean variable specifies whether encoded words
1446(e.g. @samp{=?us-ascii?q?hello?=}) should be encoded again. 1446(e.g., @samp{=?us-ascii?q?hello?=}) should be encoded again.
1447@code{rfc2047-encoded-word-regexp} is used to look for such words. 1447@code{rfc2047-encoded-word-regexp} is used to look for such words.
1448 1448
1449@item rfc2047-allow-irregular-q-encoded-words 1449@item rfc2047-allow-irregular-q-encoded-words
1450@vindex rfc2047-allow-irregular-q-encoded-words 1450@vindex rfc2047-allow-irregular-q-encoded-words
1451The boolean variable specifies whether irregular Q encoded words 1451The boolean variable specifies whether irregular Q encoded words
1452(e.g. @samp{=?us-ascii?q?hello??=}) should be decoded. If it is 1452(e.g., @samp{=?us-ascii?q?hello??=}) should be decoded. If it is
1453non-@code{nil}, @code{rfc2047-encoded-word-regexp-loose} is used instead 1453non-@code{nil}, @code{rfc2047-encoded-word-regexp-loose} is used instead
1454of @code{rfc2047-encoded-word-regexp} to look for encoded words. 1454of @code{rfc2047-encoded-word-regexp} to look for encoded words.
1455 1455
@@ -1608,14 +1608,14 @@ Take a date and return a time. If the date is not syntactically valid,
1608return a ``zero'' time. 1608return a ``zero'' time.
1609 1609
1610@item time-less-p 1610@item time-less-p
1611Take two times and say whether the first time is less (i. e., earlier) 1611Take two times and say whether the first time is less (i.e., earlier)
1612than the second time. 1612than the second time.
1613 1613
1614@item time-since 1614@item time-since
1615Take a time and return a time saying how long it was since that time. 1615Take a time and return a time saying how long it was since that time.
1616 1616
1617@item subtract-time 1617@item subtract-time
1618Take two times and subtract the second from the first. I. e., return 1618Take two times and subtract the second from the first. I.e., return
1619the time between the two times. 1619the time between the two times.
1620 1620
1621@item days-between 1621@item days-between
diff --git a/doc/misc/epa.texi b/doc/misc/epa.texi
index bb5e18f1c8b..9dfdf5ff0c3 100644
--- a/doc/misc/epa.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/epa.texi
@@ -63,11 +63,11 @@ called EasyPG Library.
63@end ifnottex 63@end ifnottex
64 64
65@menu 65@menu
66* Overview:: 66* Overview::
67* Quick start:: 67* Quick start::
68* Commands:: 68* Commands::
69* Caching Passphrases:: 69* Caching Passphrases::
70* Bug Reports:: 70* Bug Reports::
71@end menu 71@end menu
72 72
73@node Overview 73@node Overview
@@ -107,12 +107,12 @@ encryption/decryption of @samp{*.gpg} files.
107This chapter introduces various commands for typical use cases. 107This chapter introduces various commands for typical use cases.
108 108
109@menu 109@menu
110* Key management:: 110* Key management::
111* Cryptographic operations on regions:: 111* Cryptographic operations on regions::
112* Cryptographic operations on files:: 112* Cryptographic operations on files::
113* Dired integration:: 113* Dired integration::
114* Mail-mode integration:: 114* Mail-mode integration::
115* Encrypting/decrypting *.gpg files:: 115* Encrypting/decrypting *.gpg files::
116@end menu 116@end menu
117 117
118@node Key management 118@node Key management
@@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ style of sending signed/encrypted emails by embedding raw OpenPGP
311blobs inside a message body, not using modern MIME format. 311blobs inside a message body, not using modern MIME format.
312 312
313NOTE: Inline OpenPGP is not recommended and you should consider to use 313NOTE: Inline OpenPGP is not recommended and you should consider to use
314PGP/MIME. See 314PGP/MIME@. See
315@uref{http://josefsson.org/inline-openpgp-considered-harmful.html, 315@uref{http://josefsson.org/inline-openpgp-considered-harmful.html,
316Inline OpenPGP in E-mail is bad@comma{} Mm'kay?}. 316Inline OpenPGP in E-mail is bad@comma{} Mm'kay?}.
317 317
diff --git a/doc/misc/erc.texi b/doc/misc/erc.texi
index 834d2ea844d..7b8b9176848 100644
--- a/doc/misc/erc.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/erc.texi
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ and modified without restriction.
60* Keystroke Summary:: Keystrokes used in ERC buffers. 60* Keystroke Summary:: Keystrokes used in ERC buffers.
61* Modules:: Available modules for ERC. 61* Modules:: Available modules for ERC.
62* Advanced Usage:: Cool ways of using ERC. 62* Advanced Usage:: Cool ways of using ERC.
63* Getting Help and Reporting Bugs:: 63* Getting Help and Reporting Bugs::
64* History:: The history of ERC. 64* History:: The history of ERC.
65* Copying:: The GNU General Public License gives you 65* Copying:: The GNU General Public License gives you
66 permission to redistribute ERC on 66 permission to redistribute ERC on
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ translation effort.
246 246
247@item user scripting 247@item user scripting
248 248
249Users can load scripts (e.g. auto greeting scripts) when ERC starts up. 249Users can load scripts (e.g., auto greeting scripts) when ERC starts up.
250 250
251It is also possible to make custom IRC commands, if you know a little 251It is also possible to make custom IRC commands, if you know a little
252Emacs Lisp. Just make an Emacs Lisp function and call it 252Emacs Lisp. Just make an Emacs Lisp function and call it
@@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ If you want to assign this function to a keystroke, the following will
503help you figure out its parameters. 503help you figure out its parameters.
504 504
505@defun erc 505@defun erc
506Select connection parameters and run ERC. 506Select connection parameters and run ERC@.
507Non-interactively, it takes the following keyword arguments. 507Non-interactively, it takes the following keyword arguments.
508 508
509@itemize @bullet 509@itemize @bullet
@@ -655,7 +655,7 @@ This can be either a string or a function to call.
655@section Sample Configuration 655@section Sample Configuration
656@cindex configuration, sample 656@cindex configuration, sample
657 657
658Here is an example of configuration settings for ERC. This can go into 658Here is an example of configuration settings for ERC@. This can go into
659your Emacs configuration file. Everything after the @code{(require 659your Emacs configuration file. Everything after the @code{(require
660'erc)} command can optionally go into @file{~/.emacs.d/.ercrc.el}. 660'erc)} command can optionally go into @file{~/.emacs.d/.ercrc.el}.
661 661
@@ -706,7 +706,7 @@ stuff, to the current ERC buffer."
706 (erc :server "localhost" :port "6667" 706 (erc :server "localhost" :port "6667"
707 :nick "MYNICK"))) 707 :nick "MYNICK")))
708 708
709;; Make C-c RET (or C-c C-RET) send messages instead of RET. This has 709;; Make C-c RET (or C-c C-RET) send messages instead of RET. This has
710;; been commented out to avoid confusing new users. 710;; been commented out to avoid confusing new users.
711;; (define-key erc-mode-map (kbd "RET") nil) 711;; (define-key erc-mode-map (kbd "RET") nil)
712;; (define-key erc-mode-map (kbd "C-c RET") 'erc-send-current-line) 712;; (define-key erc-mode-map (kbd "C-c RET") 'erc-send-current-line)
@@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ check out all the available options for ERC is to do
742@kbd{M-x customize-group erc RET}. 742@kbd{M-x customize-group erc RET}.
743 743
744@defopt erc-hide-list 744@defopt erc-hide-list
745If non, @code{nil}, this is a list of IRC message types to hide, e.g. 745If non, @code{nil}, this is a list of IRC message types to hide, e.g.:
746 746
747@example 747@example
748(setq erc-hide-list '("JOIN" "PART" "QUIT")) 748(setq erc-hide-list '("JOIN" "PART" "QUIT"))
@@ -768,7 +768,7 @@ or if you have bugs to report, there are several places you can go.
768 768
769@item 769@item
770@uref{http://www.emacswiki.org/cgi-bin/wiki/ERC} is the 770@uref{http://www.emacswiki.org/cgi-bin/wiki/ERC} is the
771emacswiki.org page for ERC. Anyone may add tips, hints, etc. to it. 771emacswiki.org page for ERC@. Anyone may add tips, hints, etc. to it.
772 772
773@item 773@item
774You can ask questions about using ERC on the Emacs mailing list, 774You can ask questions about using ERC on the Emacs mailing list,
diff --git a/doc/misc/ert.texi b/doc/misc/ert.texi
index b585b68daa8..146a6ccbc35 100644
--- a/doc/misc/ert.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/ert.texi
@@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ solve this by allowing regexp matching on test names; e.g., the
838selector "^ert-" selects ERT's self-tests. 838selector "^ert-" selects ERT's self-tests.
839 839
840Other uses include grouping tests by their expected execution time, 840Other uses include grouping tests by their expected execution time,
841e.g. to run quick tests during interactive development and slow tests less 841e.g., to run quick tests during interactive development and slow tests less
842often. This can be achieved with the @code{:tag} argument to 842often. This can be achieved with the @code{:tag} argument to
843@code{ert-deftest} and @code{tag} test selectors. 843@code{ert-deftest} and @code{tag} test selectors.
844 844
diff --git a/doc/misc/eshell.texi b/doc/misc/eshell.texi
index d322ca7c3e1..81bc1edc169 100644
--- a/doc/misc/eshell.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/eshell.texi
@@ -783,7 +783,7 @@ A special associate array, which can take references of the form
783 783
784@item Eshell scripts can't execute in the background 784@item Eshell scripts can't execute in the background
785 785
786@item Support zsh's ``Parameter Expansion'' syntax, i.e. @samp{$@{@var{name}:-@var{val}@}} 786@item Support zsh's ``Parameter Expansion'' syntax, i.e., @samp{$@{@var{name}:-@var{val}@}}
787 787
788@item Write an @command{info} alias that can take arguments 788@item Write an @command{info} alias that can take arguments
789 789
@@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ It would call subcommands with @option{--help}, or @option{-h} or
869 869
870@item Implement @command{stty} in Lisp 870@item Implement @command{stty} in Lisp
871 871
872@item Support @command{rc}'s matching operator, e.g. @samp{~ (@var{list}) @var{regexp}} 872@item Support @command{rc}'s matching operator, e.g., @samp{~ (@var{list}) @var{regexp}}
873 873
874@item Implement @command{bg} and @command{fg} as editors of @code{eshell-process-list} 874@item Implement @command{bg} and @command{fg} as editors of @code{eshell-process-list}
875 875
diff --git a/doc/misc/eudc.texi b/doc/misc/eudc.texi
index dec178c5258..a21e73019b9 100644
--- a/doc/misc/eudc.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/eudc.texi
@@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ LDAP support is added by means of @file{ldap.el}, which is part of Emacs.
233@comment node-name, next, previous, up 233@comment node-name, next, previous, up
234@chapter Usage 234@chapter Usage
235 235
236This chapter describes the usage of EUDC. Most functions and 236This chapter describes the usage of EUDC@. Most functions and
237customization options are available through the @samp{Directory Search} 237customization options are available through the @samp{Directory Search}
238submenu of the @samp{Tools} submenu. 238submenu of the @samp{Tools} submenu.
239 239
diff --git a/doc/misc/faq.texi b/doc/misc/faq.texi
index 2983667c5cd..ec0d6bfe4cc 100644
--- a/doc/misc/faq.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/faq.texi
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992 Joseph Brian Wells@*
20@quotation 20@quotation
21This list of frequently asked questions about GNU Emacs with answers 21This list of frequently asked questions about GNU Emacs with answers
22(``FAQ'') may be translated into other languages, transformed into other 22(``FAQ'') may be translated into other languages, transformed into other
23formats (e.g. Texinfo, Info, WWW, WAIS), and updated with new information. 23formats (e.g., Texinfo, Info, WWW, WAIS), and updated with new information.
24 24
25The same conditions apply to any derivative of the FAQ as apply to the FAQ 25The same conditions apply to any derivative of the FAQ as apply to the FAQ
26itself. Every copy of the FAQ must include this notice or an approved 26itself. Every copy of the FAQ must include this notice or an approved
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ DOS and Windows terminals don't set bit 7 when the @key{Meta} key is
191pressed.}. 191pressed.}.
192 192
193@kbd{C-?} (aka @key{DEL}) is @acronym{ASCII} code 127. It is a misnomer to call 193@kbd{C-?} (aka @key{DEL}) is @acronym{ASCII} code 127. It is a misnomer to call
194@kbd{C-?} a ``control'' key, since 127 has both bits 5 and 6 turned ON. 194@kbd{C-?} a ``control'' key, since 127 has both bits 5 and 6 turned ON@.
195Also, on very few keyboards does @kbd{C-?} generate @acronym{ASCII} code 127. 195Also, on very few keyboards does @kbd{C-?} generate @acronym{ASCII} code 127.
196@c FIXME I cannot understand the previous sentence. 196@c FIXME I cannot understand the previous sentence.
197 197
@@ -257,9 +257,9 @@ Emacs manual.
257@cindex Directories and files that come with Emacs 257@cindex Directories and files that come with Emacs
258 258
259These are files that come with Emacs. The Emacs distribution is divided 259These are files that come with Emacs. The Emacs distribution is divided
260into subdirectories; e.g. @file{etc}, @file{lisp}, and @file{src}. 260into subdirectories; e.g., @file{etc}, @file{lisp}, and @file{src}.
261Some of these (e.g. @file{etc} and @file{lisp}) are present both in 261Some of these (e.g., @file{etc} and @file{lisp}) are present both in
262an installed Emacs and in the sources, but some (e.g. @file{src}) are 262an installed Emacs and in the sources, but some (e.g., @file{src}) are
263only found in the sources. 263only found in the sources.
264 264
265If you use Emacs, but don't know where it is kept on your system, start 265If you use Emacs, but don't know where it is kept on your system, start
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ GNU General Public License
314 314
315@end table 315@end table
316 316
317Avoid confusing the FSF and the LPF. The LPF opposes 317Avoid confusing the FSF and the LPF@. The LPF opposes
318look-and-feel copyrights and software patents. The FSF aims to make 318look-and-feel copyrights and software patents. The FSF aims to make
319high quality free software available for everyone. 319high quality free software available for everyone.
320 320
@@ -552,7 +552,7 @@ help-for-help} instead to invoke help. To discover what key (if any)
552invokes help on your system, type @kbd{M-x where-is @key{RET} 552invokes help on your system, type @kbd{M-x where-is @key{RET}
553help-for-help @key{RET}}. This will print a comma-separated list of key 553help-for-help @key{RET}}. This will print a comma-separated list of key
554sequences in the echo area. Ignore the last character in each key 554sequences in the echo area. Ignore the last character in each key
555sequence listed. Each of the resulting key sequences (e.g. @key{F1} is 555sequence listed. Each of the resulting key sequences (e.g., @key{F1} is
556common) invokes help. 556common) invokes help.
557 557
558Emacs help works best if it is invoked by a single key whose value 558Emacs help works best if it is invoked by a single key whose value
@@ -611,7 +611,7 @@ matches a regular expression or a string, using @kbd{M-x
611apropos-documentation}. 611apropos-documentation}.
612 612
613@item 613@item
614You can order a hardcopy of the manual from the FSF. @xref{Getting a 614You can order a hardcopy of the manual from the FSF@. @xref{Getting a
615printed manual}. 615printed manual}.
616 616
617@cindex Reference cards, in other languages 617@cindex Reference cards, in other languages
@@ -640,7 +640,7 @@ information. To get a list of these commands, type @samp{?} after
640@cindex Manual, obtaining a printed or HTML copy of 640@cindex Manual, obtaining a printed or HTML copy of
641@cindex Emacs manual, obtaining a printed or HTML copy of 641@cindex Emacs manual, obtaining a printed or HTML copy of
642 642
643You can order a printed copy of the Emacs manual from the FSF. For 643You can order a printed copy of the Emacs manual from the FSF@. For
644details see the @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/, FSF on-line store}. 644details see the @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/, FSF on-line store}.
645 645
646The full Texinfo source for the manual also comes in the @file{doc/emacs} 646The full Texinfo source for the manual also comes in the @file{doc/emacs}
@@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ status of its latest version.
954@cindex TECO 954@cindex TECO
955@cindex Original version of Emacs 955@cindex Original version of Emacs
956 956
957Emacs originally was an acronym for Editor MACroS. RMS says he ``picked 957Emacs originally was an acronym for Editor MACroS@. RMS says he ``picked
958the name Emacs because @key{E} was not in use as an abbreviation on ITS at 958the name Emacs because @key{E} was not in use as an abbreviation on ITS at
959the time.'' The first Emacs was a set of macros written in 1976 at MIT 959the time.'' The first Emacs was a set of macros written in 1976 at MIT
960by RMS for the editor TECO (Text Editor and COrrector, originally Tape 960by RMS for the editor TECO (Text Editor and COrrector, originally Tape
@@ -985,9 +985,9 @@ conventions}).
985@cindex Bazaar repository, Emacs 985@cindex Bazaar repository, Emacs
986 986
987Emacs @value{EMACSVER} is the current version as of this writing. A version 987Emacs @value{EMACSVER} is the current version as of this writing. A version
988number with two components (e.g. @samp{22.1}) indicates a released 988number with two components (e.g., @samp{22.1}) indicates a released
989version; three components indicate a development 989version; three components indicate a development
990version (e.g. @samp{23.0.50} is what will eventually become @samp{23.1}). 990version (e.g., @samp{23.0.50} is what will eventually become @samp{23.1}).
991 991
992Emacs is under active development, hosted at 992Emacs is under active development, hosted at
993@uref{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/, Savannah}. The source 993@uref{http://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs/, Savannah}. The source
@@ -1371,7 +1371,7 @@ groups. From there, you can access all customizable options and faces,
1371change their values, and save your changes to your init file. 1371change their values, and save your changes to your init file.
1372@xref{Easy Customization,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}. 1372@xref{Easy Customization,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
1373 1373
1374If you know the name of the group in advance (e.g. ``shell''), use 1374If you know the name of the group in advance (e.g., ``shell''), use
1375@kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET}}. 1375@kbd{M-x customize-group @key{RET}}.
1376 1376
1377If you wish to customize a single option, use @kbd{M-x customize-option 1377If you wish to customize a single option, use @kbd{M-x customize-option
@@ -1385,7 +1385,7 @@ customize, with completion.
1385@cindex Console, colors 1385@cindex Console, colors
1386 1386
1387In Emacs 21.1 and later, colors and faces are supported in non-windowed mode, 1387In Emacs 21.1 and later, colors and faces are supported in non-windowed mode,
1388i.e.@: on Unix and GNU/Linux text-only terminals and consoles, and when 1388i.e., on Unix and GNU/Linux text-only terminals and consoles, and when
1389invoked as @samp{emacs -nw} on X, and MS-Windows. (Colors and faces were 1389invoked as @samp{emacs -nw} on X, and MS-Windows. (Colors and faces were
1390supported in the MS-DOS port since Emacs 19.29.) Emacs automatically 1390supported in the MS-DOS port since Emacs 19.29.) Emacs automatically
1391detects color support at startup and uses it if available. If you think 1391detects color support at startup and uses it if available. If you think
@@ -1540,7 +1540,7 @@ with @samp{#!}):
1540 1540
1541@cindex Major mode for shell scripts 1541@cindex Major mode for shell scripts
1542The variable @code{interpreter-mode-alist} specifies which mode to use 1542The variable @code{interpreter-mode-alist} specifies which mode to use
1543when loading an interpreted script (e.g. shell, python, etc.). Emacs 1543when loading an interpreted script (e.g., shell, python, etc.). Emacs
1544determines which interpreter you're using by examining the first line of 1544determines which interpreter you're using by examining the first line of
1545the script. Use @kbd{C-h v} (or @kbd{M-x describe-variable}) on 1545the script. Use @kbd{C-h v} (or @kbd{M-x describe-variable}) on
1546@code{interpreter-mode-alist} to learn more. 1546@code{interpreter-mode-alist} to learn more.
@@ -3172,7 +3172,7 @@ the main GNU distribution site, sources are available as
3172@c Don't include VER in the file name, because pretests are not there. 3172@c Don't include VER in the file name, because pretests are not there.
3173@uref{ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/emacs/emacs-VERSION.tar.gz} 3173@uref{ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/emacs/emacs-VERSION.tar.gz}
3174 3174
3175(Replace @samp{VERSION} with the relevant version number, e.g. @samp{23.1}.) 3175(Replace @samp{VERSION} with the relevant version number, e.g., @samp{23.1}.)
3176 3176
3177@item 3177@item
3178Next uncompress and extract the source files. This requires 3178Next uncompress and extract the source files. This requires
@@ -3561,7 +3561,7 @@ can be bound to a key and thus treated as a macro. For example:
3561@cindex Misspecified key sequences 3561@cindex Misspecified key sequences
3562 3562
3563Usually, one of two things has happened. In one case, the control 3563Usually, one of two things has happened. In one case, the control
3564character in the key sequence has been misspecified (e.g. @samp{C-f} 3564character in the key sequence has been misspecified (e.g., @samp{C-f}
3565used instead of @samp{\C-f} within a Lisp expression). In the other 3565used instead of @samp{\C-f} within a Lisp expression). In the other
3566case, a @dfn{prefix key} in the keystroke sequence you were trying to bind 3566case, a @dfn{prefix key} in the keystroke sequence you were trying to bind
3567was already bound as a @dfn{complete key}. Historically, the @samp{ESC [} 3567was already bound as a @dfn{complete key}. Historically, the @samp{ESC [}
@@ -3882,7 +3882,7 @@ is how to make @kbd{H-M-RIGHT} move forward a word:
3882@item 3882@item
3883Not all modifiers are permitted in all situations. @key{Hyper}, 3883Not all modifiers are permitted in all situations. @key{Hyper},
3884@key{Super}, and @key{Alt} are not available on Unix character 3884@key{Super}, and @key{Alt} are not available on Unix character
3885terminals. Non-@acronym{ASCII} keys and mouse events (e.g. @kbd{C-=} and 3885terminals. Non-@acronym{ASCII} keys and mouse events (e.g., @kbd{C-=} and
3886@kbd{Mouse-1}) also fall under this category. 3886@kbd{Mouse-1}) also fall under this category.
3887 3887
3888@end itemize 3888@end itemize
@@ -4275,7 +4275,7 @@ type them in. To enable this feature, execute the following:
4275@end lisp 4275@end lisp
4276 4276
4277Note that the aliases are expanded automatically only after you type 4277Note that the aliases are expanded automatically only after you type
4278a word-separator character (e.g. @key{RET} or @kbd{,}). You can force their 4278a word-separator character (e.g., @key{RET} or @kbd{,}). You can force their
4279expansion by moving point to the end of the alias and typing @kbd{C-x a e} 4279expansion by moving point to the end of the alias and typing @kbd{C-x a e}
4280(@kbd{M-x expand-abbrev}). 4280(@kbd{M-x expand-abbrev}).
4281@end itemize 4281@end itemize
diff --git a/doc/misc/flymake.texi b/doc/misc/flymake.texi
index 4a873490e86..98279c8dae3 100644
--- a/doc/misc/flymake.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/flymake.texi
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
47@ifnottex 47@ifnottex
48@node Top 48@node Top
49@top GNU Flymake 49@top GNU Flymake
50@insertcopying 50@insertcopying
51@end ifnottex 51@end ifnottex
52 52
53@menu 53@menu
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Emacs minor mode. Flymake runs the pre-configured syntax check tool
69(compiler for C++ files, @code{perl} for perl files, etc.) in the 69(compiler for C++ files, @code{perl} for perl files, etc.) in the
70background, passing it a temporary copy of the current buffer, and 70background, passing it a temporary copy of the current buffer, and
71parses the output for known error/warning message patterns. Flymake 71parses the output for known error/warning message patterns. Flymake
72then highlights erroneous lines (i.e. lines for which at least one 72then highlights erroneous lines (i.e., lines for which at least one
73error or warning has been reported by the syntax check tool), and 73error or warning has been reported by the syntax check tool), and
74displays an overall buffer status in the mode line. Status information 74displays an overall buffer status in the mode line. Status information
75displayed by Flymake contains total number of errors and warnings 75displayed by Flymake contains total number of errors and warnings
diff --git a/doc/misc/forms.texi b/doc/misc/forms.texi
index 11c3782dd7e..7f84de9754b 100644
--- a/doc/misc/forms.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/forms.texi
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ job: a control file and a data file. The data file holds the
74actual data to be presented. The control file describes 74actual data to be presented. The control file describes
75how to present it. 75how to present it.
76 76
77@insertcopying 77@insertcopying
78 78
79@menu 79@menu
80* Forms Example:: An example: editing the password data base. 80* Forms Example:: An example: editing the password data base.
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ are all there, but instead of being colon-separated on one single line,
117they make up a forms. 117they make up a forms.
118 118
119The contents of the forms consist of the contents of the fields of the 119The contents of the forms consist of the contents of the fields of the
120record (e.g. @samp{root}, @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{Super User}) 120record (e.g., @samp{root}, @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{Super User})
121interspersed with normal text (e.g @samp{User : }, @samp{Uid: }). 121interspersed with normal text (e.g @samp{User : }, @samp{Uid: }).
122 122
123If you modify the contents of the fields, Forms mode will analyze your 123If you modify the contents of the fields, Forms mode will analyze your
@@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ appears that way when displayed in Forms mode. If the value is
467@code{nil}, multi-line text fields are prohibited. The pseudo newline 467@code{nil}, multi-line text fields are prohibited. The pseudo newline
468must not be a character contained in @code{forms-field-sep}. 468must not be a character contained in @code{forms-field-sep}.
469 469
470The default value is @code{"\^k"}, the character Control-K. Example: 470The default value is @code{"\^k"}, the character Control-K@. Example:
471 471
472@example 472@example
473(setq forms-multi-line "\^k") 473(setq forms-multi-line "\^k")
@@ -739,7 +739,7 @@ so you'd better think twice before using this.
739 739
740The default format for the data file, using @code{"\t"} to separate 740The default format for the data file, using @code{"\t"} to separate
741fields and @code{"\^k"} to separate lines within a field, matches the 741fields and @code{"\^k"} to separate lines within a field, matches the
742file format of some popular database programs, e.g. FileMaker. So 742file format of some popular database programs, e.g., FileMaker. So
743@code{forms-mode} can decrease the need to use proprietary software. 743@code{forms-mode} can decrease the need to use proprietary software.
744 744
745@node Error Messages 745@node Error Messages
diff --git a/doc/misc/gnus-coding.texi b/doc/misc/gnus-coding.texi
index bbaf2c068da..2bc064071ec 100644
--- a/doc/misc/gnus-coding.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/gnus-coding.texi
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license.
48@top Gnus Coding Style and Maintenance Guide 48@top Gnus Coding Style and Maintenance Guide
49This manual describes @dots{} 49This manual describes @dots{}
50 50
51@insertcopying 51@insertcopying
52@end ifnottex 52@end ifnottex
53 53
54@menu 54@menu
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ This manual describes @dots{}
64 64
65The Gnus distribution contains a lot of libraries that have been written 65The Gnus distribution contains a lot of libraries that have been written
66for Gnus and used intensively for Gnus. But many of those libraries are 66for Gnus and used intensively for Gnus. But many of those libraries are
67useful on their own. E.g. other Emacs Lisp packages might use the 67useful on their own. E.g., other Emacs Lisp packages might use the
68@acronym{MIME} library @xref{Top, ,Top, emacs-mime, The Emacs MIME 68@acronym{MIME} library @xref{Top, ,Top, emacs-mime, The Emacs MIME
69Manual}. 69Manual}.
70 70
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ There are no Gnus dependencies in this file.
196Functions for Cancel-Lock feature 196Functions for Cancel-Lock feature
197@c Cf. draft-ietf-usefor-cancel-lock-01.txt 197@c Cf. draft-ietf-usefor-cancel-lock-01.txt
198@c Although this draft has expired, Canlock-Lock revived in 2007 when 198@c Although this draft has expired, Canlock-Lock revived in 2007 when
199@c major news providers (e.g. news.individual.org) started to use it. 199@c major news providers (e.g., news.individual.org) started to use it.
200@c As of 2007-08-25... 200@c As of 2007-08-25...
201There are no Gnus dependencies in these files. 201There are no Gnus dependencies in these files.
202 202
@@ -257,18 +257,18 @@ XEmacs 21.1 and up.
257 257
258The development of Gnus normally is done on the Git repository trunk 258The development of Gnus normally is done on the Git repository trunk
259as of April 19, 2010 (formerly it was done in CVS; the repository is 259as of April 19, 2010 (formerly it was done in CVS; the repository is
260at http://git.gnus.org), i.e. there are no separate branches to 260at http://git.gnus.org), i.e., there are no separate branches to
261develop and test new features. Most of the time, the trunk is 261develop and test new features. Most of the time, the trunk is
262developed quite actively with more or less daily changes. Only after 262developed quite actively with more or less daily changes. Only after
263a new major release, e.g. 5.10.1, there's usually a feature period of 263a new major release, e.g., 5.10.1, there's usually a feature period of
264several months. After the release of Gnus 5.10.6 the development of 264several months. After the release of Gnus 5.10.6 the development of
265new features started again on the trunk while the 5.10 series is 265new features started again on the trunk while the 5.10 series is
266continued on the stable branch (v5-10) from which more stable releases 266continued on the stable branch (v5-10) from which more stable releases
267will be done when needed (5.10.8, @dots{}). @ref{Gnus Development, 267will be done when needed (5.10.8, @dots{}). @ref{Gnus Development,
268,Gnus Development, gnus, The Gnus Newsreader} 268,Gnus Development, gnus, The Gnus Newsreader}
269 269
270Stable releases of Gnus finally become part of Emacs. E.g. Gnus 5.8 270Stable releases of Gnus finally become part of Emacs. E.g., Gnus 5.8
271became a part of Emacs 21 (relabeled to Gnus 5.9). The 5.10 series 271became a part of Emacs 21 (relabeled to Gnus 5.9). The 5.10 series
272became part of Emacs 22 as Gnus 5.11. 272became part of Emacs 22 as Gnus 5.11.
273 273
274@section Syncing 274@section Syncing
@@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ Starting from No Gnus, the @file{GNUS-NEWS} is created from
379 379
380For new customizable variables introduced in Oort Gnus (including the 380For new customizable variables introduced in Oort Gnus (including the
381v5-10 branch) use @code{:version "22.1" ;; Oort Gnus} (including the 381v5-10 branch) use @code{:version "22.1" ;; Oort Gnus} (including the
382comment) or e.g. @code{:version "22.2" ;; Gnus 5.10.10} if the feature 382comment) or, e.g., @code{:version "22.2" ;; Gnus 5.10.10} if the feature
383was added for Emacs 22.2 and Gnus 5.10.10. 383was added for Emacs 22.2 and Gnus 5.10.10.
384@c 384@c
385If the variable is new in No Gnus use @code{:version "23.1" ;; No Gnus}. 385If the variable is new in No Gnus use @code{:version "23.1" ;; No Gnus}.
diff --git a/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi b/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi
index 6c2946549e8..038b78cced3 100644
--- a/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Gnus is a Usenet Newsreader and Electronic Mail User Agent implemented
65as a part of Emacs. It's been around in some form for almost a decade 65as a part of Emacs. It's been around in some form for almost a decade
66now, and has been distributed as a standard part of Emacs for much of 66now, and has been distributed as a standard part of Emacs for much of
67that time. Gnus 5 is the latest (and greatest) incarnation. The 67that time. Gnus 5 is the latest (and greatest) incarnation. The
68original version was called GNUS, and was written by Masanobu UMEDA. 68original version was called GNUS, and was written by Masanobu UMEDA@.
69When autumn crept up in '94, Lars Magne Ingebrigtsen grew bored and 69When autumn crept up in '94, Lars Magne Ingebrigtsen grew bored and
70decided to rewrite Gnus. 70decided to rewrite Gnus.
71 71
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ Anti Spam features.
149Message-utils now included in Gnus. 149Message-utils now included in Gnus.
150 150
151@item 151@item
152New format specifiers for summary lines, e.g. %B for 152New format specifiers for summary lines, e.g., %B for
153a complex trn-style thread tree. 153a complex trn-style thread tree.
154@end itemize 154@end itemize
155 155
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ Where and how to get Gnus?
162 162
163Gnus is released independent from releases of Emacs and XEmacs. 163Gnus is released independent from releases of Emacs and XEmacs.
164Therefore, the version bundled with Emacs or the version in XEmacs's 164Therefore, the version bundled with Emacs or the version in XEmacs's
165package system might not be up to date (e.g. Gnus 5.9 bundled with Emacs 165package system might not be up to date (e.g., Gnus 5.9 bundled with Emacs
16621 is outdated). 16621 is outdated).
167You can get the latest released version of Gnus from 167You can get the latest released version of Gnus from
168@uref{http://www.gnus.org/dist/gnus.tar.gz} 168@uref{http://www.gnus.org/dist/gnus.tar.gz}
@@ -181,7 +181,7 @@ Untar it via @samp{tar xvzf gnus.tar.gz} and do the common
181(under MS-Windows either get the Cygwin environment from 181(under MS-Windows either get the Cygwin environment from
182@uref{http://www.cygwin.com} 182@uref{http://www.cygwin.com}
183which allows you to do what's described above or unpack the 183which allows you to do what's described above or unpack the
184tarball with some packer (e.g. Winace from 184tarball with some packer (e.g., Winace from
185@uref{http://www.winace.com}) 185@uref{http://www.winace.com})
186and use the batch-file make.bat included in the tarball to install 186and use the batch-file make.bat included in the tarball to install
187Gnus.) If you don't want to (or aren't allowed to) install Gnus 187Gnus.) If you don't want to (or aren't allowed to) install Gnus
@@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ and how to prevent it?
267 267
268This message means that the last time you used Gnus, it 268This message means that the last time you used Gnus, it
269wasn't properly exited and therefore couldn't write its 269wasn't properly exited and therefore couldn't write its
270information to disk (e.g. which messages you read), you 270information to disk (e.g., which messages you read), you
271are now asked if you want to restore that information 271are now asked if you want to restore that information
272from the auto-save file. 272from the auto-save file.
273 273
@@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ through them?
314@subsubheading Answer 314@subsubheading Answer
315 315
316Gnus offers the topic mode, it allows you to sort your 316Gnus offers the topic mode, it allows you to sort your
317groups in, well, topics, e.g. all groups dealing with 317groups in, well, topics, e.g., all groups dealing with
318Linux under the topic linux, all dealing with music under 318Linux under the topic linux, all dealing with music under
319the topic music and all dealing with scottish music under 319the topic music and all dealing with scottish music under
320the topic scottish which is a subtopic of music. 320the topic scottish which is a subtopic of music.
@@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ directory Emacs chooses will most certainly not be what
406you want, so let's do it the correct way. 406you want, so let's do it the correct way.
407The first thing you've got to do is to 407The first thing you've got to do is to
408create a suitable directory (no blanks in directory name 408create a suitable directory (no blanks in directory name
409please) e.g. c:\myhome. Then you must set the environment 409please), e.g., c:\myhome. Then you must set the environment
410variable HOME to this directory. To do this under Windows 9x 410variable HOME to this directory. To do this under Windows 9x
411or Me include the line 411or Me include the line
412 412
@@ -556,7 +556,7 @@ these: 1: You want to read your mail from a pop3 server and
556send them directly to a SMTP Server 2: Some program like 556send them directly to a SMTP Server 2: Some program like
557fetchmail retrieves your mail and stores it on disk from 557fetchmail retrieves your mail and stores it on disk from
558where Gnus shall read it. Outgoing mail is sent by 558where Gnus shall read it. Outgoing mail is sent by
559Sendmail, Postfix or some other MTA. Sometimes, you even 559Sendmail, Postfix or some other MTA@. Sometimes, you even
560need a combination of the above cases. 560need a combination of the above cases.
561 561
562However, the first thing to do is to tell Gnus in which way 562However, the first thing to do is to tell Gnus in which way
@@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ However this is Gnus county so there are possibilities to
716achieve what you want. The easiest way is to get an external 716achieve what you want. The easiest way is to get an external
717program which retrieves copies of the mail and stores them 717program which retrieves copies of the mail and stores them
718on disk, so Gnus can read it from there. On Unix systems you 718on disk, so Gnus can read it from there. On Unix systems you
719could use e.g. fetchmail for this, on MS Windows you can use 719could use, e.g., fetchmail for this, on MS Windows you can use
720Hamster, an excellent local news and mail server. 720Hamster, an excellent local news and mail server.
721 721
722The other solution would be, to replace the method Gnus 722The other solution would be, to replace the method Gnus
@@ -728,7 +728,7 @@ Gnus to use it and not to delete the retrieved mail. For
728GNU Emacs look for the file epop3.el which can do the same 728GNU Emacs look for the file epop3.el which can do the same
729(If you know the home of this file, please send me an 729(If you know the home of this file, please send me an
730e-mail). You can also tell Gnus to use an external program 730e-mail). You can also tell Gnus to use an external program
731(e.g. fetchmail) to fetch your mail, see the info node 731(e.g., fetchmail) to fetch your mail, see the info node
732"Mail Source Specifiers" in the Gnus manual on how to do 732"Mail Source Specifiers" in the Gnus manual on how to do
733it. 733it.
734 734
@@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ it.
753* FAQ 4-9:: Is there a way to automatically ignore posts by specific 753* FAQ 4-9:: Is there a way to automatically ignore posts by specific
754 authors or with specific words in the subject? And can I 754 authors or with specific words in the subject? And can I
755 highlight more interesting ones in some way? 755 highlight more interesting ones in some way?
756* FAQ 4-10:: How can I disable threading in some (e.g. mail-) groups, 756* FAQ 4-10:: How can I disable threading in some (e.g., mail-) groups,
757 or set other variables specific for some groups? 757 or set other variables specific for some groups?
758* FAQ 4-11:: Can I highlight messages written by me and follow-ups to 758* FAQ 4-11:: Can I highlight messages written by me and follow-ups to
759 those? 759 those?
@@ -778,7 +778,7 @@ If you enter the group by saying
778@samp{RET} 778@samp{RET}
779in group buffer with point over the group, only unread and ticked messages are loaded. Say 779in group buffer with point over the group, only unread and ticked messages are loaded. Say
780@samp{C-u RET} 780@samp{C-u RET}
781instead to load all available messages. If you want only the e.g. 300 newest say 781instead to load all available messages. If you want only the 300 newest say
782@samp{C-u 300 RET} 782@samp{C-u 300 RET}
783 783
784Loading only unread messages can be annoying if you have threaded view enabled, say 784Loading only unread messages can be annoying if you have threaded view enabled, say
@@ -954,7 +954,7 @@ Hit either @samp{e} for an exact match or
954@samp{s} for substring-match and delete afterwards 954@samp{s} for substring-match and delete afterwards
955everything but the name to score down all authors with the given 955everything but the name to score down all authors with the given
956name no matter which email address is used. Now you need to tell 956name no matter which email address is used. Now you need to tell
957Gnus when to apply the rule and how long it should last, hit e.g. 957Gnus when to apply the rule and how long it should last, hit
958@samp{p} to apply the rule now and let it last 958@samp{p} to apply the rule now and let it last
959forever. If you want to raise the score instead of lowering it say 959forever. If you want to raise the score instead of lowering it say
960@samp{I} instead of @samp{L}. 960@samp{I} instead of @samp{L}.
@@ -967,7 +967,7 @@ Gnus manual for the exact syntax, basically it's one big list
967whose elements are lists again. the first element of those lists 967whose elements are lists again. the first element of those lists
968is the header to score on, then one more list with what to match, 968is the header to score on, then one more list with what to match,
969which score to assign, when to expire the rule and how to do the 969which score to assign, when to expire the rule and how to do the
970matching. If you find me very interesting, you could e.g. add the 970matching. If you find me very interesting, you could add the
971following to your all.Score: 971following to your all.Score:
972 972
973@example 973@example
@@ -998,7 +998,7 @@ in ~/.gnus.el.
998@node FAQ 4-10 998@node FAQ 4-10
999@subsubheading Question 4.10 999@subsubheading Question 4.10
1000 1000
1001How can I disable threading in some (e.g. mail-) groups, or 1001How can I disable threading in some (e.g., mail-) groups, or
1002set other variables specific for some groups? 1002set other variables specific for some groups?
1003 1003
1004@subsubheading Answer 1004@subsubheading Answer
@@ -1114,7 +1114,7 @@ tabulators which allow you a summary in table form, but
1114sadly hard tabulators are broken in 5.8.8. 1114sadly hard tabulators are broken in 5.8.8.
1115 1115
1116Since 5.10, Gnus offers you some very nice new specifiers, 1116Since 5.10, Gnus offers you some very nice new specifiers,
1117e.g. %B which draws a thread-tree and %&user-date which 1117e.g., %B which draws a thread-tree and %&user-date which
1118gives you a date where the details are dependent of the 1118gives you a date where the details are dependent of the
1119articles age. Here's an example which uses both: 1119articles age. Here's an example which uses both:
1120 1120
@@ -1771,7 +1771,7 @@ snippet by Frank Haun <pille3003@@fhaun.de> in
1771 1771
1772@example 1772@example
1773(defun my-archive-article (&optional n) 1773(defun my-archive-article (&optional n)
1774 "Copies one or more article(s) to a corresponding `nnml:' group, e.g. 1774 "Copies one or more article(s) to a corresponding `nnml:' group, e.g.,
1775`gnus.ding' goes to `nnml:1.gnus.ding'. And `nnml:List-gnus.ding' goes 1775`gnus.ding' goes to `nnml:1.gnus.ding'. And `nnml:List-gnus.ding' goes
1776to `nnml:1.List-gnus-ding'. 1776to `nnml:1.List-gnus-ding'.
1777 1777
@@ -1879,7 +1879,7 @@ some groups). How to do it?
1879 1879
1880@subsubheading Answer 1880@subsubheading Answer
1881 1881
1882If you want all read messages to be expired (e.g. in 1882If you want all read messages to be expired (e.g., in
1883mailing lists where there's an online archive), you've 1883mailing lists where there's an online archive), you've
1884got two choices: auto-expire and 1884got two choices: auto-expire and
1885total-expire. Auto-expire means, that every article 1885total-expire. Auto-expire means, that every article
@@ -1924,7 +1924,7 @@ Say something like this in ~/.gnus.el:
1924 1924
1925(If you want to change the value of nnmail-expiry-target 1925(If you want to change the value of nnmail-expiry-target
1926on a per group basis see the question "How can I disable 1926on a per group basis see the question "How can I disable
1927threading in some (e.g. mail-) groups, or set other 1927threading in some (e.g., mail-) groups, or set other
1928variables specific for some groups?") 1928variables specific for some groups?")
1929 1929
1930@node FAQ 7 - Gnus in a dial-up environment 1930@node FAQ 7 - Gnus in a dial-up environment
@@ -1983,7 +1983,7 @@ On windows boxes I'd vote for
1983it's a small freeware, open-source program which fetches 1983it's a small freeware, open-source program which fetches
1984your mail and news from remote servers and offers them 1984your mail and news from remote servers and offers them
1985to Gnus (or any other mail and/or news reader) via nntp 1985to Gnus (or any other mail and/or news reader) via nntp
1986respectively POP3 or IMAP. It also includes a smtp 1986respectively POP3 or IMAP@. It also includes a smtp
1987server for receiving mails from Gnus. 1987server for receiving mails from Gnus.
1988 1988
1989@node FAQ 7-2 1989@node FAQ 7-2
@@ -1996,7 +1996,7 @@ So what was this thing about the Agent?
1996The Gnus agent is part of Gnus, it allows you to fetch 1996The Gnus agent is part of Gnus, it allows you to fetch
1997mail and news and store them on disk for reading them 1997mail and news and store them on disk for reading them
1998later when you're offline. It kind of mimics offline 1998later when you're offline. It kind of mimics offline
1999newsreaders like e.g. Forte Agent. If you want to use 1999newsreaders like Forte Agent. If you want to use
2000the Agent place the following in ~/.gnus.el if you are 2000the Agent place the following in ~/.gnus.el if you are
2001still using 5.8.8 or 5.9 (it's the default since 5.10): 2001still using 5.8.8 or 5.9 (it's the default since 5.10):
2002 2002
@@ -2075,7 +2075,7 @@ work, the agent must be active.
2075 2075
2076@menu 2076@menu
2077* FAQ 8-1:: How to find information and help inside Emacs? 2077* FAQ 8-1:: How to find information and help inside Emacs?
2078* FAQ 8-2:: I can't find anything in the Gnus manual about X (e.g. 2078* FAQ 8-2:: I can't find anything in the Gnus manual about X (e.g.,
2079 attachments, PGP, MIME...), is it not documented? 2079 attachments, PGP, MIME...), is it not documented?
2080* FAQ 8-3:: Which websites should I know? 2080* FAQ 8-3:: Which websites should I know?
2081* FAQ 8-4:: Which mailing lists and newsgroups are there? 2081* FAQ 8-4:: Which mailing lists and newsgroups are there?
@@ -2105,7 +2105,7 @@ apropos} searches the bound variables.
2105@subsubheading Question 8.2 2105@subsubheading Question 8.2
2106 2106
2107I can't find anything in the Gnus manual about X 2107I can't find anything in the Gnus manual about X
2108(e.g. attachments, PGP, MIME...), is it not documented? 2108(e.g., attachments, PGP, MIME...), is it not documented?
2109 2109
2110@subsubheading Answer 2110@subsubheading Answer
2111 2111
diff --git a/doc/misc/gnus.texi b/doc/misc/gnus.texi
index 47ff355d946..280819701ef 100644
--- a/doc/misc/gnus.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/gnus.texi
@@ -1731,7 +1731,7 @@ asterisk at the beginning of the line?).
1731You can change that format to whatever you want by fiddling with the 1731You can change that format to whatever you want by fiddling with the
1732@code{gnus-group-line-format} variable. This variable works along the 1732@code{gnus-group-line-format} variable. This variable works along the
1733lines of a @code{format} specification, which is pretty much the same as 1733lines of a @code{format} specification, which is pretty much the same as
1734a @code{printf} specifications, for those of you who use (feh!) C. 1734a @code{printf} specifications, for those of you who use (feh!) C@.
1735@xref{Formatting Variables}. 1735@xref{Formatting Variables}.
1736 1736
1737@samp{%M%S%5y:%B%(%g%)\n} is the value that produced those lines above. 1737@samp{%M%S%5y:%B%(%g%)\n} is the value that produced those lines above.
@@ -2351,7 +2351,7 @@ groups isn't done because it is nice or clever, it is done purely for
2351reasons of efficiency. 2351reasons of efficiency.
2352 2352
2353It is recommended that you keep all your mail groups (if any) on quite 2353It is recommended that you keep all your mail groups (if any) on quite
2354low levels (e.g. 1 or 2). 2354low levels (e.g., 1 or 2).
2355 2355
2356Maybe the following description of the default behavior of Gnus helps to 2356Maybe the following description of the default behavior of Gnus helps to
2357understand what these levels are all about. By default, Gnus shows you 2357understand what these levels are all about. By default, Gnus shows you
@@ -2418,7 +2418,7 @@ give a level prefix to @kbd{g} or @kbd{l}, all subsequent commands will
2418use this level as the ``work'' level. 2418use this level as the ``work'' level.
2419 2419
2420@vindex gnus-activate-level 2420@vindex gnus-activate-level
2421Gnus will normally just activate (i. e., query the server about) groups 2421Gnus will normally just activate (i.e., query the server about) groups
2422on level @code{gnus-activate-level} or less. If you don't want to 2422on level @code{gnus-activate-level} or less. If you don't want to
2423activate unsubscribed groups, for instance, you might set this variable 2423activate unsubscribed groups, for instance, you might set this variable
2424to 5. The default is 6. 2424to 5. The default is 6.
@@ -2654,7 +2654,7 @@ to a particular group by using a match string like
2654@kindex G R (Group) 2654@kindex G R (Group)
2655@findex gnus-group-make-rss-group 2655@findex gnus-group-make-rss-group
2656Make a group based on an @acronym{RSS} feed 2656Make a group based on an @acronym{RSS} feed
2657(@code{gnus-group-make-rss-group}). You will be prompted for an URL. 2657(@code{gnus-group-make-rss-group}). You will be prompted for an URL@.
2658@xref{RSS}. 2658@xref{RSS}.
2659 2659
2660@item G DEL 2660@item G DEL
@@ -2708,7 +2708,7 @@ the article range.
2708@findex gnus-read-ephemeral-gmane-group-url 2708@findex gnus-read-ephemeral-gmane-group-url
2709This command is similar to @code{gnus-read-ephemeral-gmane-group}, but 2709This command is similar to @code{gnus-read-ephemeral-gmane-group}, but
2710the group name and the article number and range are constructed from a 2710the group name and the article number and range are constructed from a
2711given @acronym{URL}. Supported @acronym{URL} formats include e.g. 2711given @acronym{URL}. Supported @acronym{URL} formats include:
2712@url{http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.foo.bar/12300/focus=12399}, 2712@url{http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.foo.bar/12300/focus=12399},
2713@url{http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.foo.bar/12345/}, 2713@url{http://thread.gmane.org/gmane.foo.bar/12345/},
2714@url{http://article.gmane.org/gmane.foo.bar/12345/}, 2714@url{http://article.gmane.org/gmane.foo.bar/12345/},
@@ -3125,7 +3125,7 @@ parameters, then you may need the following statement elsewhere in your
3125 3125
3126@vindex gnus-list-identifiers 3126@vindex gnus-list-identifiers
3127A use for this feature is to remove a mailing list identifier tag in 3127A use for this feature is to remove a mailing list identifier tag in
3128the subject fields of articles. E.g. if the news group 3128the subject fields of articles. E.g., if the news group
3129 3129
3130@example 3130@example
3131nntp+news.gnus.org:gmane.text.docbook.apps 3131nntp+news.gnus.org:gmane.text.docbook.apps
@@ -5036,7 +5036,7 @@ A related variable is @code{nnmail-extra-headers}, which controls when
5036to include extra headers when generating overview (@acronym{NOV}) files. 5036to include extra headers when generating overview (@acronym{NOV}) files.
5037If you have old overview files, you should regenerate them after 5037If you have old overview files, you should regenerate them after
5038changing this variable, by entering the server buffer using @kbd{^}, 5038changing this variable, by entering the server buffer using @kbd{^},
5039and then @kbd{g} on the appropriate mail server (e.g. nnml) to cause 5039and then @kbd{g} on the appropriate mail server (e.g., nnml) to cause
5040regeneration. 5040regeneration.
5041 5041
5042@vindex gnus-summary-line-format 5042@vindex gnus-summary-line-format
@@ -7120,8 +7120,8 @@ arrived on the mailing list. Consequently, when sorting sub-threads
7120using the default @code{gnus-thread-sort-by-number}, responses can end 7120using the default @code{gnus-thread-sort-by-number}, responses can end
7121up appearing before the article to which they are responding to. 7121up appearing before the article to which they are responding to.
7122Setting this variable to an alternate value 7122Setting this variable to an alternate value
7123(e.g. @code{gnus-thread-sort-by-date}), in a group's parameters or in an 7123(e.g., @code{gnus-thread-sort-by-date}), in a group's parameters or in an
7124appropriate hook (e.g. @code{gnus-summary-generate-hook}) can produce a 7124appropriate hook (e.g., @code{gnus-summary-generate-hook}) can produce a
7125more logical sub-thread ordering in such instances. 7125more logical sub-thread ordering in such instances.
7126 7126
7127@end table 7127@end table
@@ -7908,7 +7908,7 @@ reader to use this setting.
7908@item gnus-summary-save-in-pipe 7908@item gnus-summary-save-in-pipe
7909@findex gnus-summary-save-in-pipe 7909@findex gnus-summary-save-in-pipe
7910Pipe the article to a shell command. This function takes optional two 7910Pipe the article to a shell command. This function takes optional two
7911arguments COMMAND and RAW. Valid values for COMMAND include: 7911arguments COMMAND and RAW@. Valid values for COMMAND include:
7912 7912
7913@itemize @bullet 7913@itemize @bullet
7914@item a string@* 7914@item a string@*
@@ -8916,7 +8916,7 @@ Unreadable articles that tell you to read them with Caesar rotate or rot13.
8916(Typically offensive jokes and such.) 8916(Typically offensive jokes and such.)
8917 8917
8918It's commonly called ``rot13'' because each letter is rotated 13 8918It's commonly called ``rot13'' because each letter is rotated 13
8919positions in the alphabet, e. g. @samp{B} (letter #2) -> @samp{O} (letter 8919positions in the alphabet, e.g., @samp{B} (letter #2) -> @samp{O} (letter
8920#15). It is sometimes referred to as ``Caesar rotate'' because Caesar 8920#15). It is sometimes referred to as ``Caesar rotate'' because Caesar
8921is rumored to have employed this form of, uh, somewhat weak encryption. 8921is rumored to have employed this form of, uh, somewhat weak encryption.
8922 8922
@@ -9037,7 +9037,7 @@ Capitalize the first word in each sentence
9037@item W c 9037@item W c
9038@kindex W c (Summary) 9038@kindex W c (Summary)
9039@findex gnus-article-remove-cr 9039@findex gnus-article-remove-cr
9040Translate CRLF pairs (i. e., @samp{^M}s on the end of the lines) into LF 9040Translate CRLF pairs (i.e., @samp{^M}s on the end of the lines) into LF
9041(this takes care of DOS line endings), and then translate any remaining 9041(this takes care of DOS line endings), and then translate any remaining
9042CRs into LF (this takes care of Mac line endings) 9042CRs into LF (this takes care of Mac line endings)
9043(@code{gnus-article-remove-cr}). 9043(@code{gnus-article-remove-cr}).
@@ -9587,13 +9587,13 @@ Piconify the @code{From} header (@code{gnus-treat-from-picon}).
9587@item W D m 9587@item W D m
9588@kindex W D m (Summary) 9588@kindex W D m (Summary)
9589@findex gnus-treat-mail-picon 9589@findex gnus-treat-mail-picon
9590Piconify all mail headers (i. e., @code{Cc}, @code{To}) 9590Piconify all mail headers (i.e., @code{Cc}, @code{To})
9591(@code{gnus-treat-mail-picon}). 9591(@code{gnus-treat-mail-picon}).
9592 9592
9593@item W D n 9593@item W D n
9594@kindex W D n (Summary) 9594@kindex W D n (Summary)
9595@findex gnus-treat-newsgroups-picon 9595@findex gnus-treat-newsgroups-picon
9596Piconify all news headers (i. e., @code{Newsgroups} and 9596Piconify all news headers (i.e., @code{Newsgroups} and
9597@code{Followup-To}) (@code{gnus-treat-newsgroups-picon}). 9597@code{Followup-To}) (@code{gnus-treat-newsgroups-picon}).
9598 9598
9599@item W D g 9599@item W D g
@@ -9604,7 +9604,7 @@ Gravatarify the @code{From} header (@code{gnus-treat-from-gravatar}).
9604@item W D h 9604@item W D h
9605@kindex W D h (Summary) 9605@kindex W D h (Summary)
9606@findex gnus-treat-mail-gravatar 9606@findex gnus-treat-mail-gravatar
9607Gravatarify all mail headers (i. e., @code{Cc}, @code{To}) 9607Gravatarify all mail headers (i.e., @code{Cc}, @code{To})
9608(@code{gnus-treat-from-gravatar}). 9608(@code{gnus-treat-from-gravatar}).
9609 9609
9610@item W D D 9610@item W D D
@@ -9885,7 +9885,7 @@ displayed. This variable overrides
9885This variable is only used when @code{gnus-inhibit-mime-unbuttonizing} 9885This variable is only used when @code{gnus-inhibit-mime-unbuttonizing}
9886is @code{nil}. 9886is @code{nil}.
9887 9887
9888To see e.g. security buttons but no other buttons, you could set this 9888E.g., to see security buttons but no other buttons, you could set this
9889variable to @code{("multipart/signed")} and leave 9889variable to @code{("multipart/signed")} and leave
9890@code{gnus-unbuttonized-mime-types} at the default value. 9890@code{gnus-unbuttonized-mime-types} at the default value.
9891 9891
@@ -9904,8 +9904,8 @@ default value is @code{nil}.
9904@vindex gnus-article-mime-part-function 9904@vindex gnus-article-mime-part-function
9905For each @acronym{MIME} part, this function will be called with the @acronym{MIME} 9905For each @acronym{MIME} part, this function will be called with the @acronym{MIME}
9906handle as the parameter. The function is meant to be used to allow 9906handle as the parameter. The function is meant to be used to allow
9907users to gather information from the article (e. g., add Vcard info to 9907users to gather information from the article (e.g., add Vcard info to
9908the bbdb database) or to do actions based on parts (e. g., automatically 9908the bbdb database) or to do actions based on parts (e.g., automatically
9909save all jpegs into some directory). 9909save all jpegs into some directory).
9910 9910
9911Here's an example function the does the latter: 9911Here's an example function the does the latter:
@@ -10230,7 +10230,7 @@ visible effects normally, but it'll make this command work a whole lot
10230faster. Of course, it'll make group entry somewhat slow. 10230faster. Of course, it'll make group entry somewhat slow.
10231 10231
10232@vindex gnus-refer-thread-limit 10232@vindex gnus-refer-thread-limit
10233The @code{gnus-refer-thread-limit} variable says how many old (i. e., 10233The @code{gnus-refer-thread-limit} variable says how many old (i.e.,
10234articles before the first displayed in the current group) headers to 10234articles before the first displayed in the current group) headers to
10235fetch when doing this command. The default is 200. If @code{t}, all 10235fetch when doing this command. The default is 200. If @code{t}, all
10236the available headers will be fetched. This variable can be overridden 10236the available headers will be fetched. This variable can be overridden
@@ -11275,13 +11275,13 @@ things to work:
11275@enumerate 11275@enumerate
11276@item 11276@item
11277To handle @acronym{PGP} and @acronym{PGP/MIME} messages, you have to 11277To handle @acronym{PGP} and @acronym{PGP/MIME} messages, you have to
11278install an OpenPGP implementation such as GnuPG. The Lisp interface 11278install an OpenPGP implementation such as GnuPG@. The Lisp interface
11279to GnuPG included with Emacs is called EasyPG (@pxref{Top, ,EasyPG, 11279to GnuPG included with Emacs is called EasyPG (@pxref{Top, ,EasyPG,
11280epa, EasyPG Assistant user's manual}), but PGG (@pxref{Top, ,PGG, pgg, 11280epa, EasyPG Assistant user's manual}), but PGG (@pxref{Top, ,PGG, pgg,
11281PGG Manual}), and Mailcrypt are also supported. 11281PGG Manual}), and Mailcrypt are also supported.
11282 11282
11283@item 11283@item
11284To handle @acronym{S/MIME} message, you need to install OpenSSL. OpenSSL 0.9.6 11284To handle @acronym{S/MIME} message, you need to install OpenSSL@. OpenSSL 0.9.6
11285or newer is recommended. 11285or newer is recommended.
11286 11286
11287@end enumerate 11287@end enumerate
@@ -11773,7 +11773,7 @@ directory, the oldest files will be deleted. The default is 500MB.
11773 11773
11774@item gnus-html-frame-width 11774@item gnus-html-frame-width
11775@vindex gnus-html-frame-width 11775@vindex gnus-html-frame-width
11776The width to use when rendering HTML. The default is 70. 11776The width to use when rendering HTML@. The default is 70.
11777 11777
11778@item gnus-max-image-proportion 11778@item gnus-max-image-proportion
11779@vindex gnus-max-image-proportion 11779@vindex gnus-max-image-proportion
@@ -12218,7 +12218,7 @@ Displayed when headers are hidden in the article buffer.
12218@item p 12218@item p
12219Displayed when article is digitally signed or encrypted, and Gnus has 12219Displayed when article is digitally signed or encrypted, and Gnus has
12220hidden the security headers. (N.B. does not tell anything about 12220hidden the security headers. (N.B. does not tell anything about
12221security status, i.e. good or bad signature.) 12221security status, i.e., good or bad signature.)
12222 12222
12223@item s 12223@item s
12224Displayed when the signature has been hidden in the Article buffer. 12224Displayed when the signature has been hidden in the Article buffer.
@@ -12683,7 +12683,7 @@ copy of a sent message. The current buffer (when the hook is run)
12683contains the message including the message header. Changes made to 12683contains the message including the message header. Changes made to
12684the message will only affect the Gcc copy, but not the original 12684the message will only affect the Gcc copy, but not the original
12685message. You can use these hooks to edit the copy (and influence 12685message. You can use these hooks to edit the copy (and influence
12686subsequent transformations), e.g. remove MML secure tags 12686subsequent transformations), e.g., remove MML secure tags
12687(@pxref{Signing and encrypting}). 12687(@pxref{Signing and encrypting}).
12688 12688
12689@end table 12689@end table
@@ -13028,7 +13028,7 @@ personal mail group.
13028 13028
13029A foreign group (or any group, really) is specified by a @dfn{name} and 13029A foreign group (or any group, really) is specified by a @dfn{name} and
13030a @dfn{select method}. To take the latter first, a select method is a 13030a @dfn{select method}. To take the latter first, a select method is a
13031list where the first element says what back end to use (e.g. @code{nntp}, 13031list where the first element says what back end to use (e.g., @code{nntp},
13032@code{nnspool}, @code{nnml}) and the second element is the @dfn{server 13032@code{nnspool}, @code{nnml}) and the second element is the @dfn{server
13033name}. There may be additional elements in the select method, where the 13033name}. There may be additional elements in the select method, where the
13034value may have special meaning for the back end in question. 13034value may have special meaning for the back end in question.
@@ -13405,7 +13405,7 @@ Server variables are often called @dfn{server parameters}.
13405@subsection Servers and Methods 13405@subsection Servers and Methods
13406 13406
13407Wherever you would normally use a select method 13407Wherever you would normally use a select method
13408(e.g. @code{gnus-secondary-select-method}, in the group select method, 13408(e.g., @code{gnus-secondary-select-method}, in the group select method,
13409when browsing a foreign server) you can use a virtual server name 13409when browsing a foreign server) you can use a virtual server name
13410instead. This could potentially save lots of typing. And it's nice all 13410instead. This could potentially save lots of typing. And it's nice all
13411over. 13411over.
@@ -13749,7 +13749,7 @@ inhibit Gnus to add a @code{Message-ID} header, you could say:
13749(add-hook 'nntp-prepare-post-hook 'canlock-insert-header) 13749(add-hook 'nntp-prepare-post-hook 'canlock-insert-header)
13750@end lisp 13750@end lisp
13751 13751
13752Note that not all servers support the recommended ID. This works for 13752Note that not all servers support the recommended ID@. This works for
13753INN versions 2.3.0 and later, for instance. 13753INN versions 2.3.0 and later, for instance.
13754 13754
13755@item nntp-server-list-active-group 13755@item nntp-server-list-active-group
@@ -14268,7 +14268,7 @@ Here's a complete example @code{nnimap} backend with a client-side
14268@cindex reading mail 14268@cindex reading mail
14269@cindex mail 14269@cindex mail
14270 14270
14271Reading mail with a newsreader---isn't that just plain WeIrD? But of 14271Reading mail with a newsreader---isn't that just plain WeIrD@? But of
14272course. 14272course.
14273 14273
14274@menu 14274@menu
@@ -14684,8 +14684,8 @@ The name of the @acronym{POP} server. The default is taken from the
14684@env{MAILHOST} environment variable. 14684@env{MAILHOST} environment variable.
14685 14685
14686@item :port 14686@item :port
14687The port number of the @acronym{POP} server. This can be a number (eg, 14687The port number of the @acronym{POP} server. This can be a number (e.g.,
14688@samp{:port 1234}) or a string (eg, @samp{:port "pop3"}). If it is a 14688@samp{:port 1234}) or a string (e.g., @samp{:port "pop3"}). If it is a
14689string, it should be a service name as listed in @file{/etc/services} on 14689string, it should be a service name as listed in @file{/etc/services} on
14690Unix systems. The default is @samp{"pop3"}. On some systems you might 14690Unix systems. The default is @samp{"pop3"}. On some systems you might
14691need to specify it as @samp{"pop-3"} instead. 14691need to specify it as @samp{"pop-3"} instead.
@@ -14858,7 +14858,7 @@ Two example maildir mail sources:
14858 14858
14859@item imap 14859@item imap
14860Get mail from a @acronym{IMAP} server. If you don't want to use 14860Get mail from a @acronym{IMAP} server. If you don't want to use
14861@acronym{IMAP} as intended, as a network mail reading protocol (ie 14861@acronym{IMAP} as intended, as a network mail reading protocol (i.e.,
14862with nnimap), for some reason or other, Gnus let you treat it similar 14862with nnimap), for some reason or other, Gnus let you treat it similar
14863to a @acronym{POP} server and fetches articles from a given 14863to a @acronym{POP} server and fetches articles from a given
14864@acronym{IMAP} mailbox. @xref{Using IMAP}, for more information. 14864@acronym{IMAP} mailbox. @xref{Using IMAP}, for more information.
@@ -15392,7 +15392,7 @@ Where @code{nnmail-split-lowercase-expanded} controls whether the
15392lowercase of the matched string should be used for the substitution. 15392lowercase of the matched string should be used for the substitution.
15393Setting it as non-@code{nil} is useful to avoid the creation of multiple 15393Setting it as non-@code{nil} is useful to avoid the creation of multiple
15394groups when users send to an address using different case 15394groups when users send to an address using different case
15395(i.e. mailing-list@@domain vs Mailing-List@@Domain). The default value 15395(i.e., mailing-list@@domain vs Mailing-List@@Domain). The default value
15396is @code{t}. 15396is @code{t}.
15397 15397
15398@findex nnmail-split-fancy-with-parent 15398@findex nnmail-split-fancy-with-parent
@@ -15926,7 +15926,7 @@ Translate all @samp{TAB} characters into @samp{SPACE} characters.
15926@c @findex nnmail-fix-eudora-headers 15926@c @findex nnmail-fix-eudora-headers
15927@cindex Eudora 15927@cindex Eudora
15928@cindex Pegasus 15928@cindex Pegasus
15929Some mail user agents (e.g. Eudora and Pegasus) produce broken 15929Some mail user agents (e.g., Eudora and Pegasus) produce broken
15930@code{References} headers, but correct @code{In-Reply-To} headers. This 15930@code{References} headers, but correct @code{In-Reply-To} headers. This
15931function will get rid of the @code{References} header if the headers 15931function will get rid of the @code{References} header if the headers
15932contain a line matching the regular expression 15932contain a line matching the regular expression
@@ -16935,7 +16935,7 @@ Some web sites have an RDF Site Summary (@acronym{RSS}).
16935@acronym{RSS} is a format for summarizing headlines from news related 16935@acronym{RSS} is a format for summarizing headlines from news related
16936sites (such as BBC or CNN). But basically anything list-like can be 16936sites (such as BBC or CNN). But basically anything list-like can be
16937presented as an @acronym{RSS} feed: weblogs, changelogs or recent 16937presented as an @acronym{RSS} feed: weblogs, changelogs or recent
16938changes to a wiki (e.g. @url{http://cliki.net/recent-changes.rdf}). 16938changes to a wiki (e.g., @url{http://cliki.net/recent-changes.rdf}).
16939 16939
16940@acronym{RSS} has a quite regular and nice interface, and it's 16940@acronym{RSS} has a quite regular and nice interface, and it's
16941possible to get the information Gnus needs to keep groups updated. 16941possible to get the information Gnus needs to keep groups updated.
@@ -16999,7 +16999,7 @@ in Emacs or @code{escape-quoted} in XEmacs).
16999@item nnrss-ignore-article-fields 16999@item nnrss-ignore-article-fields
17000@vindex nnrss-ignore-article-fields 17000@vindex nnrss-ignore-article-fields
17001Some feeds update constantly article fields during their publications, 17001Some feeds update constantly article fields during their publications,
17002e.g. to indicate the number of comments. However, if there is 17002e.g., to indicate the number of comments. However, if there is
17003a difference between the local article and the distant one, the latter 17003a difference between the local article and the distant one, the latter
17004is considered to be new. To avoid this and discard some fields, set this 17004is considered to be new. To avoid this and discard some fields, set this
17005variable to the list of fields to be ignored. The default is 17005variable to the list of fields to be ignored. The default is
@@ -17169,7 +17169,7 @@ After all, Gnus is a newsreader, in case you're forgetting.
17169@code{nneething} does this in a two-step process. First, it snoops each 17169@code{nneething} does this in a two-step process. First, it snoops each
17170file in question. If the file looks like an article (i.e., the first 17170file in question. If the file looks like an article (i.e., the first
17171few lines look like headers), it will use this as the head. If this is 17171few lines look like headers), it will use this as the head. If this is
17172just some arbitrary file without a head (e.g. a C source file), 17172just some arbitrary file without a head (e.g., a C source file),
17173@code{nneething} will cobble up a header out of thin air. It will use 17173@code{nneething} will cobble up a header out of thin air. It will use
17174file ownership, name and date and do whatever it can with these 17174file ownership, name and date and do whatever it can with these
17175elements. 17175elements.
@@ -17891,7 +17891,7 @@ two variables are probably the only ones you will want to change:
17891 17891
17892@defvar nndiary-reminders 17892@defvar nndiary-reminders
17893This is the list of times when you want to be reminded of your 17893This is the list of times when you want to be reminded of your
17894appointments (e.g. 3 weeks before, then 2 days before, then 1 hour 17894appointments (e.g., 3 weeks before, then 2 days before, then 1 hour
17895before and that's it). Remember that ``being reminded'' means that the 17895before and that's it). Remember that ``being reminded'' means that the
17896diary message will pop up as brand new and unread again when you get new 17896diary message will pop up as brand new and unread again when you get new
17897mail. 17897mail.
@@ -17943,9 +17943,9 @@ see the event's date.
17943 17943
17944 @code{gnus-diary} provides two supplemental user formats to be used in 17944 @code{gnus-diary} provides two supplemental user formats to be used in
17945summary line formats. @code{D} corresponds to a formatted time string 17945summary line formats. @code{D} corresponds to a formatted time string
17946for the next occurrence of the event (e.g. ``Sat, Sep 22 01, 12:00''), 17946for the next occurrence of the event (e.g., ``Sat, Sep 22 01, 12:00''),
17947while @code{d} corresponds to an approximate remaining time until the 17947while @code{d} corresponds to an approximate remaining time until the
17948next occurrence of the event (e.g. ``in 6 months, 1 week''). 17948next occurrence of the event (e.g., ``in 6 months, 1 week'').
17949 17949
17950 For example, here's how Joe's birthday is displayed in my 17950 For example, here's how Joe's birthday is displayed in my
17951@code{nndiary+diary:birthdays} summary buffer (note that the message is 17951@code{nndiary+diary:birthdays} summary buffer (note that the message is
@@ -18399,7 +18399,7 @@ to know: The functions are called with no parameters, but the
18399useful values. 18399useful values.
18400 18400
18401For example, you could decide that you don't want to download articles 18401For example, you could decide that you don't want to download articles
18402that were posted more than a certain number of days ago (e.g. posted 18402that were posted more than a certain number of days ago (e.g., posted
18403more than @code{gnus-agent-expire-days} ago) you might write a function 18403more than @code{gnus-agent-expire-days} ago) you might write a function
18404something along the lines of the following: 18404something along the lines of the following:
18405 18405
@@ -19119,7 +19119,7 @@ Hook run when finished fetching articles.
19119@item gnus-agent-cache 19119@item gnus-agent-cache
19120@vindex gnus-agent-cache 19120@vindex gnus-agent-cache
19121Variable to control whether use the locally stored @acronym{NOV} and 19121Variable to control whether use the locally stored @acronym{NOV} and
19122articles when plugged, e.g. essentially using the Agent as a cache. 19122articles when plugged, e.g., essentially using the Agent as a cache.
19123The default is non-@code{nil}, which means to use the Agent as a cache. 19123The default is non-@code{nil}, which means to use the Agent as a cache.
19124 19124
19125@item gnus-agent-go-online 19125@item gnus-agent-go-online
@@ -19370,7 +19370,7 @@ entries into this list, and upon group exit, this list is saved.
19370 19370
19371The current score file is by default the group's local score file, even 19371The current score file is by default the group's local score file, even
19372if no such score file actually exists. To insert score commands into 19372if no such score file actually exists. To insert score commands into
19373some other score file (e.g. @file{all.SCORE}), you must first make this 19373some other score file (e.g., @file{all.SCORE}), you must first make this
19374score file the current one. 19374score file the current one.
19375 19375
19376General score commands that don't actually change the score file: 19376General score commands that don't actually change the score file:
@@ -19986,7 +19986,7 @@ header uses.
19986This match key is somewhat special, in that it will match the 19986This match key is somewhat special, in that it will match the
19987@code{From} header, and affect the score of not only the matching 19987@code{From} header, and affect the score of not only the matching
19988articles, but also all followups to the matching articles. This allows 19988articles, but also all followups to the matching articles. This allows
19989you e.g. increase the score of followups to your own articles, or 19989you to increase the score of followups to your own articles, or
19990decrease the score of followups to the articles of some known 19990decrease the score of followups to the articles of some known
19991trouble-maker. Uses the same match types as the @code{From} header 19991trouble-maker. Uses the same match types as the @code{From} header
19992uses. (Using this match key will lead to creation of @file{ADAPT} 19992uses. (Using this match key will lead to creation of @file{ADAPT}
@@ -20066,7 +20066,7 @@ interesting (with @kbd{I T} or @kbd{I S}), and ignore (@kbd{c y}) the
20066rest. Next time you enter the group, you will see new articles in the 20066rest. Next time you enter the group, you will see new articles in the
20067interesting threads, plus any new threads. 20067interesting threads, plus any new threads.
20068 20068
20069I.e.---the orphan score atom is for high-volume groups where a few 20069I.e., the orphan score atom is for high-volume groups where a few
20070interesting threads which can't be found automatically by ordinary 20070interesting threads which can't be found automatically by ordinary
20071scoring rules exist. 20071scoring rules exist.
20072 20072
@@ -20961,7 +20961,7 @@ When score files are loaded and @code{gnus-decay-scores} is
20961non-@code{nil}, Gnus will run the score files through the decaying 20961non-@code{nil}, Gnus will run the score files through the decaying
20962mechanism thereby lowering the scores of all non-permanent score rules. 20962mechanism thereby lowering the scores of all non-permanent score rules.
20963If @code{gnus-decay-scores} is a regexp, only score files matching this 20963If @code{gnus-decay-scores} is a regexp, only score files matching this
20964regexp are treated. E.g. you may set it to @samp{\\.ADAPT\\'} if only 20964regexp are treated. E.g., you may set it to @samp{\\.ADAPT\\'} if only
20965@emph{adaptive} score files should be decayed. The decay itself if 20965@emph{adaptive} score files should be decayed. The decay itself if
20966performed by the @code{gnus-decay-score-function} function, which is 20966performed by the @code{gnus-decay-score-function} function, which is
20967@code{gnus-decay-score} by default. Here's the definition of that 20967@code{gnus-decay-score} by default. Here's the definition of that
@@ -21168,7 +21168,7 @@ features (inspired by the Google search input language):
21168 21168
21169@item Boolean query operators 21169@item Boolean query operators
21170AND, OR, and NOT are supported, and parentheses can be used to control 21170AND, OR, and NOT are supported, and parentheses can be used to control
21171operator precedence, e.g. (emacs OR xemacs) AND linux. Note that 21171operator precedence, e.g., (emacs OR xemacs) AND linux. Note that
21172operators must be written with all capital letters to be 21172operators must be written with all capital letters to be
21173recognized. Also preceding a term with a - sign is equivalent to NOT 21173recognized. Also preceding a term with a - sign is equivalent to NOT
21174term. 21174term.
@@ -21213,12 +21213,12 @@ Gmane queries follow a simple query language:
21213@table @samp 21213@table @samp
21214@item Boolean query operators 21214@item Boolean query operators
21215AND, OR, NOT (or AND NOT), and XOR are supported, and brackets can be 21215AND, OR, NOT (or AND NOT), and XOR are supported, and brackets can be
21216used to control operator precedence, e.g. (emacs OR xemacs) AND linux. 21216used to control operator precedence, e.g., (emacs OR xemacs) AND linux.
21217Note that operators must be written with all capital letters to be 21217Note that operators must be written with all capital letters to be
21218recognized. 21218recognized.
21219 21219
21220@item Required and excluded terms 21220@item Required and excluded terms
21221+ and - can be used to require or exclude terms, e.g. football -american 21221+ and - can be used to require or exclude terms, e.g., football -american
21222 21222
21223@item Unicode handling 21223@item Unicode handling
21224The search engine converts all text to utf-8, so searching should work 21224The search engine converts all text to utf-8, so searching should work
@@ -21226,8 +21226,8 @@ in any language.
21226 21226
21227@item Stopwords 21227@item Stopwords
21228Common English words (like 'the' and 'a') are ignored by default. You 21228Common English words (like 'the' and 'a') are ignored by default. You
21229can override this by prefixing such words with a + (e.g. +the) or 21229can override this by prefixing such words with a + (e.g., +the) or
21230enclosing the word in quotes (e.g. "the"). 21230enclosing the word in quotes (e.g., "the").
21231 21231
21232@end table 21232@end table
21233 21233
@@ -21417,7 +21417,7 @@ bound to mairix searches and are automatically updated.
21417@end menu 21417@end menu
21418 21418
21419@c FIXME: The markup in this section might need improvement. 21419@c FIXME: The markup in this section might need improvement.
21420@c E.g. adding @samp, @var, @file, @command, etc. 21420@c E.g., adding @samp, @var, @file, @command, etc.
21421@c Cf. (info "(texinfo)Indicating") 21421@c Cf. (info "(texinfo)Indicating")
21422 21422
21423@node About mairix 21423@node About mairix
@@ -21425,7 +21425,7 @@ bound to mairix searches and are automatically updated.
21425 21425
21426Mairix is a tool for indexing and searching words in locally stored 21426Mairix is a tool for indexing and searching words in locally stored
21427mail. It was written by Richard Curnow and is licensed under the 21427mail. It was written by Richard Curnow and is licensed under the
21428GPL. Mairix comes with most popular GNU/Linux distributions, but it also 21428GPL@. Mairix comes with most popular GNU/Linux distributions, but it also
21429runs under Windows (with cygwin), Mac OS X and Solaris. The homepage can 21429runs under Windows (with cygwin), Mac OS X and Solaris. The homepage can
21430be found at 21430be found at
21431@uref{http://www.rpcurnow.force9.co.uk/mairix/index.html} 21431@uref{http://www.rpcurnow.force9.co.uk/mairix/index.html}
@@ -21455,8 +21455,8 @@ searches.
21455 21455
21456Mairix searches local mail---that means, mairix absolutely must have 21456Mairix searches local mail---that means, mairix absolutely must have
21457direct access to your mail folders. If your mail resides on another 21457direct access to your mail folders. If your mail resides on another
21458server (e.g. an @acronym{IMAP} server) and you happen to have shell 21458server (e.g., an @acronym{IMAP} server) and you happen to have shell
21459access, @code{nnmairix} supports running mairix remotely, e.g. via ssh. 21459access, @code{nnmairix} supports running mairix remotely, e.g., via ssh.
21460 21460
21461Additionally, @code{nnmairix} only supports the following Gnus back 21461Additionally, @code{nnmairix} only supports the following Gnus back
21462ends: @code{nnml}, @code{nnmaildir}, and @code{nnimap}. You must use 21462ends: @code{nnml}, @code{nnmaildir}, and @code{nnimap}. You must use
@@ -21476,7 +21476,7 @@ the package @file{mairix.el}, which comes with Emacs 23.
21476The back end @code{nnmairix} enables you to call mairix from within Gnus, 21476The back end @code{nnmairix} enables you to call mairix from within Gnus,
21477either to query mairix with a search term or to update the 21477either to query mairix with a search term or to update the
21478database. While visiting a message in the summary buffer, you can use 21478database. While visiting a message in the summary buffer, you can use
21479several pre-defined shortcuts for calling mairix, e.g. to quickly 21479several pre-defined shortcuts for calling mairix, e.g., to quickly
21480search for all mails from the sender of the current message or to 21480search for all mails from the sender of the current message or to
21481display the whole thread associated with the message, even if the 21481display the whole thread associated with the message, even if the
21482mails are in different folders. 21482mails are in different folders.
@@ -21484,8 +21484,8 @@ mails are in different folders.
21484Additionally, you can create permanent @code{nnmairix} groups which are bound 21484Additionally, you can create permanent @code{nnmairix} groups which are bound
21485to certain mairix searches. This way, you can easily create a group 21485to certain mairix searches. This way, you can easily create a group
21486containing mails from a certain sender, with a certain subject line or 21486containing mails from a certain sender, with a certain subject line or
21487even for one specific thread based on the Message-ID. If you check for 21487even for one specific thread based on the Message-ID@. If you check for
21488new mail in these folders (e.g. by pressing @kbd{g} or @kbd{M-g}), they 21488new mail in these folders (e.g., by pressing @kbd{g} or @kbd{M-g}), they
21489automatically update themselves by calling mairix. 21489automatically update themselves by calling mairix.
21490 21490
21491You might ask why you need @code{nnmairix} at all, since mairix already 21491You might ask why you need @code{nnmairix} at all, since mairix already
@@ -21495,7 +21495,7 @@ does not---at least not without problems. Most probably you will get
21495strange article counts, and sometimes you might see mails which Gnus 21495strange article counts, and sometimes you might see mails which Gnus
21496claims have already been canceled and are inaccessible. This is due to 21496claims have already been canceled and are inaccessible. This is due to
21497the fact that Gnus isn't really amused when things are happening behind 21497the fact that Gnus isn't really amused when things are happening behind
21498its back. Another problem can be the mail back end itself, e.g. if you 21498its back. Another problem can be the mail back end itself, e.g., if you
21499use mairix with an @acronym{IMAP} server (I had Dovecot complaining 21499use mairix with an @acronym{IMAP} server (I had Dovecot complaining
21500about corrupt index files when mairix changed the contents of the search 21500about corrupt index files when mairix changed the contents of the search
21501group). Using @code{nnmairix} should circumvent these problems. 21501group). Using @code{nnmairix} should circumvent these problems.
@@ -21510,7 +21510,7 @@ binary so that the search results are stored in folders named
21510present these folders in the Gnus front end only with @code{<NAME>}. 21510present these folders in the Gnus front end only with @code{<NAME>}.
21511You can use an existing mail back end where you already store your mail, 21511You can use an existing mail back end where you already store your mail,
21512but if you're uncomfortable with @code{nnmairix} creating new mail 21512but if you're uncomfortable with @code{nnmairix} creating new mail
21513groups alongside your other mail, you can also create e.g. a new 21513groups alongside your other mail, you can also create, e.g., a new
21514@code{nnmaildir} or @code{nnml} server exclusively for mairix, but then 21514@code{nnmaildir} or @code{nnml} server exclusively for mairix, but then
21515make sure those servers do not accidentally receive your new mail 21515make sure those servers do not accidentally receive your new mail
21516(@pxref{nnmairix caveats}). A special case exists if you want to use 21516(@pxref{nnmairix caveats}). A special case exists if you want to use
@@ -21619,7 +21619,7 @@ Just hit @kbd{TAB} to see the available servers. Currently, servers
21619which are accessed through @code{nnmaildir}, @code{nnimap} and 21619which are accessed through @code{nnmaildir}, @code{nnimap} and
21620@code{nnml} are supported. As explained above, for locally stored 21620@code{nnml} are supported. As explained above, for locally stored
21621mails, this can be an existing server where you store your mails. 21621mails, this can be an existing server where you store your mails.
21622However, you can also create e.g. a new @code{nnmaildir} or @code{nnml} 21622However, you can also create, e.g., a new @code{nnmaildir} or @code{nnml}
21623server exclusively for @code{nnmairix} in your secondary select methods 21623server exclusively for @code{nnmairix} in your secondary select methods
21624(@pxref{Finding the News}). If you use a secondary @code{nnml} server 21624(@pxref{Finding the News}). If you use a secondary @code{nnml} server
21625just for mairix, make sure that you explicitly set the server variable 21625just for mairix, make sure that you explicitly set the server variable
@@ -21632,20 +21632,20 @@ just for mairix, make sure that you explicitly set the server variable
21632@vindex nnmairix-mairix-search-options 21632@vindex nnmairix-mairix-search-options
21633The @strong{command} to call the mairix binary. This will usually just 21633The @strong{command} to call the mairix binary. This will usually just
21634be @code{mairix}, but you can also choose something like @code{ssh 21634be @code{mairix}, but you can also choose something like @code{ssh
21635SERVER mairix} if you want to call mairix remotely, e.g. on your 21635SERVER mairix} if you want to call mairix remotely, e.g., on your
21636@acronym{IMAP} server. If you want to add some default options to 21636@acronym{IMAP} server. If you want to add some default options to
21637mairix, you could do this here, but better use the variable 21637mairix, you could do this here, but better use the variable
21638@code{nnmairix-mairix-search-options} instead. 21638@code{nnmairix-mairix-search-options} instead.
21639 21639
21640@item 21640@item
21641The name of the @strong{default search group}. This will be the group 21641The name of the @strong{default search group}. This will be the group
21642where all temporary mairix searches are stored, i.e. all searches which 21642where all temporary mairix searches are stored, i.e., all searches which
21643are not bound to permanent @code{nnmairix} groups. Choose whatever you 21643are not bound to permanent @code{nnmairix} groups. Choose whatever you
21644like. 21644like.
21645 21645
21646@item 21646@item
21647If the mail back end is @code{nnimap} or @code{nnmaildir}, you will be 21647If the mail back end is @code{nnimap} or @code{nnmaildir}, you will be
21648asked if you work with @strong{Maildir++}, i.e. with hidden maildir 21648asked if you work with @strong{Maildir++}, i.e., with hidden maildir
21649folders (=beginning with a dot). For example, you have to answer 21649folders (=beginning with a dot). For example, you have to answer
21650@samp{yes} here if you work with the Dovecot @acronym{IMAP} 21650@samp{yes} here if you work with the Dovecot @acronym{IMAP}
21651server. Otherwise, you should answer @samp{no} here. 21651server. Otherwise, you should answer @samp{no} here.
@@ -21704,7 +21704,7 @@ Changes the search query for the @code{nnmairix} group under cursor
21704@kindex G b t (Group) 21704@kindex G b t (Group)
21705@findex nnmairix-group-toggle-threads-this-group 21705@findex nnmairix-group-toggle-threads-this-group
21706Toggles the 'threads' parameter for the @code{nnmairix} group under cursor, 21706Toggles the 'threads' parameter for the @code{nnmairix} group under cursor,
21707i.e. if you want see the whole threads of the found messages 21707i.e., if you want see the whole threads of the found messages
21708(@code{nnmairix-group-toggle-threads-this-group}). 21708(@code{nnmairix-group-toggle-threads-this-group}).
21709 21709
21710@item G b u 21710@item G b u
@@ -21794,8 +21794,8 @@ calling @code{nnmairix-search} with @samp{f:From}.
21794@kindex $ o (Summary) 21794@kindex $ o (Summary)
21795@findex nnmairix-goto-original-article 21795@findex nnmairix-goto-original-article
21796(Only in @code{nnmairix} groups!) Tries determine the group this article 21796(Only in @code{nnmairix} groups!) Tries determine the group this article
21797originally came from and displays the article in this group, so that 21797originally came from and displays the article in this group, so that,
21798e.g. replying to this article the correct posting styles/group 21798e.g., replying to this article the correct posting styles/group
21799parameters are applied (@code{nnmairix-goto-original-article}). This 21799parameters are applied (@code{nnmairix-goto-original-article}). This
21800function will use the registry if available, but can also parse the 21800function will use the registry if available, but can also parse the
21801article file name as a fallback method. 21801article file name as a fallback method.
@@ -21893,7 +21893,7 @@ way slower than the registry---if you set hundreds or even thousands of
21893marks this way, it might take some time. You can avoid this situation by 21893marks this way, it might take some time. You can avoid this situation by
21894setting @code{nnmairix-only-use-registry} to t. 21894setting @code{nnmairix-only-use-registry} to t.
21895 21895
21896Maybe you also want to propagate marks the other way round, i.e. if you 21896Maybe you also want to propagate marks the other way round, i.e., if you
21897tick an article in a "real" mail group, you'd like to have the same 21897tick an article in a "real" mail group, you'd like to have the same
21898article in a @code{nnmairix} group ticked, too. For several good 21898article in a @code{nnmairix} group ticked, too. For several good
21899reasons, this can only be done efficiently if you use maildir. To 21899reasons, this can only be done efficiently if you use maildir. To
@@ -21947,7 +21947,7 @@ Example: search group for ticked articles
21947For example, you can create a group for all ticked articles, where the 21947For example, you can create a group for all ticked articles, where the
21948articles always stay unread: 21948articles always stay unread:
21949 21949
21950Hit @kbd{G b g}, enter group name (e.g. @samp{important}), use 21950Hit @kbd{G b g}, enter group name (e.g., @samp{important}), use
21951@samp{F:f} as query and do not include threads. 21951@samp{F:f} as query and do not include threads.
21952 21952
21953Now activate marks propagation for this group by using @kbd{G b p}. Then 21953Now activate marks propagation for this group by using @kbd{G b p}. Then
@@ -21960,7 +21960,7 @@ tick marks from the original article. The other possibility is to set
21960@code{nnmairix-propagate-marks-to-nnmairix-groups} to @code{t}, but see the above 21960@code{nnmairix-propagate-marks-to-nnmairix-groups} to @code{t}, but see the above
21961comments about this option. If it works for you, the tick marks should 21961comments about this option. If it works for you, the tick marks should
21962also exist in the @code{nnmairix} group and you can remove them as usual, 21962also exist in the @code{nnmairix} group and you can remove them as usual,
21963e.g. by marking an article as read. 21963e.g., by marking an article as read.
21964 21964
21965When you have removed a tick mark from the original article, this 21965When you have removed a tick mark from the original article, this
21966article should vanish from the @code{nnmairix} group after you have updated the 21966article should vanish from the @code{nnmairix} group after you have updated the
@@ -21976,7 +21976,7 @@ the mail back end in the form @samp{zz_mairix-<NAME>-<NUMBER>}. You can
21976see them when you enter the back end server in the server buffer. You 21976see them when you enter the back end server in the server buffer. You
21977should not subscribe these groups! Unfortunately, these groups will 21977should not subscribe these groups! Unfortunately, these groups will
21978usually get @emph{auto-subscribed} when you use @code{nnmaildir} or 21978usually get @emph{auto-subscribed} when you use @code{nnmaildir} or
21979@code{nnml}, i.e. you will suddenly see groups of the form 21979@code{nnml}, i.e., you will suddenly see groups of the form
21980@samp{zz_mairix*} pop up in your group buffer. If this happens to you, 21980@samp{zz_mairix*} pop up in your group buffer. If this happens to you,
21981simply kill these groups with C-k. For avoiding this, turn off 21981simply kill these groups with C-k. For avoiding this, turn off
21982auto-subscription completely by setting the variable 21982auto-subscription completely by setting the variable
@@ -22588,7 +22588,7 @@ size spec per split.
22588 22588
22589Point will be put in the buffer that has the optional third element 22589Point will be put in the buffer that has the optional third element
22590@code{point}. In a @code{frame} split, the last subsplit having a leaf 22590@code{point}. In a @code{frame} split, the last subsplit having a leaf
22591split where the tag @code{frame-focus} is a member (i.e. is the third or 22591split where the tag @code{frame-focus} is a member (i.e., is the third or
22592fourth element in the list, depending on whether the @code{point} tag is 22592fourth element in the list, depending on whether the @code{point} tag is
22593present) gets focus. 22593present) gets focus.
22594 22594
@@ -22923,11 +22923,11 @@ quicker.
22923@vindex gnus-mode-non-string-length 22923@vindex gnus-mode-non-string-length
22924By default, Gnus displays information on the current article in the mode 22924By default, Gnus displays information on the current article in the mode
22925lines of the summary and article buffers. The information Gnus wishes 22925lines of the summary and article buffers. The information Gnus wishes
22926to display (e.g. the subject of the article) is often longer than the 22926to display (e.g., the subject of the article) is often longer than the
22927mode lines, and therefore have to be cut off at some point. The 22927mode lines, and therefore have to be cut off at some point. The
22928@code{gnus-mode-non-string-length} variable says how long the other 22928@code{gnus-mode-non-string-length} variable says how long the other
22929elements on the line is (i.e., the non-info part). If you put 22929elements on the line is (i.e., the non-info part). If you put
22930additional elements on the mode line (e.g. a clock), you should modify 22930additional elements on the mode line (e.g., a clock), you should modify
22931this variable: 22931this variable:
22932 22932
22933@c Hook written by Francesco Potorti` <pot@cnuce.cnr.it> 22933@c Hook written by Francesco Potorti` <pot@cnuce.cnr.it>
@@ -23947,7 +23947,7 @@ Specifiers}) follow.
23947@end lisp 23947@end lisp
23948 23948
23949Once you manage to process your incoming spool somehow, thus making 23949Once you manage to process your incoming spool somehow, thus making
23950the mail contain e.g.@: a header indicating it is spam, you are ready to 23950the mail contain, e.g., a header indicating it is spam, you are ready to
23951filter it out. Using normal split methods (@pxref{Splitting Mail}): 23951filter it out. Using normal split methods (@pxref{Splitting Mail}):
23952 23952
23953@lisp 23953@lisp
@@ -24625,7 +24625,7 @@ From Reiner Steib <reiner.steib@@gmx.de>.
24625My provider has set up bogofilter (in combination with @acronym{DCC}) on 24625My provider has set up bogofilter (in combination with @acronym{DCC}) on
24626the mail server (@acronym{IMAP}). Recognized spam goes to 24626the mail server (@acronym{IMAP}). Recognized spam goes to
24627@samp{spam.detected}, the rest goes through the normal filter rules, 24627@samp{spam.detected}, the rest goes through the normal filter rules,
24628i.e. to @samp{some.folder} or to @samp{INBOX}. Training on false 24628i.e., to @samp{some.folder} or to @samp{INBOX}. Training on false
24629positives or negatives is done by copying or moving the article to 24629positives or negatives is done by copying or moving the article to
24630@samp{training.ham} or @samp{training.spam} respectively. A cron job on 24630@samp{training.ham} or @samp{training.spam} respectively. A cron job on
24631the server feeds those to bogofilter with the suitable ham or spam 24631the server feeds those to bogofilter with the suitable ham or spam
@@ -24650,7 +24650,7 @@ does most of the job for me:
24650@item @b{The Spam folder:} 24650@item @b{The Spam folder:}
24651 24651
24652In the folder @samp{spam.detected}, I have to check for false positives 24652In the folder @samp{spam.detected}, I have to check for false positives
24653(i.e. legitimate mails, that were wrongly judged as spam by 24653(i.e., legitimate mails, that were wrongly judged as spam by
24654bogofilter or DCC). 24654bogofilter or DCC).
24655 24655
24656Because of the @code{gnus-group-spam-classification-spam} entry, all 24656Because of the @code{gnus-group-spam-classification-spam} entry, all
@@ -24663,7 +24663,7 @@ and deleted from the @samp{spam.detected} folder.
24663 24663
24664The @code{gnus-article-sort-by-chars} entry simplifies detection of 24664The @code{gnus-article-sort-by-chars} entry simplifies detection of
24665false positives for me. I receive lots of worms (sweN, @dots{}), that all 24665false positives for me. I receive lots of worms (sweN, @dots{}), that all
24666have a similar size. Grouping them by size (i.e. chars) makes finding 24666have a similar size. Grouping them by size (i.e., chars) makes finding
24667other false positives easier. (Of course worms aren't @i{spam} 24667other false positives easier. (Of course worms aren't @i{spam}
24668(@acronym{UCE}, @acronym{UBE}) strictly speaking. Anyhow, bogofilter is 24668(@acronym{UCE}, @acronym{UBE}) strictly speaking. Anyhow, bogofilter is
24669an excellent tool for filtering those unwanted mails for me.) 24669an excellent tool for filtering those unwanted mails for me.)
@@ -24691,7 +24691,7 @@ groups as spam and reports the to Gmane at group exit:
24691 24691
24692Additionally, I use @code{(setq spam-report-gmane-use-article-number nil)} 24692Additionally, I use @code{(setq spam-report-gmane-use-article-number nil)}
24693because I don't read the groups directly from news.gmane.org, but 24693because I don't read the groups directly from news.gmane.org, but
24694through my local news server (leafnode). I.e. the article numbers are 24694through my local news server (leafnode). I.e., the article numbers are
24695not the same as on news.gmane.org, thus @code{spam-report.el} has to check 24695not the same as on news.gmane.org, thus @code{spam-report.el} has to check
24696the @code{X-Report-Spam} header to find the correct number. 24696the @code{X-Report-Spam} header to find the correct number.
24697 24697
@@ -24830,7 +24830,7 @@ messages are not assumed to be spam or ham.
24830 24830
24831Set this variable to @code{t} if you want to use the BBDB as an 24831Set this variable to @code{t} if you want to use the BBDB as an
24832implicit filter, meaning that every message will be considered spam 24832implicit filter, meaning that every message will be considered spam
24833unless the sender is in the BBDB. Use with care. Only sender 24833unless the sender is in the BBDB@. Use with care. Only sender
24834addresses in the BBDB will be allowed through; all others will be 24834addresses in the BBDB will be allowed through; all others will be
24835classified as spammers. 24835classified as spammers.
24836 24836
@@ -25294,7 +25294,7 @@ SpamOracle.
25294 25294
25295@defvar spam-spamoracle-binary 25295@defvar spam-spamoracle-binary
25296Gnus uses the SpamOracle binary called @file{spamoracle} found in the 25296Gnus uses the SpamOracle binary called @file{spamoracle} found in the
25297user's PATH. Using the variable @code{spam-spamoracle-binary}, this 25297user's PATH@. Using the variable @code{spam-spamoracle-binary}, this
25298can be customized. 25298can be customized.
25299@end defvar 25299@end defvar
25300 25300
@@ -25359,7 +25359,7 @@ messages.
25359@end example 25359@end example
25360For this group the @code{spam-use-spamoracle} is installed for both 25360For this group the @code{spam-use-spamoracle} is installed for both
25361ham and spam processing. If the group contains spam message 25361ham and spam processing. If the group contains spam message
25362(e.g. because SpamOracle has not had enough sample messages yet) and 25362(e.g., because SpamOracle has not had enough sample messages yet) and
25363the user marks some messages as spam messages, these messages will be 25363the user marks some messages as spam messages, these messages will be
25364processed by SpamOracle. The processor sends the messages to 25364processed by SpamOracle. The processor sends the messages to
25365SpamOracle as new samples for spam. 25365SpamOracle as new samples for spam.
@@ -25805,7 +25805,7 @@ of said features in case your attention span is... never mind.
25805Split messages to their parent 25805Split messages to their parent
25806 25806
25807This keeps discussions in the same group. You can use the subject and 25807This keeps discussions in the same group. You can use the subject and
25808the sender in addition to the Message-ID. Several strategies are 25808the sender in addition to the Message-ID@. Several strategies are
25809available. 25809available.
25810 25810
25811@item 25811@item
@@ -26507,7 +26507,7 @@ Message Mode is able to request notifications from the receiver.
26507@cindex RFC 1991 26507@cindex RFC 1991
26508@cindex RFC 2440 26508@cindex RFC 2440
26509RFC 1991 is the original @acronym{PGP} message specification, 26509RFC 1991 is the original @acronym{PGP} message specification,
26510published as an informational RFC. RFC 2440 was the follow-up, now 26510published as an informational RFC@. RFC 2440 was the follow-up, now
26511called Open PGP, and put on the Standards Track. Both document a 26511called Open PGP, and put on the Standards Track. Both document a
26512non-@acronym{MIME} aware @acronym{PGP} format. Gnus supports both 26512non-@acronym{MIME} aware @acronym{PGP} format. Gnus supports both
26513encoding (signing and encryption) and decoding (verification and 26513encoding (signing and encryption) and decoding (verification and
@@ -27480,7 +27480,7 @@ group, which is created automatically.
27480values. 27480values.
27481 27481
27482@item 27482@item
27483@code{gnus-summary-goto-article} now accept Message-ID's. 27483@code{gnus-summary-goto-article} now accept Message-IDs.
27484 27484
27485@item 27485@item
27486A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message 27486A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
@@ -28234,7 +28234,7 @@ The nnml and nnfolder back ends store marks for each groups.
28234This makes it possible to take backup of nnml/nnfolder servers/groups 28234This makes it possible to take backup of nnml/nnfolder servers/groups
28235separately of @file{~/.newsrc.eld}, while preserving marks. It also 28235separately of @file{~/.newsrc.eld}, while preserving marks. It also
28236makes it possible to share articles and marks between users (without 28236makes it possible to share articles and marks between users (without
28237sharing the @file{~/.newsrc.eld} file) within e.g. a department. It 28237sharing the @file{~/.newsrc.eld} file) within, e.g., a department. It
28238works by storing the marks stored in @file{~/.newsrc.eld} in a per-group 28238works by storing the marks stored in @file{~/.newsrc.eld} in a per-group
28239file @file{.marks} (for nnml) and @file{@var{groupname}.mrk} (for 28239file @file{.marks} (for nnml) and @file{@var{groupname}.mrk} (for
28240nnfolder, named @var{groupname}). If the nnml/nnfolder is moved to 28240nnfolder, named @var{groupname}). If the nnml/nnfolder is moved to
@@ -28937,10 +28937,10 @@ can use @kbd{M-x toggle-debug-on-quit} and press @kbd{C-g} when things are
28937slow, and then try to analyze the backtrace (repeating the procedure 28937slow, and then try to analyze the backtrace (repeating the procedure
28938helps isolating the real problem areas). 28938helps isolating the real problem areas).
28939 28939
28940A fancier approach is to use the elisp profiler, ELP. The profiler is 28940A fancier approach is to use the elisp profiler, ELP@. The profiler is
28941(or should be) fully documented elsewhere, but to get you started 28941(or should be) fully documented elsewhere, but to get you started
28942there are a few steps that need to be followed. First, instrument the 28942there are a few steps that need to be followed. First, instrument the
28943part of Gnus you are interested in for profiling, e.g. @kbd{M-x 28943part of Gnus you are interested in for profiling, e.g., @kbd{M-x
28944elp-instrument-package RET gnus} or @kbd{M-x elp-instrument-package 28944elp-instrument-package RET gnus} or @kbd{M-x elp-instrument-package
28945RET message}. Then perform the operation that is slow and press 28945RET message}. Then perform the operation that is slow and press
28946@kbd{M-x elp-results}. You will then see which operations that takes 28946@kbd{M-x elp-results}. You will then see which operations that takes
diff --git a/doc/misc/idlwave.texi b/doc/misc/idlwave.texi
index feef325ad30..436fa28b1fb 100644
--- a/doc/misc/idlwave.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/idlwave.texi
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ at point.
382@section Lesson I: Development Cycle 382@section Lesson I: Development Cycle
383 383
384The purpose of this tutorial is to guide you through a very basic 384The purpose of this tutorial is to guide you through a very basic
385development cycle using IDLWAVE. We will paste a simple program into 385development cycle using IDLWAVE@. We will paste a simple program into
386a buffer and use the shell to compile, debug and run it. On the way 386a buffer and use the shell to compile, debug and run it. On the way
387we will use many of the important IDLWAVE commands. Note, however, 387we will use many of the important IDLWAVE commands. Note, however,
388that IDLWAVE has many more capabilities than covered here, which can 388that IDLWAVE has many more capabilities than covered here, which can
@@ -444,7 +444,7 @@ buffer with @kbd{C-x h}, and indent the whole region with
444highlighted in different colors, if you have set up support for 444highlighted in different colors, if you have set up support for
445font-lock. 445font-lock.
446 446
447Let's check out two particular editing features of IDLWAVE. Place the 447Let's check out two particular editing features of IDLWAVE@. Place the
448cursor after the @code{end} statement of the @code{for} loop and press 448cursor after the @code{end} statement of the @code{for} loop and press
449@key{SPC}. IDLWAVE blinks back to the beginning of the block and 449@key{SPC}. IDLWAVE blinks back to the beginning of the block and
450changes the generic @code{end} to the specific @code{endfor} 450changes the generic @code{end} to the specific @code{endfor}
@@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ First, let's launch the IDLWAVE shell. You do this with the command
464@kbd{C-c C-s}. The Emacs window will split or another window will popup 464@kbd{C-c C-s}. The Emacs window will split or another window will popup
465to display IDL running in a shell interaction buffer. Type a few 465to display IDL running in a shell interaction buffer. Type a few
466commands like @code{print,!PI} to convince yourself that you can work 466commands like @code{print,!PI} to convince yourself that you can work
467there just as well as in a terminal, or the IDLDE. Use the arrow keys 467there just as well as in a terminal, or the IDLDE@. Use the arrow keys
468to cycle through your command history. Are we having fun now? 468to cycle through your command history. Are we having fun now?
469 469
470Now go back to the source window and type @kbd{C-c C-d C-c} to compile 470Now go back to the source window and type @kbd{C-c C-d C-c} to compile
@@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ there is another, more user-friendly way to customize all the IDLWAVE
602variables. You can access it through the IDLWAVE menu in one of the 602variables. You can access it through the IDLWAVE menu in one of the
603@file{.pro} buffers, menu item @code{Customize->Browse IDLWAVE 603@file{.pro} buffers, menu item @code{Customize->Browse IDLWAVE
604Group}. Here you'll be presented with all the various variables grouped 604Group}. Here you'll be presented with all the various variables grouped
605into categories. You can navigate the hierarchy (e.g. @samp{IDLWAVE 605into categories. You can navigate the hierarchy (e.g., @samp{IDLWAVE
606Code Formatting->Idlwave Abbrev And Indent Action->Idlwave Expand 606Code Formatting->Idlwave Abbrev And Indent Action->Idlwave Expand
607Generic End} to turn on @code{END} expansion), read about the variables, 607Generic End} to turn on @code{END} expansion), read about the variables,
608change them, and `Save for Future Sessions'. Few of these variables 608change them, and `Save for Future Sessions'. Few of these variables
@@ -691,7 +691,7 @@ go for a cup of coffee while IDLWAVE collects information for each and
691every IDL routine on your search path. All this information is 691every IDL routine on your search path. All this information is
692written to the file @file{.idlwave/idlusercat.el} in your home 692written to the file @file{.idlwave/idlusercat.el} in your home
693directory and will from now on automatically load whenever you use 693directory and will from now on automatically load whenever you use
694IDLWAVE. You may find it necessary to rebuild the catalog on occasion 694IDLWAVE@. You may find it necessary to rebuild the catalog on occasion
695as your local libraries change, or build a library catalog for those 695as your local libraries change, or build a library catalog for those
696directories instead. Invoke routine info (@kbd{C-c ?}) or completion 696directories instead. Invoke routine info (@kbd{C-c ?}) or completion
697(@kbd{M-@key{TAB}}) on any routine or partial routine name you know to 697(@kbd{M-@key{TAB}}) on any routine or partial routine name you know to
@@ -715,7 +715,7 @@ Usage: Result = READFITS(filename, header, heap)
715... 715...
716@end example 716@end example
717 717
718I hope you made it until here. Now you are set to work with IDLWAVE. 718I hope you made it until here. Now you are set to work with IDLWAVE@.
719On the way you will want to change other things, and to learn more 719On the way you will want to change other things, and to learn more
720about the possibilities not discussed in this short tutorial. Read 720about the possibilities not discussed in this short tutorial. Read
721the manual, look at the documentation strings of interesting variables 721the manual, look at the documentation strings of interesting variables
@@ -789,7 +789,7 @@ continuation lines.
789@cindex Foreign code, adapting 789@cindex Foreign code, adapting
790@cindex Indentation, of foreign code 790@cindex Indentation, of foreign code
791@kindex C-M-\ 791@kindex C-M-\
792To re-indent a larger portion of code (e.g. when working with foreign 792To re-indent a larger portion of code (e.g., when working with foreign
793code written with different conventions), use @kbd{C-M-\} 793code written with different conventions), use @kbd{C-M-\}
794(@code{indent-region}) after marking the relevant code. Useful marking 794(@code{indent-region}) after marking the relevant code. Useful marking
795commands are @kbd{C-x h} (the entire file) or @kbd{C-M-h} (the current 795commands are @kbd{C-x h} (the entire file) or @kbd{C-M-h} (the current
@@ -1057,7 +1057,7 @@ altogether, and use the more sensible alternative IDL provides:
1057@end example 1057@end example
1058 1058
1059@noindent This simultaneously solves the font-lock problem and is more 1059@noindent This simultaneously solves the font-lock problem and is more
1060consistent with the notation for hexadecimal numbers, e.g. @code{'C5'XB}. 1060consistent with the notation for hexadecimal numbers, e.g., @code{'C5'XB}.
1061 1061
1062@node Routine Info, Online Help, Code Formatting, The IDLWAVE Major Mode 1062@node Routine Info, Online Help, Code Formatting, The IDLWAVE Major Mode
1063@section Routine Info 1063@section Routine Info
@@ -1111,7 +1111,7 @@ method exists in several classes, IDLWAVE queries for the class of the
1111object, unless the class is already known through a text property on the 1111object, unless the class is already known through a text property on the
1112@samp{->} operator (@pxref{Object Method Completion and Class 1112@samp{->} operator (@pxref{Object Method Completion and Class
1113Ambiguity}), or by having been explicitly included in the call 1113Ambiguity}), or by having been explicitly included in the call
1114(e.g. @code{a->myclass::Foo}). 1114(e.g., @code{a->myclass::Foo}).
1115 1115
1116@cindex Calling sequences 1116@cindex Calling sequences
1117@cindex Keywords of a routine 1117@cindex Keywords of a routine
@@ -1168,7 +1168,7 @@ will automatically split into the next two.
1168 1168
1169Any routines discovered in library catalogs (@pxref{Library 1169Any routines discovered in library catalogs (@pxref{Library
1170Catalogs}), will display the category assigned during creation, 1170Catalogs}), will display the category assigned during creation,
1171e.g. @samp{NasaLib}. For routines not discovered in this way, you can 1171e.g., @samp{NasaLib}. For routines not discovered in this way, you can
1172create additional categories based on the routine's filename using the 1172create additional categories based on the routine's filename using the
1173variable @code{idlwave-special-lib-alist}. 1173variable @code{idlwave-special-lib-alist}.
1174 1174
@@ -1248,12 +1248,12 @@ Maximum number of source files displayed in the Routine Info window.
1248@cindex Speed, of online help 1248@cindex Speed, of online help
1249@cindex XML Help Catalog 1249@cindex XML Help Catalog
1250 1250
1251For IDL system routines, extensive documentation is supplied with IDL. 1251For IDL system routines, extensive documentation is supplied with IDL@.
1252IDLWAVE can access the HTML version of this documentation very quickly 1252IDLWAVE can access the HTML version of this documentation very quickly
1253and accurately, based on the local context. This can be @emph{much} 1253and accurately, based on the local context. This can be @emph{much}
1254faster than using the IDL online help application, because IDLWAVE 1254faster than using the IDL online help application, because IDLWAVE
1255usually gets you to the right place in the documentation directly --- 1255usually gets you to the right place in the documentation directly ---
1256e.g. a specific keyword of a routine --- without any additional browsing 1256e.g., a specific keyword of a routine --- without any additional browsing
1257and scrolling. 1257and scrolling.
1258 1258
1259For this online help to work, an HTML version of the IDL documentation 1259For this online help to work, an HTML version of the IDL documentation
@@ -1331,7 +1331,7 @@ When using completion and Emacs pops up a @file{*Completions*} buffer
1331with possible completions, clicking with @kbd{Mouse-3} on a completion 1331with possible completions, clicking with @kbd{Mouse-3} on a completion
1332item invokes help on that item (@pxref{Completion}). Items for which 1332item invokes help on that item (@pxref{Completion}). Items for which
1333help is available in the online system documentation (vs. just the 1333help is available in the online system documentation (vs. just the
1334program source itself) will be emphasized (e.g. colored blue). 1334program source itself) will be emphasized (e.g., colored blue).
1335@end itemize 1335@end itemize
1336@noindent 1336@noindent
1337In both cases, a blue face indicates that the item is documented in 1337In both cases, a blue face indicates that the item is documented in
@@ -1501,7 +1501,7 @@ displaying source file.
1501 1501
1502@defopt idlwave-help-doclib-name (@code{"name"}) 1502@defopt idlwave-help-doclib-name (@code{"name"})
1503The case-insensitive heading word in doclib headers to locate the 1503The case-insensitive heading word in doclib headers to locate the
1504@emph{name} section. Can be a regexp, e.g. @code{"\\(name\\|nom\\)"}. 1504@emph{name} section. Can be a regexp, e.g., @code{"\\(name\\|nom\\)"}.
1505@end defopt 1505@end defopt
1506 1506
1507@defopt idlwave-help-doclib-keyword (@code{"KEYWORD"}) 1507@defopt idlwave-help-doclib-keyword (@code{"KEYWORD"})
@@ -1576,7 +1576,7 @@ If the list of completions is too long to fit in the
1576@kbd{M-@key{TAB}} repeatedly. Online help (if installed) for each 1576@kbd{M-@key{TAB}} repeatedly. Online help (if installed) for each
1577possible completion is available by clicking with @kbd{Mouse-3} on the 1577possible completion is available by clicking with @kbd{Mouse-3} on the
1578item. Items for which system online help (from the IDL manual) is 1578item. Items for which system online help (from the IDL manual) is
1579available will be emphasized (e.g. colored blue). For other items, the 1579available will be emphasized (e.g., colored blue). For other items, the
1580corresponding source code or DocLib header will be used as the help 1580corresponding source code or DocLib header will be used as the help
1581text. 1581text.
1582 1582
@@ -1681,14 +1681,14 @@ narrow down the number of possible completions. The variable
1681@code{idlwave-query-class} can be configured to make such prompting the 1681@code{idlwave-query-class} can be configured to make such prompting the
1682default for all methods (not recommended), or selectively for very 1682default for all methods (not recommended), or selectively for very
1683common methods for which the number of completing keywords would be too 1683common methods for which the number of completing keywords would be too
1684large (e.g. @code{Init,SetProperty,GetProperty}). 1684large (e.g., @code{Init,SetProperty,GetProperty}).
1685 1685
1686@cindex Saving object class on @code{->} 1686@cindex Saving object class on @code{->}
1687@cindex @code{->} 1687@cindex @code{->}
1688After you have specified the class for a particular statement (e.g. when 1688After you have specified the class for a particular statement (e.g., when
1689completing the method), IDLWAVE can remember it for the rest of the 1689completing the method), IDLWAVE can remember it for the rest of the
1690editing session. Subsequent completions in the same statement 1690editing session. Subsequent completions in the same statement
1691(e.g. keywords) can then reuse this class information. This works by 1691(e.g., keywords) can then reuse this class information. This works by
1692placing a text property on the method invocation operator @samp{->}, 1692placing a text property on the method invocation operator @samp{->},
1693after which the operator will be shown in a different face (bold by 1693after which the operator will be shown in a different face (bold by
1694default). The variable @code{idlwave-store-inquired-class} can be used 1694default). The variable @code{idlwave-store-inquired-class} can be used
@@ -1737,7 +1737,7 @@ be used (as in the buffer).
1737@cindex Keyword inheritance 1737@cindex Keyword inheritance
1738@cindex Inheritance, keyword 1738@cindex Inheritance, keyword
1739 1739
1740Class inheritance affects which methods are called in IDL. An object of 1740Class inheritance affects which methods are called in IDL@. An object of
1741a class which inherits methods from one or more superclasses can 1741a class which inherits methods from one or more superclasses can
1742override that method by defining its own method of the same name, extend 1742override that method by defining its own method of the same name, extend
1743the method by calling the method(s) of its superclass(es) in its 1743the method by calling the method(s) of its superclass(es) in its
@@ -1783,7 +1783,7 @@ class-driven keyword inheritance will be used for Completion.
1783@cindex Structure tag completion 1783@cindex Structure tag completion
1784 1784
1785In many programs, especially those involving widgets, large structures 1785In many programs, especially those involving widgets, large structures
1786(e.g. the @samp{state} structure) are used to communicate among 1786(e.g., the @samp{state} structure) are used to communicate among
1787routines. It is very convenient to be able to complete structure tags, 1787routines. It is very convenient to be able to complete structure tags,
1788in the same way as for instance variables (tags) of the @samp{self} 1788in the same way as for instance variables (tags) of the @samp{self}
1789object (@pxref{Object Method Completion and Class Ambiguity}). Add-in 1789object (@pxref{Object Method Completion and Class Ambiguity}). Add-in
@@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ specific assumption: the exact same variable name is used to refer to
1795the structure in all parts of the program. This is entirely unenforced 1795the structure in all parts of the program. This is entirely unenforced
1796by the IDL language, but is a typical convention. If you consistently 1796by the IDL language, but is a typical convention. If you consistently
1797refer to the same structure with the same variable name 1797refer to the same structure with the same variable name
1798(e.g. @samp{state}), structure tags which are read from its definition 1798(e.g., @samp{state}), structure tags which are read from its definition
1799in the same file can be used for completion. 1799in the same file can be used for completion.
1800 1800
1801Structure tag completion is not enabled by default. To enable it, 1801Structure tag completion is not enabled by default. To enable it,
@@ -2070,7 +2070,7 @@ abbreviation strings.
2070@end defopt 2070@end defopt
2071 2071
2072@defopt idlwave-abbrev-move (@code{t}) 2072@defopt idlwave-abbrev-move (@code{t})
2073Non-@code{nil} means the abbrev hook can move point, e.g. to end up 2073Non-@code{nil} means the abbrev hook can move point, e.g., to end up
2074between the parentheses of a function call. 2074between the parentheses of a function call.
2075@end defopt 2075@end defopt
2076 2076
@@ -2103,7 +2103,7 @@ must be non-@code{nil}.
2103@item 2103@item
2104@cindex Foreign code, adapting 2104@cindex Foreign code, adapting
2105@cindex Actions, applied to foreign code 2105@cindex Actions, applied to foreign code
2106Actions can also be applied to a larger piece of code, e.g. to convert 2106Actions can also be applied to a larger piece of code, e.g., to convert
2107foreign code to your own style. To do this, mark the relevant part of 2107foreign code to your own style. To do this, mark the relevant part of
2108the code and execute @kbd{M-x expand-region-abbrevs}. Useful marking 2108the code and execute @kbd{M-x expand-region-abbrevs}. Useful marking
2109commands are @kbd{C-x h} (the entire file) or @kbd{C-M-h} (the current 2109commands are @kbd{C-x h} (the entire file) or @kbd{C-M-h} (the current
@@ -2185,7 +2185,7 @@ operators (outside of strings and comments, of course), try this in
2185Note that the modified assignment operators which begin with a word 2185Note that the modified assignment operators which begin with a word
2186(@samp{AND=}, @samp{OR=}, @samp{NOT=}, etc.) require a leading space to 2186(@samp{AND=}, @samp{OR=}, @samp{NOT=}, etc.) require a leading space to
2187be recognized (e.g @code{vAND=4} would be interpreted as a variable 2187be recognized (e.g @code{vAND=4} would be interpreted as a variable
2188@code{vAND}). Also note that, since e.g., @code{>} and @code{>=} are 2188@code{vAND}). Also note that since, e.g., @code{>} and @code{>=} are
2189both valid operators, it is impossible to surround both by blanks while 2189both valid operators, it is impossible to surround both by blanks while
2190they are being typed. Similarly with @code{&} and @code{&&}. For 2190they are being typed. Similarly with @code{&} and @code{&&}. For
2191these, a compromise is made: the padding is placed on the left, and if 2191these, a compromise is made: the padding is placed on the left, and if
@@ -2605,13 +2605,13 @@ Size of IDL graphics windows popped up by special IDLWAVE command.
2605@cindex Spells, magic 2605@cindex Spells, magic
2606IDLWAVE works in line input mode: You compose a full command line, using 2606IDLWAVE works in line input mode: You compose a full command line, using
2607all the power Emacs gives you to do this. When you press @key{RET}, the 2607all the power Emacs gives you to do this. When you press @key{RET}, the
2608whole line is sent to IDL. Sometimes it is necessary to send single 2608whole line is sent to IDL@. Sometimes it is necessary to send single
2609characters (without a newline), for example when an IDL program is 2609characters (without a newline), for example when an IDL program is
2610waiting for single character input with the @code{GET_KBRD} function. 2610waiting for single character input with the @code{GET_KBRD} function.
2611You can send a single character to IDL with the command @kbd{C-c C-x} 2611You can send a single character to IDL with the command @kbd{C-c C-x}
2612(@code{idlwave-shell-send-char}). When you press @kbd{C-c C-y} 2612(@code{idlwave-shell-send-char}). When you press @kbd{C-c C-y}
2613(@code{idlwave-shell-char-mode-loop}), IDLWAVE runs a blocking loop 2613(@code{idlwave-shell-char-mode-loop}), IDLWAVE runs a blocking loop
2614which accepts characters and immediately sends them to IDL. The loop 2614which accepts characters and immediately sends them to IDL@. The loop
2615can be exited with @kbd{C-g}. It terminates also automatically when the 2615can be exited with @kbd{C-g}. It terminates also automatically when the
2616current IDL command is finished. Check the documentation of the two 2616current IDL command is finished. Check the documentation of the two
2617variables described below for a way to make IDL programs trigger 2617variables described below for a way to make IDL programs trigger
@@ -2745,7 +2745,7 @@ example, if you include in @file{.emacs}:
2745@end lisp 2745@end lisp
2746 2746
2747@noindent a breakpoint can then be set by pressing @kbd{b} while holding down 2747@noindent a breakpoint can then be set by pressing @kbd{b} while holding down
2748@kbd{shift} and @kbd{control} keys, i.e. @kbd{C-S-b}. Compiling a 2748@kbd{shift} and @kbd{control} keys, i.e., @kbd{C-S-b}. Compiling a
2749source file will be on @kbd{C-S-c}, deleting a breakpoint @kbd{C-S-d}, 2749source file will be on @kbd{C-S-c}, deleting a breakpoint @kbd{C-S-d},
2750etc. In the remainder of this chapter we will assume that the 2750etc. In the remainder of this chapter we will assume that the
2751@kbd{C-c C-d} bindings are active, but each of these bindings will 2751@kbd{C-c C-d} bindings are active, but each of these bindings will
@@ -2783,11 +2783,11 @@ more of @code{control}, @code{meta}, @code{super}, @code{hyper},
2783IDLWAVE helps you set breakpoints and step through code. Setting a 2783IDLWAVE helps you set breakpoints and step through code. Setting a
2784breakpoint in the current line of the source buffer is accomplished 2784breakpoint in the current line of the source buffer is accomplished
2785with @kbd{C-c C-d C-b} (@code{idlwave-shell-break-here}). With a 2785with @kbd{C-c C-d C-b} (@code{idlwave-shell-break-here}). With a
2786prefix arg of 1 (i.e. @kbd{C-1 C-c C-d C-b}), the breakpoint gets a 2786prefix arg of 1 (i.e., @kbd{C-1 C-c C-d C-b}), the breakpoint gets a
2787@code{/ONCE} keyword, meaning that it will be deleted after first use. 2787@code{/ONCE} keyword, meaning that it will be deleted after first use.
2788With a numeric prefix greater than one (e.g. @kbd{C-4 C-c C-d C-b}), 2788With a numeric prefix greater than one (e.g., @kbd{C-4 C-c C-d C-b}),
2789the breakpoint will only be active the @code{nth} time it is hit. 2789the breakpoint will only be active the @code{nth} time it is hit.
2790With a single non-numeric prefix (i.e. @kbd{C-u C-c C-d C-b}), prompt 2790With a single non-numeric prefix (i.e., @kbd{C-u C-c C-d C-b}), prompt
2791for a condition --- an IDL expression to be evaluated and trigger the 2791for a condition --- an IDL expression to be evaluated and trigger the
2792breakpoint only if true. To clear the breakpoint in the current line, 2792breakpoint only if true. To clear the breakpoint in the current line,
2793use @kbd{C-c C-d C-d} (@code{idlwave-clear-current-bp}). When 2793use @kbd{C-c C-d C-d} (@code{idlwave-clear-current-bp}). When
@@ -3042,7 +3042,7 @@ with shortcut of examine type.
3042 3042
3043Most single-character electric debug bindings use the final keystroke 3043Most single-character electric debug bindings use the final keystroke
3044of the equivalent multiple key commands (which are of course also 3044of the equivalent multiple key commands (which are of course also
3045still available), but some differ (e.g. @kbd{e},@kbd{t},@kbd{q},@kbd{x}). 3045still available), but some differ (e.g., @kbd{e},@kbd{t},@kbd{q},@kbd{x}).
3046Some have additional convenience bindings (like @kbd{@key{SPACE}} for 3046Some have additional convenience bindings (like @kbd{@key{SPACE}} for
3047stepping). All prefix and other argument options described in this 3047stepping). All prefix and other argument options described in this
3048section for the commands invoked by electric debug bindings are still 3048section for the commands invoked by electric debug bindings are still
@@ -3106,7 +3106,7 @@ window, but is useful for immediate stepping, etc.
3106@cindex Mouse binding to print expressions 3106@cindex Mouse binding to print expressions
3107 3107
3108@kindex C-c C-d C-p 3108@kindex C-c C-d C-p
3109Do you find yourself repeatedly typing, e.g. @code{print,n_elements(x)}, 3109Do you find yourself repeatedly typing, e.g., @code{print,n_elements(x)},
3110and similar statements to remind yourself of the 3110and similar statements to remind yourself of the
3111type/size/structure/value/etc. of variables and expressions in your code 3111type/size/structure/value/etc. of variables and expressions in your code
3112or at the command line? IDLWAVE has a suite of special commands to 3112or at the command line? IDLWAVE has a suite of special commands to
@@ -3149,7 +3149,7 @@ print, only an initial portion of long arrays will be printed, up to
3149For added speed and convenience, there are mouse bindings which allow 3149For added speed and convenience, there are mouse bindings which allow
3150you to click on expressions and examine their values. Use 3150you to click on expressions and examine their values. Use
3151@kbd{S-Mouse-2} to print an expression and @kbd{C-M-Mouse-2} to invoke 3151@kbd{S-Mouse-2} to print an expression and @kbd{C-M-Mouse-2} to invoke
3152help (i.e. you need to hold down @key{META} and @key{CONTROL} while 3152help (i.e., you need to hold down @key{META} and @key{CONTROL} while
3153clicking with the middle mouse button). If you simply click, the 3153clicking with the middle mouse button). If you simply click, the
3154nearest expression will be selected in the same manner as described 3154nearest expression will be selected in the same manner as described
3155above. You can also @emph{drag} the mouse in order to highlight 3155above. You can also @emph{drag} the mouse in order to highlight
@@ -3177,7 +3177,7 @@ with a @samp{( )} will be interpreted as function calls.
3177@cindex ROUTINE_NAMES, IDL procedure 3177@cindex ROUTINE_NAMES, IDL procedure
3178N.B.: printing values of expressions on higher levels of the calling 3178N.B.: printing values of expressions on higher levels of the calling
3179stack uses the @emph{unsupported} IDL routine @code{ROUTINE_NAMES}, 3179stack uses the @emph{unsupported} IDL routine @code{ROUTINE_NAMES},
3180which may or may not be available in future versions of IDL. Caveat 3180which may or may not be available in future versions of IDL@. Caveat
3181Examinor. 3181Examinor.
3182@end itemize 3182@end itemize
3183 3183
@@ -3503,7 +3503,7 @@ extending the internal built-in information available for IDL system
3503routines (@pxref{Routine Info}) to other source collections. 3503routines (@pxref{Routine Info}) to other source collections.
3504 3504
3505Starting with version 5.0, there are two types of catalogs available 3505Starting with version 5.0, there are two types of catalogs available
3506with IDLWAVE. The traditional @emph{user catalog} and the newer 3506with IDLWAVE@. The traditional @emph{user catalog} and the newer
3507@emph{library catalogs}. Although they can be used interchangeably, the 3507@emph{library catalogs}. Although they can be used interchangeably, the
3508library catalogs are more flexible, and preferred. There are few 3508library catalogs are more flexible, and preferred. There are few
3509occasions when a user catalog might be preferred --- read below. Both 3509occasions when a user catalog might be preferred --- read below. Both
@@ -3513,7 +3513,7 @@ To facilitate the catalog systems, IDLWAVE stores information it gathers
3513from the shell about the IDL search paths, and can write this 3513from the shell about the IDL search paths, and can write this
3514information out automatically, or on-demand (menu @code{Debug->Save Path 3514information out automatically, or on-demand (menu @code{Debug->Save Path
3515Info}). On systems with no shell from which to discover the path 3515Info}). On systems with no shell from which to discover the path
3516information (e.g. Windows), a library path must be specified in 3516information (e.g., Windows), a library path must be specified in
3517@code{idlwave-library-path} to allow library catalogs to be located, and 3517@code{idlwave-library-path} to allow library catalogs to be located, and
3518to setup directories for user catalog scan (@pxref{User Catalog} for 3518to setup directories for user catalog scan (@pxref{User Catalog} for
3519more on this variable). Note that, before the shell is running, IDLWAVE 3519more on this variable). Note that, before the shell is running, IDLWAVE
@@ -3530,12 +3530,12 @@ to locate library catalogs.
3530@end defopt 3530@end defopt
3531 3531
3532@defopt idlwave-library-path 3532@defopt idlwave-library-path
3533IDL library path for Windows and MacOS. Under Unix/MacOSX, will be 3533IDL library path for Windows and MacOS@. Under Unix/MacOSX, will be
3534obtained from the Shell when run. 3534obtained from the Shell when run.
3535@end defopt 3535@end defopt
3536 3536
3537@defopt idlwave-system-directory 3537@defopt idlwave-system-directory
3538The IDL system directory for Windows and MacOS. Also needed for 3538The IDL system directory for Windows and MacOS@. Also needed for
3539locating HTML help and the IDL Assistant for IDL v6.2 and later. Under 3539locating HTML help and the IDL Assistant for IDL v6.2 and later. Under
3540Unix/MacOSX, will be obtained from the Shell and recorded, if run. 3540Unix/MacOSX, will be obtained from the Shell and recorded, if run.
3541@end defopt 3541@end defopt
@@ -3565,19 +3565,19 @@ in directories containing @code{.pro} routine files. They are
3565discovered on the IDL search path and loaded automatically when routine 3565discovered on the IDL search path and loaded automatically when routine
3566information is read. Each catalog file documents the routines found in 3566information is read. Each catalog file documents the routines found in
3567that directory --- one catalog per directory. Every catalog has a 3567that directory --- one catalog per directory. Every catalog has a
3568library name associated with it (e.g. @emph{AstroLib}). This name will 3568library name associated with it (e.g., @emph{AstroLib}). This name will
3569be shown briefly when the catalog is found, and in the routine info of 3569be shown briefly when the catalog is found, and in the routine info of
3570routines it documents. 3570routines it documents.
3571 3571
3572Many popular libraries of routines are shipped with IDLWAVE catalog 3572Many popular libraries of routines are shipped with IDLWAVE catalog
3573files by default, and so will be automatically discovered. Library 3573files by default, and so will be automatically discovered. Library
3574catalogs are scanned externally to Emacs using a tool provided with 3574catalogs are scanned externally to Emacs using a tool provided with
3575IDLWAVE. Each catalog can be re-scanned independently of any other. 3575IDLWAVE@. Each catalog can be re-scanned independently of any other.
3576Catalogs can easily be made available system-wide with a common source 3576Catalogs can easily be made available system-wide with a common source
3577repository, providing uniform routine information, and lifting the 3577repository, providing uniform routine information, and lifting the
3578burden of scanning from the user (who may not even know they're using a 3578burden of scanning from the user (who may not even know they're using a
3579scanned catalog). Since all catalogs are independent, they can be 3579scanned catalog). Since all catalogs are independent, they can be
3580re-scanned automatically to gather updates, e.g. in a @file{cron} job. 3580re-scanned automatically to gather updates, e.g., in a @file{cron} job.
3581Scanning is much faster than with the built-in user catalog method. One 3581Scanning is much faster than with the built-in user catalog method. One
3582minor disadvantage: the entire IDL search path is scanned for catalog 3582minor disadvantage: the entire IDL search path is scanned for catalog
3583files every time IDLWAVE starts up, which might be slow if accessing IDL 3583files every time IDLWAVE starts up, which might be slow if accessing IDL
@@ -3719,7 +3719,7 @@ C-i}. Here are the different routines (also available in the Menu
3719@item @kbd{M-x idlwave-list-buffer-load-path-shadows} 3719@item @kbd{M-x idlwave-list-buffer-load-path-shadows}
3720This command checks the names of all routines defined in the current 3720This command checks the names of all routines defined in the current
3721buffer for shadowing conflicts with other routines accessible to 3721buffer for shadowing conflicts with other routines accessible to
3722IDLWAVE. The command also has a key binding: @kbd{C-c C-b} 3722IDLWAVE@. The command also has a key binding: @kbd{C-c C-b}
3723@item @kbd{M-x idlwave-list-shell-load-path-shadows}. 3723@item @kbd{M-x idlwave-list-shell-load-path-shadows}.
3724Checks all routines compiled under the shell for shadowing. This is 3724Checks all routines compiled under the shell for shadowing. This is
3725very useful when you have written a complete application. Just compile 3725very useful when you have written a complete application. Just compile
@@ -3744,7 +3744,7 @@ many other reasons.
3744@cindex @code{!DIR}, IDL variable 3744@cindex @code{!DIR}, IDL variable
3745Users of Windows and MacOS (not X) also must set the variable 3745Users of Windows and MacOS (not X) also must set the variable
3746@code{idlwave-system-directory} to the value of the @code{!DIR} system 3746@code{idlwave-system-directory} to the value of the @code{!DIR} system
3747variable in IDL. IDLWAVE appends @file{lib} to the value of this 3747variable in IDL@. IDLWAVE appends @file{lib} to the value of this
3748variable and assumes that all files found on that path are system 3748variable and assumes that all files found on that path are system
3749routines. 3749routines.
3750 3750
@@ -3791,7 +3791,7 @@ itself.
3791There are a wide variety of possible browsers to use for displaying 3791There are a wide variety of possible browsers to use for displaying
3792the online HTML help available with IDLWAVE (starting with version 3792the online HTML help available with IDLWAVE (starting with version
37935.0). Since IDL v6.2, a single cross-platform HTML help browser, the 37935.0). Since IDL v6.2, a single cross-platform HTML help browser, the
3794@emph{IDL Assistant} is distributed with IDL. If this help browser is 3794@emph{IDL Assistant} is distributed with IDL@. If this help browser is
3795available, it is the preferred choice, and the default. The variable 3795available, it is the preferred choice, and the default. The variable
3796@code{idlwave-help-use-assistant}, enabled by default, controls 3796@code{idlwave-help-use-assistant}, enabled by default, controls
3797whether this help browser is used. If you use the IDL Assistant, the 3797whether this help browser is used. If you use the IDL Assistant, the
@@ -3879,7 +3879,7 @@ features which:
3879 3879
3880@itemize @minus 3880@itemize @minus
3881@item 3881@item
3882are not self-evident (i.e. too magic) when used by an unsuspecting user. 3882are not self-evident (i.e., too magic) when used by an unsuspecting user.
3883@item 3883@item
3884are too intrusive. 3884are too intrusive.
3885@item 3885@item
@@ -3910,7 +3910,7 @@ the old maintainer had in his @file{.emacs}:
3910 3910
3911However, if you are an Emacs power-user and want IDLWAVE to work 3911However, if you are an Emacs power-user and want IDLWAVE to work
3912completely differently, you can change almost every aspect of it. Here 3912completely differently, you can change almost every aspect of it. Here
3913is an example of a much more extensive configuration of IDLWAVE. The 3913is an example of a much more extensive configuration of IDLWAVE@. The
3914user is King! 3914user is King!
3915 3915
3916@example 3916@example
@@ -4121,7 +4121,7 @@ under MacOSX}
4121 4121
4122If you run Emacs directly as an Aqua application, rather than from the 4122If you run Emacs directly as an Aqua application, rather than from the
4123console shell, the environment is set not from your usual shell 4123console shell, the environment is set not from your usual shell
4124configuration files (e.g. @file{.cshrc}), but from the file 4124configuration files (e.g., @file{.cshrc}), but from the file
4125@file{~/.MacOSX/environment.plist}. Either include your path settings 4125@file{~/.MacOSX/environment.plist}. Either include your path settings
4126there, or start Emacs and IDLWAVE from the shell. 4126there, or start Emacs and IDLWAVE from the shell.
4127 4127
@@ -4136,7 +4136,7 @@ which includes it by default.
4136cl-builtin-gethash} on completion or routine info.} 4136cl-builtin-gethash} on completion or routine info.}
4137 4137
4138This error arises if you upgraded Emacs from 20.x to 21.x without 4138This error arises if you upgraded Emacs from 20.x to 21.x without
4139re-installing IDLWAVE. Old Emacs and new Emacs are not byte-compatible 4139re-installing IDLWAVE@. Old Emacs and new Emacs are not byte-compatible
4140in compiled lisp files. Presumably, you kept the original .elc files in 4140in compiled lisp files. Presumably, you kept the original .elc files in
4141place, and this is the source of the error. If you recompile (or just 4141place, and this is the source of the error. If you recompile (or just
4142"make; make install") from source, it should resolve this problem. 4142"make; make install") from source, it should resolve this problem.
@@ -4190,7 +4190,7 @@ load file}}.
4190 4190
4191The problem is that your Emacs is not finding the version of IDLWAVE you 4191The problem is that your Emacs is not finding the version of IDLWAVE you
4192installed. Many Emacsen come with an older bundled copy of IDLWAVE 4192installed. Many Emacsen come with an older bundled copy of IDLWAVE
4193(e.g. v4.7 for Emacs 21.x), which is likely what's being used instead. 4193(e.g., v4.7 for Emacs 21.x), which is likely what's being used instead.
4194You need to make sure your Emacs @emph{load-path} contains the directory 4194You need to make sure your Emacs @emph{load-path} contains the directory
4195where IDLWAVE is installed (@file{/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp}, by 4195where IDLWAVE is installed (@file{/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp}, by
4196default), @emph{before} Emacs's default search directories. You can 4196default), @emph{before} Emacs's default search directories. You can
@@ -4244,13 +4244,13 @@ displayed as Latin characters!}
4244 4244
4245Unfortunately, the HTMLHelp files RSI provides attempt to switch to 4245Unfortunately, the HTMLHelp files RSI provides attempt to switch to
4246@samp{Symbol} font to display Greek characters, which is not really an 4246@samp{Symbol} font to display Greek characters, which is not really an
4247permitted method for doing this in HTML. There is a "workaround" for 4247permitted method for doing this in HTML@. There is a "workaround" for
4248some browsers: @xref{HTML Help Browser Tips}. 4248some browsers: @xref{HTML Help Browser Tips}.
4249 4249
4250@item @strong{In the shell, my long commands are truncated at 256 characters!} 4250@item @strong{In the shell, my long commands are truncated at 256 characters!}
4251 4251
4252This actually happens when running IDL in an XTerm as well. There are 4252This actually happens when running IDL in an XTerm as well. There are
4253a couple of workarounds: @code{define_key,/control,'^d'} (e.g. in 4253a couple of workarounds: @code{define_key,/control,'^d'} (e.g., in
4254your @file{$IDL_STARTUP} file) will disable the @samp{EOF} character 4254your @file{$IDL_STARTUP} file) will disable the @samp{EOF} character
4255and give you a 512 character limit. You won't be able to use 4255and give you a 512 character limit. You won't be able to use
4256@key{C-d} to quit the shell, however. Another possibility is 4256@key{C-d} to quit the shell, however. Another possibility is
@@ -4259,7 +4259,7 @@ memory-bounded limit), but disables the processing of background
4259widget events (those with @code{/NO_BLOCK} passed to @code{XManager}). 4259widget events (those with @code{/NO_BLOCK} passed to @code{XManager}).
4260 4260
4261@item @strong{When I invoke IDL HTML help on a routine, the page which 4261@item @strong{When I invoke IDL HTML help on a routine, the page which
4262is loaded is one page off, e.g. for @code{CONVERT_COORD}, I get 4262is loaded is one page off, e.g., for @code{CONVERT_COORD}, I get
4263@code{CONTOUR}.} 4263@code{CONTOUR}.}
4264 4264
4265You have a mismatch between your help index and the HTML help package 4265You have a mismatch between your help index and the HTML help package
diff --git a/doc/misc/info.texi b/doc/misc/info.texi
index 8952bfb9122..141b8da5728 100644
--- a/doc/misc/info.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/info.texi
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Started' chapter.
78@end ifinfo 78@end ifinfo
79@end ifnottex 79@end ifnottex
80 80
81@insertcopying 81@insertcopying
82 82
83@menu 83@menu
84* Getting Started:: Getting started using an Info reader. 84* Getting Started:: Getting started using an Info reader.
@@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ links.
264 264
265@format 265@format
266>> If you are in Emacs and have a mouse, and if you already practiced 266>> If you are in Emacs and have a mouse, and if you already practiced
267 typing @kbd{n} to get to the next node, click now with the left 267 typing @kbd{n} to get to the next node, click now with the left
268 mouse button on the @samp{Next} link to do the same ``the mouse way''. 268 mouse button on the @samp{Next} link to do the same ``the mouse way''.
269@end format 269@end format
270 270
@@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ the screen.
324we call ``Backspace or DEL'' in this manual is labeled differently on 324we call ``Backspace or DEL'' in this manual is labeled differently on
325different keyboards. Look for a key which is a little ways above the 325different keyboards. Look for a key which is a little ways above the
326@key{ENTER} or @key{RET} key and which you normally use outside Emacs 326@key{ENTER} or @key{RET} key and which you normally use outside Emacs
327to erase the character before the cursor, i.e.@: the character you 327to erase the character before the cursor, i.e., the character you
328typed last. It might be labeled @samp{Backspace} or @samp{<-} or 328typed last. It might be labeled @samp{Backspace} or @samp{<-} or
329@samp{DEL}, or sometimes @samp{Delete}.} and @kbd{b} commands exist to 329@samp{DEL}, or sometimes @samp{Delete}.} and @kbd{b} commands exist to
330allow you to ``move around'' in a node that does not all fit on the 330allow you to ``move around'' in a node that does not all fit on the
diff --git a/doc/misc/mairix-el.texi b/doc/misc/mairix-el.texi
index 468283ffd93..1e835d44838 100644
--- a/doc/misc/mairix-el.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/mairix-el.texi
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ database.
68 68
69Mairix is a tool for indexing and searching words in locally stored 69Mairix is a tool for indexing and searching words in locally stored
70mail. It was written by Richard Curnow and is licensed under the 70mail. It was written by Richard Curnow and is licensed under the
71GPL. Mairix comes with most popular GNU/Linux distributions, but it also 71GPL@. Mairix comes with most popular GNU/Linux distributions, but it also
72runs under Windows (with cygwin), Mac OS X and Solaris. The homepage can 72runs under Windows (with cygwin), Mac OS X and Solaris. The homepage can
73be found at 73be found at
74@uref{http://www.rpcurnow.force9.co.uk/mairix/index.html} 74@uref{http://www.rpcurnow.force9.co.uk/mairix/index.html}
@@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ modifying `mairix-widget-fields-list'.
246@kindex M-x mairix-widget-search-based-on-article 246@kindex M-x mairix-widget-search-based-on-article
247@findex mairix-widget-search-based-on-article 247@findex mairix-widget-search-based-on-article
248Create a mairix query using graphical widgets, but based on the 248Create a mairix query using graphical widgets, but based on the
249currently displayed article, i.e. the available fields will be filled 249currently displayed article, i.e., the available fields will be filled
250with the current header values. 250with the current header values.
251 251
252@item mairix-search-from-this-article 252@item mairix-search-from-this-article
diff --git a/doc/misc/message.texi b/doc/misc/message.texi
index ef752a96fdc..68e14c9b253 100644
--- a/doc/misc/message.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/message.texi
@@ -163,8 +163,8 @@ header should be. If it does not, it should just return @code{nil}, and
163the normal methods for determining the To header will be used. 163the normal methods for determining the To header will be used.
164 164
165Each list element should be a cons, where the @sc{car} should be the 165Each list element should be a cons, where the @sc{car} should be the
166name of a header (e.g. @code{Cc}) and the @sc{cdr} should be the header 166name of a header (e.g., @code{Cc}) and the @sc{cdr} should be the header
167value (e.g. @samp{larsi@@ifi.uio.no}). All these headers will be 167value (e.g., @samp{larsi@@ifi.uio.no}). All these headers will be
168inserted into the head of the outgoing mail. 168inserted into the head of the outgoing mail.
169 169
170 170
@@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ and very difficult to follow.
407 407
408@end itemize 408@end itemize
409 409
410Gnus honors the MFT header in other's messages (i.e. while following 410Gnus honors the MFT header in other's messages (i.e., while following
411up to someone else's post) and also provides support for generating 411up to someone else's post) and also provides support for generating
412sensible MFT headers for outgoing messages as well. 412sensible MFT headers for outgoing messages as well.
413 413
@@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ modern cryptography, @acronym{S/MIME}, various PKCS standards, OpenSSL and
1041so on. 1041so on.
1042 1042
1043The @acronym{S/MIME} support in Message (and @acronym{MML}) require 1043The @acronym{S/MIME} support in Message (and @acronym{MML}) require
1044OpenSSL. OpenSSL performs the actual @acronym{S/MIME} sign/encrypt 1044OpenSSL@. OpenSSL performs the actual @acronym{S/MIME} sign/encrypt
1045operations. OpenSSL can be found at @uref{http://www.openssl.org/}. 1045operations. OpenSSL can be found at @uref{http://www.openssl.org/}.
1046OpenSSL 0.9.6 and later should work. Version 0.9.5a cannot extract mail 1046OpenSSL 0.9.6 and later should work. Version 0.9.5a cannot extract mail
1047addresses from certificates, and it insert a spurious CR character into 1047addresses from certificates, and it insert a spurious CR character into
@@ -1054,7 +1054,7 @@ To be able to send encrypted mail, a personal certificate is not
1054required. Message (@acronym{MML}) need a certificate for the person to whom you 1054required. Message (@acronym{MML}) need a certificate for the person to whom you
1055wish to communicate with though. You're asked for this when you type 1055wish to communicate with though. You're asked for this when you type
1056@kbd{C-c C-m c s}. Currently there are two ways to retrieve this 1056@kbd{C-c C-m c s}. Currently there are two ways to retrieve this
1057certificate, from a local file or from DNS. If you chose a local 1057certificate, from a local file or from DNS@. If you chose a local
1058file, it need to contain a X.509 certificate in @acronym{PEM} format. 1058file, it need to contain a X.509 certificate in @acronym{PEM} format.
1059If you chose DNS, you're asked for the domain name where the 1059If you chose DNS, you're asked for the domain name where the
1060certificate is stored, the default is a good guess. To my belief, 1060certificate is stored, the default is a good guess. To my belief,
@@ -1091,7 +1091,7 @@ The @file{key+cert.pem} file should be pointed to from the
1091@emph{Note!} Your private key is now stored unencrypted in the file, 1091@emph{Note!} Your private key is now stored unencrypted in the file,
1092so take care in handling it. Storing encrypted keys on the disk are 1092so take care in handling it. Storing encrypted keys on the disk are
1093supported, and Gnus will ask you for a passphrase before invoking 1093supported, and Gnus will ask you for a passphrase before invoking
1094OpenSSL. Read the OpenSSL documentation for how to achieve this. If 1094OpenSSL@. Read the OpenSSL documentation for how to achieve this. If
1095you use unencrypted keys (e.g., if they are on a secure storage, or if 1095you use unencrypted keys (e.g., if they are on a secure storage, or if
1096you are on a secure single user machine) simply press @code{RET} at 1096you are on a secure single user machine) simply press @code{RET} at
1097the passphrase prompt. 1097the passphrase prompt.
@@ -1154,9 +1154,9 @@ your PGP implementation, so we refer to it.
1154If you have imported your old PGP 2.x key into GnuPG, and want to send 1154If you have imported your old PGP 2.x key into GnuPG, and want to send
1155signed and encrypted messages to your fellow PGP 2.x users, you'll 1155signed and encrypted messages to your fellow PGP 2.x users, you'll
1156discover that the receiver cannot understand what you send. One 1156discover that the receiver cannot understand what you send. One
1157solution is to use PGP 2.x instead (e.g.@: if you use @code{pgg}, set 1157solution is to use PGP 2.x instead (e.g., if you use @code{pgg}, set
1158@code{pgg-default-scheme} to @code{pgp}). You could also convince your 1158@code{pgg-default-scheme} to @code{pgp}). You could also convince your
1159fellow PGP 2.x users to convert to GnuPG. 1159fellow PGP 2.x users to convert to GnuPG@.
1160@vindex mml-signencrypt-style-alist 1160@vindex mml-signencrypt-style-alist
1161As a final workaround, you can make the sign and encryption work in 1161As a final workaround, you can make the sign and encryption work in
1162two steps; separately sign, then encrypt a message. If you would like 1162two steps; separately sign, then encrypt a message. If you would like
@@ -1676,7 +1676,7 @@ installation.
1676Most versions of MH doesn't like being fed messages that contain the 1676Most versions of MH doesn't like being fed messages that contain the
1677headers in this variable. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (which is 1677headers in this variable. If this variable is non-@code{nil} (which is
1678the default), these headers will be removed before mailing when sending 1678the default), these headers will be removed before mailing when sending
1679messages via MH. Set it to @code{nil} if your MH can handle these 1679messages via MH@. Set it to @code{nil} if your MH can handle these
1680headers. 1680headers.
1681 1681
1682@item message-qmail-inject-program 1682@item message-qmail-inject-program
@@ -1690,7 +1690,7 @@ Arguments passed to qmail-inject programs.
1690This should be a list of strings, one string for each argument. It 1690This should be a list of strings, one string for each argument. It
1691may also be a function. 1691may also be a function.
1692 1692
1693For e.g., if you wish to set the envelope sender address so that bounces 1693E.g., if you wish to set the envelope sender address so that bounces
1694go to the right place or to deal with listserv's usage of that address, you 1694go to the right place or to deal with listserv's usage of that address, you
1695might set this variable to @code{'("-f" "you@@some.where")}. 1695might set this variable to @code{'("-f" "you@@some.where")}.
1696 1696
@@ -1780,7 +1780,7 @@ This required header will be generated by Message. A unique ID will be
1780created based on the date, time, user name (for the local part) and the 1780created based on the date, time, user name (for the local part) and the
1781domain part. For the domain part, message will look (in this order) at 1781domain part. For the domain part, message will look (in this order) at
1782@code{message-user-fqdn}, @code{system-name}, @code{mail-host-address} 1782@code{message-user-fqdn}, @code{system-name}, @code{mail-host-address}
1783and @code{message-user-mail-address} (i.e. @code{user-mail-address}) 1783and @code{message-user-mail-address} (i.e., @code{user-mail-address})
1784until a probably valid fully qualified domain name (FQDN) was found. 1784until a probably valid fully qualified domain name (FQDN) was found.
1785 1785
1786@item User-Agent 1786@item User-Agent
diff --git a/doc/misc/mh-e.texi b/doc/misc/mh-e.texi
index e419ba05055..06ab93f91c7 100644
--- a/doc/misc/mh-e.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/mh-e.texi
@@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ History of MH-E
206This manual introduces another interface to the MH mail system that is 206This manual introduces another interface to the MH mail system that is
207accessible through the GNU Emacs editor, namely, @emph{MH-E}. MH-E is 207accessible through the GNU Emacs editor, namely, @emph{MH-E}. MH-E is
208easy to use. I don't assume that you know GNU Emacs or even MH at this 208easy to use. I don't assume that you know GNU Emacs or even MH at this
209point, since I didn't know either of them when I discovered MH-E. 209point, since I didn't know either of them when I discovered MH-E@.
210However, MH-E was the tip of the iceberg, and I discovered more and 210However, MH-E was the tip of the iceberg, and I discovered more and
211more niceties about GNU Emacs and MH@. Now I'm fully hooked on both of 211more niceties about GNU Emacs and MH@. Now I'm fully hooked on both of
212them. 212them.
@@ -540,7 +540,7 @@ installing MH-E.
540If the @code{mh-version} command displays @samp{No MH variant 540If the @code{mh-version} command displays @samp{No MH variant
541detected}@footnote{In very old versions of MH-E, you may get the error 541detected}@footnote{In very old versions of MH-E, you may get the error
542message, @samp{Cannot find the commands `inc' and `mhl' and the file 542message, @samp{Cannot find the commands `inc' and `mhl' and the file
543`components'} if MH-E can't find MH. In this case, you need to update 543`components'} if MH-E can't find MH@. In this case, you need to update
544MH-E, and you may need to install MH too. However, newer versions of 544MH-E, and you may need to install MH too. However, newer versions of
545MH-E are better at finding MH if it is on your system.}, then you need 545MH-E are better at finding MH if it is on your system.}, then you need
546to install MH or tell MH-E where to find MH. 546to install MH or tell MH-E where to find MH.
@@ -550,11 +550,11 @@ to install MH or tell MH-E where to find MH.
550@cindex GNU mailutils MH 550@cindex GNU mailutils MH
551 551
552If you don't have MH on your system already, you must install a 552If you don't have MH on your system already, you must install a
553variant of MH. The Debian mh-e package does this for you automatically 553variant of MH@. The Debian mh-e package does this for you automatically
554(@pxref{Getting MH-E}). Most people use 554(@pxref{Getting MH-E}). Most people use
555@uref{http://www.nongnu.org/nmh/, nmh}, but you may be interested in 555@uref{http://www.nongnu.org/nmh/, nmh}, but you may be interested in
556trying out @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/mailutils/, GNU mailutils 556trying out @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/mailutils/, GNU mailutils
557MH}, which supports IMAP. Your GNU/Linux distribution probably has 557MH}, which supports IMAP@. Your GNU/Linux distribution probably has
558packages for both of these. 558packages for both of these.
559 559
560@cindex @command{install-mh} 560@cindex @command{install-mh}
@@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ chapter for a mapping between default key bindings and function
671names.}. When you're done, you'll be able to send, read, and file 671names.}. When you're done, you'll be able to send, read, and file
672mail, which is all that a lot of people ever do. But if you're the 672mail, which is all that a lot of people ever do. But if you're the
673curious or adventurous type, read the rest of the manual to be able to 673curious or adventurous type, read the rest of the manual to be able to
674use all the features of MH-E. I suggest you read this chapter first to 674use all the features of MH-E@. I suggest you read this chapter first to
675get the big picture, and then you can read the manual as you wish. 675get the big picture, and then you can read the manual as you wish.
676 676
677@menu 677@menu
@@ -1572,7 +1572,7 @@ command incorporates your mail and creates a buffer called
1572@samp{+inbox} in MH-Folder mode. The command @kbd{M-x mh-rmail} shows 1572@samp{+inbox} in MH-Folder mode. The command @kbd{M-x mh-rmail} shows
1573you only new mail, not mail you have already read@footnote{If you want 1573you only new mail, not mail you have already read@footnote{If you want
1574to see your old mail as well, use @kbd{F r} to pull all your messages 1574to see your old mail as well, use @kbd{F r} to pull all your messages
1575into MH-E. Or, give a prefix argument to @code{mh-rmail} so it will 1575into MH-E@. Or, give a prefix argument to @code{mh-rmail} so it will
1576prompt you for folder to visit like @kbd{F v} (for example, @kbd{C-u 1576prompt you for folder to visit like @kbd{F v} (for example, @kbd{C-u
1577M-x mh-rmail @key{RET} bob @key{RET}}). @xref{Folders}.}. 1577M-x mh-rmail @key{RET} bob @key{RET}}). @xref{Folders}.}.
1578 1578
@@ -2456,7 +2456,7 @@ that they do not really appear like an attachment at all to the
2456reader. Most of the time, this is desirable, so by default MH-E 2456reader. Most of the time, this is desirable, so by default MH-E
2457suppresses the buttons for inline attachments. On the other hand, you 2457suppresses the buttons for inline attachments. On the other hand, you
2458may receive code or HTML which the sender has added to his message as 2458may receive code or HTML which the sender has added to his message as
2459inline attachments so that you can read them in MH-E. In this case, it 2459inline attachments so that you can read them in MH-E@. In this case, it
2460is useful to see the buttons so that you know you don't have to cut 2460is useful to see the buttons so that you know you don't have to cut
2461and paste the code into a file; you can simply save the attachment. If 2461and paste the code into a file; you can simply save the attachment. If
2462you want to make the buttons visible for inline attachments, you can 2462you want to make the buttons visible for inline attachments, you can
@@ -3222,7 +3222,7 @@ original configuration is displayed.
3222@cindex menu, @samp{Message} 3222@cindex menu, @samp{Message}
3223@cindex using folders 3223@cindex using folders
3224 3224
3225This chapter discusses the things you can do with folders within MH-E. 3225This chapter discusses the things you can do with folders within MH-E@.
3226The commands in this chapter are also found in the @samp{Folder} and 3226The commands in this chapter are also found in the @samp{Folder} and
3227@samp{Message} menus. 3227@samp{Message} menus.
3228 3228
@@ -5705,7 +5705,7 @@ buffer and delete the draft message. Use the command @kbd{C-x k}
5705 5705
5706@cindex aliases 5706@cindex aliases
5707 5707
5708MH aliases are used in the same way in MH-E as they are in MH. Any 5708MH aliases are used in the same way in MH-E as they are in MH@. Any
5709alias listed as a recipient will be expanded when the message is sent. 5709alias listed as a recipient will be expanded when the message is sent.
5710This chapter discusses other things you can do with aliases in MH-E. 5710This chapter discusses other things you can do with aliases in MH-E.
5711 5711
@@ -5816,7 +5816,7 @@ Otherwise, you can complete aliases in the header of the draft with
5816 5816
5817@vindex mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag 5817@vindex mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag
5818 5818
5819As MH ignores case in the aliases, so too does MH-E. However, you may 5819As MH ignores case in the aliases, so too does MH-E@. However, you may
5820turn off the option @code{mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag} to 5820turn off the option @code{mh-alias-completion-ignore-case-flag} to
5821make case significant which can be used to segregate completion of 5821make case significant which can be used to segregate completion of
5822your aliases. You might use uppercase for mailing lists and lowercase 5822your aliases. You might use uppercase for mailing lists and lowercase
@@ -8647,7 +8647,7 @@ modify. Note that for them to become accessible, you'll have to load
8647@vtable @code 8647@vtable @code
8648@item gnus-secondary-select-methods 8648@item gnus-secondary-select-methods
8649Select the @samp{nnml} value. This select method uses directories for 8649Select the @samp{nnml} value. This select method uses directories for
8650folders and individual files for messages, just like MH. You do not 8650folders and individual files for messages, just like MH@. You do not
8651have to set an address. 8651have to set an address.
8652@c ------------------------- 8652@c -------------------------
8653@item mail-sources 8653@item mail-sources
@@ -8725,7 +8725,7 @@ positive we won't ask for it.
8725@cindex SourceForge 8725@cindex SourceForge
8726@cindex mailing lists 8726@cindex mailing lists
8727 8727
8728There are several mailing lists for MH-E. They are @i{mh-e-users at 8728There are several mailing lists for MH-E@. They are @i{mh-e-users at
8729lists.sourceforge.net}, @i{mh-e-announce at lists.sourceforge.net}, 8729lists.sourceforge.net}, @i{mh-e-announce at lists.sourceforge.net},
8730and @i{mh-e-devel at lists.sourceforge.net}. You can subscribe or view 8730and @i{mh-e-devel at lists.sourceforge.net}. You can subscribe or view
8731the archives at @uref{https://sourceforge.net/mail/?group_id=13357, 8731the archives at @uref{https://sourceforge.net/mail/?group_id=13357,
@@ -8792,9 +8792,9 @@ instead.
8792After you download and extract the MH-E tarball, read the 8792After you download and extract the MH-E tarball, read the
8793@file{README} file and @file{MH-E-NEWS}. These correspond to the 8793@file{README} file and @file{MH-E-NEWS}. These correspond to the
8794release notes and change log mentioned above. The file @file{README} 8794release notes and change log mentioned above. The file @file{README}
8795contains instructions on installing MH-E. If you're already running 8795contains instructions on installing MH-E@. If you're already running
8796Emacs, please quit that session and start again to load in the new 8796Emacs, please quit that session and start again to load in the new
8797MH-E. Check that you're running the new version with the command 8797MH-E@. Check that you're running the new version with the command
8798@kbd{M-x mh-version}. 8798@kbd{M-x mh-version}.
8799 8799
8800@cindex contributed software 8800@cindex contributed software
@@ -8904,13 +8904,13 @@ limited the use and appeal of the package.
8904@cindex @command{xmh}, in MH-E history 8904@cindex @command{xmh}, in MH-E history
8905 8905
8906In '89, I came to Wisconsin as a professor and decided not to work on 8906In '89, I came to Wisconsin as a professor and decided not to work on
8907MH-E. It was stable, except for minor bugs, and had enough 8907MH-E@. It was stable, except for minor bugs, and had enough
8908functionality, so I let it be for a few years. Stephen Gildea of BBN 8908functionality, so I let it be for a few years. Stephen Gildea of BBN
8909began to pester me about the bugs, but I ignored them. In 1990, he 8909began to pester me about the bugs, but I ignored them. In 1990, he
8910went off to the X Consortium, said good bye, and said that he would 8910went off to the X Consortium, said good bye, and said that he would
8911now be using @command{xmh}. A few months later, he came back and said 8911now be using @command{xmh}. A few months later, he came back and said
8912that he couldn't stand @command{xmh} and could I put a few more bug fixes 8912that he couldn't stand @command{xmh} and could I put a few more bug fixes
8913into MH-E. At that point, I had no interest in fixing MH-E, so I gave 8913into MH-E@. At that point, I had no interest in fixing MH-E, so I gave
8914the responsibility of maintenance to him and he has done a fine job 8914the responsibility of maintenance to him and he has done a fine job
8915since then. 8915since then.
8916 8916
@@ -8931,7 +8931,7 @@ modifications of my own) and dislike having to use applications with
8931embedded editors; they never live up to Emacs. 8931embedded editors; they never live up to Emacs.
8932 8932
8933MH is the mail reader of choice at BBN, so I converted to it. Since I 8933MH is the mail reader of choice at BBN, so I converted to it. Since I
8934didn't want to give up using an Emacs interface, I started using MH-E. 8934didn't want to give up using an Emacs interface, I started using MH-E@.
8935As is my wont, I started hacking on it almost immediately. I first 8935As is my wont, I started hacking on it almost immediately. I first
8936used version 3.4m. One of the first features I added was to treat the 8936used version 3.4m. One of the first features I added was to treat the
8937folder buffer as a file-visiting buffer: you could lock it, save it, 8937folder buffer as a file-visiting buffer: you could lock it, save it,
@@ -8943,7 +8943,7 @@ MH-E was too slow and optimized it a lot. Version, 3.7, distributed
8943with Emacs 18.56 in 1990, was noticeably faster. 8943with Emacs 18.56 in 1990, was noticeably faster.
8944 8944
8945When I moved to the X Consortium I became the first person there to 8945When I moved to the X Consortium I became the first person there to
8946not use xmh. (There is now one other engineer there using MH-E.) About 8946not use xmh. (There is now one other engineer there using MH-E@.) About
8947this point I took over maintenance of MH-E from Jim and was finally 8947this point I took over maintenance of MH-E from Jim and was finally
8948able to add some features Jim hadn't accepted, such as the backward 8948able to add some features Jim hadn't accepted, such as the backward
8949searching undo. My first release was 3.8 (Emacs 18.58) in 1992. 8949searching undo. My first release was 3.8 (Emacs 18.58) in 1992.
diff --git a/doc/misc/newsticker.texi b/doc/misc/newsticker.texi
index 5add229724c..60510f41e71 100644
--- a/doc/misc/newsticker.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/newsticker.texi
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ stop the periodic download, but will call
190@node Configuration 190@node Configuration
191@chapter Configuration 191@chapter Configuration
192 192
193All Newsticker options are customizable, i.e. they can be changed with 193All Newsticker options are customizable, i.e., they can be changed with
194Emacs customization methods. Call the command 194Emacs customization methods. Call the command
195@code{customize-group} and enter @samp{newsticker} for the customization 195@code{customize-group} and enter @samp{newsticker} for the customization
196group. 196group.
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ apply to the plainview reader only.
260 260
261@item 261@item
262@code{newsticker-ticker} contains options that define how headlines 262@code{newsticker-ticker} contains options that define how headlines
263are shown in the echo area, i.e. the ``ticker''. 263are shown in the echo area, i.e., the ``ticker''.
264 264
265@itemize 265@itemize
266@item 266@item
diff --git a/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi b/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi
index c8d159e2363..a0e34b2cf5a 100644
--- a/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ documents.
76To get validation and schema-sensitive editing, you need a RELAX NG Compact 76To get validation and schema-sensitive editing, you need a RELAX NG Compact
77Syntax (RNC) schema for your document (@pxref{Locating a schema}). The 77Syntax (RNC) schema for your document (@pxref{Locating a schema}). The
78@file{etc/schema} directory includes some schemas for popular document 78@file{etc/schema} directory includes some schemas for popular document
79types. See @url{http://relaxng.org/} for more information on RELAX NG. 79types. See @url{http://relaxng.org/} for more information on RELAX NG@.
80You can use the @samp{Trang} program from 80You can use the @samp{Trang} program from
81@url{http://www.thaiopensource.com/relaxng/trang.html} to 81@url{http://www.thaiopensource.com/relaxng/trang.html} to
82automatically create RNC schemas. This program can: 82automatically create RNC schemas. This program can:
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ indicates point):
138@end example 138@end example
139 139
140@noindent 140@noindent
141and the schema is XHTML. In this context, the symbol to be completed 141and the schema is XHTML@. In this context, the symbol to be completed
142is @samp{h}. The possible completions consist of just 142is @samp{h}. The possible completions consist of just
143@samp{head}. Another example, is 143@samp{head}. Another example, is
144 144
@@ -288,7 +288,7 @@ and then following the instructions in the displayed buffer.
288 288
289Emacs has several commands that operate on paragraphs, most 289Emacs has several commands that operate on paragraphs, most
290notably @kbd{M-q}. nXML mode redefines these to work in a way 290notably @kbd{M-q}. nXML mode redefines these to work in a way
291that is useful for XML. The exact rules that are used to find the 291that is useful for XML@. The exact rules that are used to find the
292beginning and end of a paragraph are complicated; they are designed 292beginning and end of a paragraph are complicated; they are designed
293mainly to ensure that @kbd{M-q} does the right thing. 293mainly to ensure that @kbd{M-q} does the right thing.
294 294
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ child element. A section also contains its subordinate sections (its
355subsections). The text content of a section consists of anything in a 355subsections). The text content of a section consists of anything in a
356section that is neither a subsection nor a heading. 356section that is neither a subsection nor a heading.
357 357
358Note that this is a different model from that used by XHTML. 358Note that this is a different model from that used by XHTML@.
359nXML mode's outline support will not be useful for XHTML unless you 359nXML mode's outline support will not be useful for XHTML unless you
360adopt a convention of adding a @code{div} to enclose each 360adopt a convention of adding a @code{div} to enclose each
361section, rather than having sections implicitly delimited by different 361section, rather than having sections implicitly delimited by different
@@ -363,7 +363,7 @@ section, rather than having sections implicitly delimited by different
363in a future version. 363in a future version.
364 364
365The variable @code{nxml-section-element-name-regexp} gives 365The variable @code{nxml-section-element-name-regexp} gives
366a regexp for the local names (i.e. the part of the name following any 366a regexp for the local names (i.e., the part of the name following any
367prefix) of section elements. The variable 367prefix) of section elements. The variable
368@code{nxml-heading-element-name-regexp} gives a regexp for the 368@code{nxml-heading-element-name-regexp} gives a regexp for the
369local names of heading elements. For an element to be recognized 369local names of heading elements. For an element to be recognized
@@ -653,7 +653,7 @@ of any type is used.
653 653
654As usual with XML-related technologies, resources are identified 654As usual with XML-related technologies, resources are identified
655by URIs. The @samp{uri} attribute identifies the schema by 655by URIs. The @samp{uri} attribute identifies the schema by
656specifying the URI. The URI may be relative. If so, it is resolved 656specifying the URI@. The URI may be relative. If so, it is resolved
657relative to the URI of the schema locating file that contains 657relative to the URI of the schema locating file that contains
658attribute. This means that if the value of @samp{uri} attribute 658attribute. This means that if the value of @samp{uri} attribute
659does not contain a @samp{/}, then it will refer to a filename in 659does not contain a @samp{/}, then it will refer to a filename in
@@ -680,13 +680,13 @@ The @samp{pattern} attribute can be used instead of the
680whose URI matches a pattern. The pattern has the same syntax as an 680whose URI matches a pattern. The pattern has the same syntax as an
681absolute or relative URI except that the path component of the URI can 681absolute or relative URI except that the path component of the URI can
682use a @samp{*} character to stand for zero or more characters 682use a @samp{*} character to stand for zero or more characters
683within a path segment (i.e. any character other @samp{/}). 683within a path segment (i.e., any character other @samp{/}).
684Typically, the URI pattern looks like a relative URI, but, whereas a 684Typically, the URI pattern looks like a relative URI, but, whereas a
685relative URI in the @samp{resource} attribute is resolved into a 685relative URI in the @samp{resource} attribute is resolved into a
686particular absolute URI using the base URI of the schema locating 686particular absolute URI using the base URI of the schema locating
687file, a relative URI pattern matches if it matches some number of 687file, a relative URI pattern matches if it matches some number of
688complete path segments of the document's URI ending with the last path 688complete path segments of the document's URI ending with the last path
689segment of the document's URI. For example, 689segment of the document's URI@. For example,
690 690
691@example 691@example
692<uri pattern="*.xsl" uri="xslt.rnc"/> 692<uri pattern="*.xsl" uri="xslt.rnc"/>
@@ -757,7 +757,7 @@ specifies that when the namespace URI of the document is
757Type identifiers allow a level of indirection in locating the 757Type identifiers allow a level of indirection in locating the
758schema for a document. Instead of associating the document directly 758schema for a document. Instead of associating the document directly
759with a schema URI, the document is associated with a type identifier, 759with a schema URI, the document is associated with a type identifier,
760which is in turn associated with a schema URI. nXML mode does not 760which is in turn associated with a schema URI@. nXML mode does not
761constrain the format of type identifiers. They can be simply strings 761constrain the format of type identifiers. They can be simply strings
762without any formal structure or they can be public identifiers or 762without any formal structure or they can be public identifiers or
763URIs. Note that these type identifiers have nothing to do with the 763URIs. Note that these type identifiers have nothing to do with the
@@ -862,12 +862,12 @@ an @samp{applyFollowingRules} to the private file.
862@chapter DTDs 862@chapter DTDs
863 863
864nXML mode is designed to support the creation of standalone XML 864nXML mode is designed to support the creation of standalone XML
865documents that do not depend on a DTD. Although it is common practice 865documents that do not depend on a DTD@. Although it is common practice
866to insert a DOCTYPE declaration referencing an external DTD, this has 866to insert a DOCTYPE declaration referencing an external DTD, this has
867undesirable side-effects. It means that the document is no longer 867undesirable side-effects. It means that the document is no longer
868self-contained. It also means that different XML parsers may interpret 868self-contained. It also means that different XML parsers may interpret
869the document in different ways, since the XML Recommendation does not 869the document in different ways, since the XML Recommendation does not
870require XML parsers to read the DTD. With DTDs, it was impractical to 870require XML parsers to read the DTD@. With DTDs, it was impractical to
871get validation without using an external DTD or reference to an 871get validation without using an external DTD or reference to an
872parameter entity. With RELAX NG and other schema languages, you can 872parameter entity. With RELAX NG and other schema languages, you can
873simultaneously get the benefits of validation and standalone XML 873simultaneously get the benefits of validation and standalone XML
diff --git a/doc/misc/org.texi b/doc/misc/org.texi
index a69dc0fd81f..700dffd26bf 100644
--- a/doc/misc/org.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/org.texi
@@ -478,7 +478,7 @@ Capture - Refile - Archive
478* Capture:: Capturing new stuff 478* Capture:: Capturing new stuff
479* Attachments:: Add files to tasks 479* Attachments:: Add files to tasks
480* RSS Feeds:: Getting input from RSS feeds 480* RSS Feeds:: Getting input from RSS feeds
481* Protocols:: External (e.g.@: Browser) access to Emacs and Org 481* Protocols:: External (e.g., Browser) access to Emacs and Org
482* Refiling notes:: Moving a tree from one place to another 482* Refiling notes:: Moving a tree from one place to another
483* Archiving:: What to do with finished projects 483* Archiving:: What to do with finished projects
484 484
@@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ ends, for example:
838@cindex FAQ 838@cindex FAQ
839There is a website for Org which provides links to the newest 839There is a website for Org which provides links to the newest
840version of Org, as well as additional information, frequently asked 840version of Org, as well as additional information, frequently asked
841questions (FAQ), links to tutorials, etc@. This page is located at 841questions (FAQ), links to tutorials, etc. This page is located at
842@uref{http://orgmode.org}. 842@uref{http://orgmode.org}.
843 843
844@cindex print edition 844@cindex print edition
@@ -996,7 +996,7 @@ packages, please take the time to check the list (@pxref{Conflicts}).
996 996
997The four Org commands @command{org-store-link}, @command{org-capture}, 997The four Org commands @command{org-store-link}, @command{org-capture},
998@command{org-agenda}, and @command{org-iswitchb} should be accessible through 998@command{org-agenda}, and @command{org-iswitchb} should be accessible through
999global keys (i.e.@: anywhere in Emacs, not just in Org buffers). Here are 999global keys (i.e., anywhere in Emacs, not just in Org buffers). Here are
1000suggested bindings for these keys, please modify the keys to your own 1000suggested bindings for these keys, please modify the keys to your own
1001liking. 1001liking.
1002@lisp 1002@lisp
@@ -1324,7 +1324,7 @@ Expose all the headings of the subtree, CONTENT view for just one subtree.
1324@cindex show children, command 1324@cindex show children, command
1325@orgcmd{C-c @key{TAB},show-children} 1325@orgcmd{C-c @key{TAB},show-children}
1326Expose all direct children of the subtree. With a numeric prefix argument N, 1326Expose all direct children of the subtree. With a numeric prefix argument N,
1327expose all children down to level N. 1327expose all children down to level N@.
1328@orgcmd{C-c C-x b,org-tree-to-indirect-buffer} 1328@orgcmd{C-c C-x b,org-tree-to-indirect-buffer}
1329Show the current subtree in an indirect buffer@footnote{The indirect 1329Show the current subtree in an indirect buffer@footnote{The indirect
1330buffer 1330buffer
@@ -1351,7 +1351,7 @@ Copy the @i{visible} text in the region into the kill ring.
1351@cindex @code{showeverything}, STARTUP keyword 1351@cindex @code{showeverything}, STARTUP keyword
1352 1352
1353When Emacs first visits an Org file, the global state is set to 1353When Emacs first visits an Org file, the global state is set to
1354OVERVIEW, i.e.@: only the top level headlines are visible. This can be 1354OVERVIEW, i.e., only the top level headlines are visible. This can be
1355configured through the variable @code{org-startup-folded}, or on a 1355configured through the variable @code{org-startup-folded}, or on a
1356per-file basis by adding one of the following lines anywhere in the 1356per-file basis by adding one of the following lines anywhere in the
1357buffer: 1357buffer:
@@ -1371,7 +1371,7 @@ for this property are @code{folded}, @code{children}, @code{content}, and
1371@code{all}. 1371@code{all}.
1372@table @asis 1372@table @asis
1373@orgcmd{C-u C-u @key{TAB},org-set-startup-visibility} 1373@orgcmd{C-u C-u @key{TAB},org-set-startup-visibility}
1374Switch back to the startup visibility of the buffer, i.e.@: whatever is 1374Switch back to the startup visibility of the buffer, i.e., whatever is
1375requested by startup options and @samp{VISIBILITY} properties in individual 1375requested by startup options and @samp{VISIBILITY} properties in individual
1376entries. 1376entries.
1377@end table 1377@end table
@@ -1440,7 +1440,7 @@ headline@footnote{If you do not want the line to be split, customize the
1440variable @code{org-M-RET-may-split-line}.}. If the command is used at the 1440variable @code{org-M-RET-may-split-line}.}. If the command is used at the
1441beginning of a headline, the new headline is created before the current line. 1441beginning of a headline, the new headline is created before the current line.
1442If at the beginning of any other line, the content of that line is made the 1442If at the beginning of any other line, the content of that line is made the
1443new heading. If the command is used at the end of a folded subtree (i.e.@: 1443new heading. If the command is used at the end of a folded subtree (i.e.,
1444behind the ellipses at the end of a headline), then a headline like the 1444behind the ellipses at the end of a headline), then a headline like the
1445current one will be inserted after the end of the subtree. 1445current one will be inserted after the end of the subtree.
1446@orgcmd{C-@key{RET},org-insert-heading-respect-content} 1446@orgcmd{C-@key{RET},org-insert-heading-respect-content}
@@ -1474,7 +1474,7 @@ level).
1474@orgcmd{M-S-@key{down},org-move-subtree-down} 1474@orgcmd{M-S-@key{down},org-move-subtree-down}
1475Move subtree down (swap with next subtree of same level). 1475Move subtree down (swap with next subtree of same level).
1476@orgcmd{C-c C-x C-w,org-cut-subtree} 1476@orgcmd{C-c C-x C-w,org-cut-subtree}
1477Kill subtree, i.e.@: remove it from buffer but save in kill ring. 1477Kill subtree, i.e., remove it from buffer but save in kill ring.
1478With a numeric prefix argument N, kill N sequential subtrees. 1478With a numeric prefix argument N, kill N sequential subtrees.
1479@orgcmd{C-c C-x M-w,org-copy-subtree} 1479@orgcmd{C-c C-x M-w,org-copy-subtree}
1480Copy subtree to kill ring. With a numeric prefix argument N, copy the N 1480Copy subtree to kill ring. With a numeric prefix argument N, copy the N
@@ -1649,7 +1649,7 @@ a right parenthesis@footnote{You can filter out any of them by configuring
1649@samp{A)} by configuring @code{org-alphabetical-lists}. To minimize 1649@samp{A)} by configuring @code{org-alphabetical-lists}. To minimize
1650confusion with normal text, those are limited to one character only. Beyond 1650confusion with normal text, those are limited to one character only. Beyond
1651that limit, bullets will automatically fallback to numbers.}. If you want a 1651that limit, bullets will automatically fallback to numbers.}. If you want a
1652list to start with a different value (e.g.@: 20), start the text of the item 1652list to start with a different value (e.g., 20), start the text of the item
1653with @code{[@@20]}@footnote{If there's a checkbox in the item, the cookie 1653with @code{[@@20]}@footnote{If there's a checkbox in the item, the cookie
1654must be put @emph{before} the checkbox. If you have activated alphabetical 1654must be put @emph{before} the checkbox. If you have activated alphabetical
1655lists, you can also use counters like @code{[@@b]}.}. Those constructs can 1655lists, you can also use counters like @code{[@@b]}.}. Those constructs can
@@ -1896,7 +1896,7 @@ or on a per-file basis by using
1896Org mode supports the creation of footnotes. In contrast to the 1896Org mode supports the creation of footnotes. In contrast to the
1897@file{footnote.el} package, Org mode's footnotes are designed for work on a 1897@file{footnote.el} package, Org mode's footnotes are designed for work on a
1898larger document, not only for one-off documents like emails. The basic 1898larger document, not only for one-off documents like emails. The basic
1899syntax is similar to the one used by @file{footnote.el}, i.e.@: a footnote is 1899syntax is similar to the one used by @file{footnote.el}, i.e., a footnote is
1900defined in a paragraph that is started by a footnote marker in square 1900defined in a paragraph that is started by a footnote marker in square
1901brackets in column 0, no indentation allowed. If you need a paragraph break 1901brackets in column 0, no indentation allowed. If you need a paragraph break
1902inside a footnote, use the @LaTeX{} idiom @samp{\par}. The footnote reference 1902inside a footnote, use the @LaTeX{} idiom @samp{\par}. The footnote reference
@@ -1973,7 +1973,7 @@ S @r{Short for first @code{r}, then @code{s} action.}
1973n @r{Normalize the footnotes by collecting all definitions (including} 1973n @r{Normalize the footnotes by collecting all definitions (including}
1974 @r{inline definitions) into a special section, and then numbering them} 1974 @r{inline definitions) into a special section, and then numbering them}
1975 @r{in sequence. The references will then also be numbers. This is} 1975 @r{in sequence. The references will then also be numbers. This is}
1976 @r{meant to be the final step before finishing a document (e.g.@: sending} 1976 @r{meant to be the final step before finishing a document (e.g., sending}
1977 @r{off an email). The exporters do this automatically, and so could} 1977 @r{off an email). The exporters do this automatically, and so could}
1978 @r{something like @code{message-send-hook}.} 1978 @r{something like @code{message-send-hook}.}
1979d @r{Delete the footnote at point, and all definitions of and references} 1979d @r{Delete the footnote at point, and all definitions of and references}
@@ -2044,7 +2044,7 @@ calculations are supported using the Emacs @file{calc} package
2044@section The built-in table editor 2044@section The built-in table editor
2045@cindex table editor, built-in 2045@cindex table editor, built-in
2046 2046
2047Org makes it easy to format tables in plain ASCII. Any line with @samp{|} as 2047Org makes it easy to format tables in plain ASCII@. Any line with @samp{|} as
2048the first non-whitespace character is considered part of a table. @samp{|} 2048the first non-whitespace character is considered part of a table. @samp{|}
2049is also the column separator@footnote{To insert a vertical bar into a table 2049is also the column separator@footnote{To insert a vertical bar into a table
2050field, use @code{\vert} or, inside a word @code{abc\vert@{@}def}.}. A table 2050field, use @code{\vert} or, inside a word @code{abc\vert@{@}def}.}. A table
@@ -2429,7 +2429,7 @@ representation that looks like this:
2429@end example 2429@end example
2430 2430
2431Column specifications can be absolute like @code{$1}, 2431Column specifications can be absolute like @code{$1},
2432@code{$2},...@code{$@var{N}}, or relative to the current column (i.e.@: the 2432@code{$2},...@code{$@var{N}}, or relative to the current column (i.e., the
2433column of the field which is being computed) like @code{$+1} or @code{$-2}. 2433column of the field which is being computed) like @code{$+1} or @code{$-2}.
2434@code{$<} and @code{$>} are immutable references to the first and last 2434@code{$<} and @code{$>} are immutable references to the first and last
2435column, respectively, and you can use @code{$>>>} to indicate the third 2435column, respectively, and you can use @code{$>>>} to indicate the third
@@ -2445,13 +2445,13 @@ a stable way to the 5th and 12th field in the last row of the table.
2445However, this syntax is deprecated, it should not be used for new documents. 2445However, this syntax is deprecated, it should not be used for new documents.
2446Use @code{@@>$} instead.} row in the table, respectively. You may also 2446Use @code{@@>$} instead.} row in the table, respectively. You may also
2447specify the row relative to one of the hlines: @code{@@I} refers to the first 2447specify the row relative to one of the hlines: @code{@@I} refers to the first
2448hline, @code{@@II} to the second, etc@. @code{@@-I} refers to the first such 2448hline, @code{@@II} to the second, etc. @code{@@-I} refers to the first such
2449line above the current line, @code{@@+I} to the first such line below the 2449line above the current line, @code{@@+I} to the first such line below the
2450current line. You can also write @code{@@III+2} which is the second data line 2450current line. You can also write @code{@@III+2} which is the second data line
2451after the third hline in the table. 2451after the third hline in the table.
2452 2452
2453@code{@@0} and @code{$0} refer to the current row and column, respectively, 2453@code{@@0} and @code{$0} refer to the current row and column, respectively,
2454i.e. to the row/column for the field being computed. Also, if you omit 2454i.e., to the row/column for the field being computed. Also, if you omit
2455either the column or the row part of the reference, the current row/column is 2455either the column or the row part of the reference, the current row/column is
2456implied. 2456implied.
2457 2457
@@ -2810,7 +2810,7 @@ following command:
2810Install a new formula for the current column and replace current field with 2810Install a new formula for the current column and replace current field with
2811the result of the formula. The command prompts for a formula, with default 2811the result of the formula. The command prompts for a formula, with default
2812taken from the @samp{#+TBLFM} line, applies it to the current field and 2812taken from the @samp{#+TBLFM} line, applies it to the current field and
2813stores it. With a numeric prefix argument(e.g.@: @kbd{C-5 C-c =}) the command 2813stores it. With a numeric prefix argument(e.g., @kbd{C-5 C-c =}) the command
2814will apply it to that many consecutive fields in the current column. 2814will apply it to that many consecutive fields in the current column.
2815@end table 2815@end table
2816 2816
@@ -3115,7 +3115,7 @@ Specify whether the plot will be @code{2d}, @code{3d}, or @code{grid}.
3115 3115
3116@item with 3116@item with
3117Specify a @code{with} option to be inserted for every col being plotted 3117Specify a @code{with} option to be inserted for every col being plotted
3118(e.g.@: @code{lines}, @code{points}, @code{boxes}, @code{impulses}, etc...). 3118(e.g., @code{lines}, @code{points}, @code{boxes}, @code{impulses}, etc...).
3119Defaults to @code{lines}. 3119Defaults to @code{lines}.
3120 3120
3121@item file 3121@item file
@@ -3519,7 +3519,7 @@ variable @code{org-display-internal-link-with-indirect-buffer}}.
3519@cindex @code{inlineimages}, STARTUP keyword 3519@cindex @code{inlineimages}, STARTUP keyword
3520@cindex @code{noinlineimages}, STARTUP keyword 3520@cindex @code{noinlineimages}, STARTUP keyword
3521Toggle the inline display of linked images. Normally this will only inline 3521Toggle the inline display of linked images. Normally this will only inline
3522images that have no description part in the link, i.e.@: images that will also 3522images that have no description part in the link, i.e., images that will also
3523be inlined during export. When called with a prefix argument, also display 3523be inlined during export. When called with a prefix argument, also display
3524images that do have a link description. You can ask for inline images to be 3524images that do have a link description. You can ask for inline images to be
3525displayed at startup by configuring the variable 3525displayed at startup by configuring the variable
@@ -3629,7 +3629,7 @@ can define them in the file with
3629@noindent 3629@noindent
3630In-buffer completion (@pxref{Completion}) can be used after @samp{[} to 3630In-buffer completion (@pxref{Completion}) can be used after @samp{[} to
3631complete link abbreviations. You may also define a function 3631complete link abbreviations. You may also define a function
3632@code{org-PREFIX-complete-link} that implements special (e.g.@: completion) 3632@code{org-PREFIX-complete-link} that implements special (e.g., completion)
3633support for inserting such a link with @kbd{C-c C-l}. Such a function should 3633support for inserting such a link with @kbd{C-c C-l}. Such a function should
3634not accept any arguments, and return the full link with prefix. 3634not accept any arguments, and return the full link with prefix.
3635 3635
@@ -3781,7 +3781,7 @@ with @code{shift-selection-mode}. See also the variable
3781View TODO items in a @emph{sparse tree} (@pxref{Sparse trees}). Folds the 3781View TODO items in a @emph{sparse tree} (@pxref{Sparse trees}). Folds the
3782entire buffer, but shows all TODO items (with not-DONE state) and the 3782entire buffer, but shows all TODO items (with not-DONE state) and the
3783headings hierarchy above them. With a prefix argument (or by using @kbd{C-c 3783headings hierarchy above them. With a prefix argument (or by using @kbd{C-c
3784/ T}), search for a specific TODO. You will be prompted for the keyword, and 3784/ T}), search for a specific TODO@. You will be prompted for the keyword, and
3785you can also give a list of keywords like @code{KWD1|KWD2|...} to list 3785you can also give a list of keywords like @code{KWD1|KWD2|...} to list
3786entries that match any one of these keywords. With a numeric prefix argument 3786entries that match any one of these keywords. With a numeric prefix argument
3787N, show the tree for the Nth keyword in the variable 3787N, show the tree for the Nth keyword in the variable
@@ -3808,7 +3808,7 @@ option @code{org-todo-state-tags-triggers} for details.
3808 3808
3809@vindex org-todo-keywords 3809@vindex org-todo-keywords
3810By default, marked TODO entries have one of only two states: TODO and 3810By default, marked TODO entries have one of only two states: TODO and
3811DONE. Org mode allows you to classify TODO items in more complex ways 3811DONE@. Org mode allows you to classify TODO items in more complex ways
3812with @emph{TODO keywords} (stored in @code{org-todo-keywords}). With 3812with @emph{TODO keywords} (stored in @code{org-todo-keywords}). With
3813special setup, the TODO keyword system can work differently in different 3813special setup, the TODO keyword system can work differently in different
3814files. 3814files.
@@ -3847,9 +3847,9 @@ you don't provide the separator bar, the last state is used as the DONE
3847state. 3847state.
3848@cindex completion, of TODO keywords 3848@cindex completion, of TODO keywords
3849With this setup, the command @kbd{C-c C-t} will cycle an entry from TODO 3849With this setup, the command @kbd{C-c C-t} will cycle an entry from TODO
3850to FEEDBACK, then to VERIFY, and finally to DONE and DELEGATED. You may 3850to FEEDBACK, then to VERIFY, and finally to DONE and DELEGATED@. You may
3851also use a numeric prefix argument to quickly select a specific state. For 3851also use a numeric prefix argument to quickly select a specific state. For
3852example @kbd{C-3 C-c C-t} will change the state immediately to VERIFY. 3852example @kbd{C-3 C-c C-t} will change the state immediately to VERIFY@.
3853Or you can use @kbd{S-@key{left}} to go backward through the sequence. If you 3853Or you can use @kbd{S-@key{left}} to go backward through the sequence. If you
3854define many keywords, you can use in-buffer completion 3854define many keywords, you can use in-buffer completion
3855(@pxref{Completion}) or even a special one-key selection scheme 3855(@pxref{Completion}) or even a special one-key selection scheme
@@ -3876,13 +3876,13 @@ be set up like this:
3876 3876
3877In this case, different keywords do not indicate a sequence, but rather 3877In this case, different keywords do not indicate a sequence, but rather
3878different types. So the normal work flow would be to assign a task to a 3878different types. So the normal work flow would be to assign a task to a
3879person, and later to mark it DONE. Org mode supports this style by adapting 3879person, and later to mark it DONE@. Org mode supports this style by adapting
3880the workings of the command @kbd{C-c C-t}@footnote{This is also true for the 3880the workings of the command @kbd{C-c C-t}@footnote{This is also true for the
3881@kbd{t} command in the timeline and agenda buffers.}. When used several 3881@kbd{t} command in the timeline and agenda buffers.}. When used several
3882times in succession, it will still cycle through all names, in order to first 3882times in succession, it will still cycle through all names, in order to first
3883select the right type for a task. But when you return to the item after some 3883select the right type for a task. But when you return to the item after some
3884time and execute @kbd{C-c C-t} again, it will switch from any name directly 3884time and execute @kbd{C-c C-t} again, it will switch from any name directly
3885to DONE. Use prefix arguments or completion to quickly select a specific 3885to DONE@. Use prefix arguments or completion to quickly select a specific
3886name. You can also review the items of a specific TODO type in a sparse tree 3886name. You can also review the items of a specific TODO type in a sparse tree
3887by using a numeric prefix to @kbd{C-c / t}. For example, to see all things 3887by using a numeric prefix to @kbd{C-c / t}. For example, to see all things
3888Lucy has to do, you would use @kbd{C-3 C-c / t}. To collect Lucy's items 3888Lucy has to do, you would use @kbd{C-3 C-c / t}. To collect Lucy's items
@@ -4047,13 +4047,13 @@ foreground or a background color.
4047@cindex property, ORDERED 4047@cindex property, ORDERED
4048The structure of Org files (hierarchy and lists) makes it easy to define TODO 4048The structure of Org files (hierarchy and lists) makes it easy to define TODO
4049dependencies. Usually, a parent TODO task should not be marked DONE until 4049dependencies. Usually, a parent TODO task should not be marked DONE until
4050all subtasks (defined as children tasks) are marked as DONE. And sometimes 4050all subtasks (defined as children tasks) are marked as DONE@. And sometimes
4051there is a logical sequence to a number of (sub)tasks, so that one task 4051there is a logical sequence to a number of (sub)tasks, so that one task
4052cannot be acted upon before all siblings above it are done. If you customize 4052cannot be acted upon before all siblings above it are done. If you customize
4053the variable @code{org-enforce-todo-dependencies}, Org will block entries 4053the variable @code{org-enforce-todo-dependencies}, Org will block entries
4054from changing state to DONE while they have children that are not DONE. 4054from changing state to DONE while they have children that are not DONE@.
4055Furthermore, if an entry has a property @code{ORDERED}, each of its children 4055Furthermore, if an entry has a property @code{ORDERED}, each of its children
4056will be blocked until all earlier siblings are marked DONE. Here is an 4056will be blocked until all earlier siblings are marked DONE@. Here is an
4057example: 4057example:
4058 4058
4059@example 4059@example
@@ -4194,7 +4194,7 @@ when you are using both @code{org-log-done} and state change logging.
4194However, it will never prompt for two notes---if you have configured 4194However, it will never prompt for two notes---if you have configured
4195both, the state change recording note will take precedence and cancel 4195both, the state change recording note will take precedence and cancel
4196the @samp{Closing Note}.}, and that a note is recorded when switching to 4196the @samp{Closing Note}.}, and that a note is recorded when switching to
4197WAIT or CANCELED. The setting for WAIT is even more special: the 4197WAIT or CANCELED@. The setting for WAIT is even more special: the
4198@samp{!} after the slash means that in addition to the note taken when 4198@samp{!} after the slash means that in addition to the note taken when
4199entering the state, a timestamp should be recorded when @i{leaving} the 4199entering the state, a timestamp should be recorded when @i{leaving} the
4200WAIT state, if and only if the @i{target} state does not configure 4200WAIT state, if and only if the @i{target} state does not configure
@@ -5265,7 +5265,7 @@ values.
5265 5265
5266@noindent 5266@noindent
5267The first column, @samp{%25ITEM}, means the first 25 characters of the 5267The first column, @samp{%25ITEM}, means the first 25 characters of the
5268item itself, i.e.@: of the headline. You probably always should start the 5268item itself, i.e., of the headline. You probably always should start the
5269column definition with the @samp{ITEM} specifier. The other specifiers 5269column definition with the @samp{ITEM} specifier. The other specifiers
5270create columns @samp{Owner} with a list of names as allowed values, for 5270create columns @samp{Owner} with a list of names as allowed values, for
5271@samp{Status} with four different possible values, and for a checkbox 5271@samp{Status} with four different possible values, and for a checkbox
@@ -5666,7 +5666,7 @@ letter ([dwmy]) to indicate change in days, weeks, months, or years. With a
5666single plus or minus, the date is always relative to today. With a 5666single plus or minus, the date is always relative to today. With a
5667double plus or minus, it is relative to the default date. If instead of 5667double plus or minus, it is relative to the default date. If instead of
5668a single letter, you use the abbreviation of day name, the date will be 5668a single letter, you use the abbreviation of day name, the date will be
5669the Nth such day, e.g.@: 5669the Nth such day, e.g.:
5670 5670
5671@example 5671@example
5672+0 @result{} today 5672+0 @result{} today
@@ -5694,7 +5694,7 @@ read the docstring of the variable
5694You can specify a time range by giving start and end times or by giving a 5694You can specify a time range by giving start and end times or by giving a
5695start time and a duration (in HH:MM format). Use one or two dash(es) as the 5695start time and a duration (in HH:MM format). Use one or two dash(es) as the
5696separator in the former case and use '+' as the separator in the latter 5696separator in the former case and use '+' as the separator in the latter
5697case, e.g.@: 5697case, e.g.:
5698 5698
5699@example 5699@example
570011am-1:15pm @result{} 11:00-13:15 570011am-1:15pm @result{} 11:00-13:15
@@ -5807,7 +5807,7 @@ On the deadline date, the task will be listed in the agenda. In
5807addition, the agenda for @emph{today} will carry a warning about the 5807addition, the agenda for @emph{today} will carry a warning about the
5808approaching or missed deadline, starting 5808approaching or missed deadline, starting
5809@code{org-deadline-warning-days} before the due date, and continuing 5809@code{org-deadline-warning-days} before the due date, and continuing
5810until the entry is marked DONE. An example: 5810until the entry is marked DONE@. An example:
5811 5811
5812@example 5812@example
5813*** TODO write article about the Earth for the Guide 5813*** TODO write article about the Earth for the Guide
@@ -5827,10 +5827,10 @@ date.
5827 5827
5828@vindex org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done 5828@vindex org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done
5829The headline will be listed under the given date@footnote{It will still 5829The headline will be listed under the given date@footnote{It will still
5830be listed on that date after it has been marked DONE. If you don't like 5830be listed on that date after it has been marked DONE@. If you don't like
5831this, set the variable @code{org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done}.}. In 5831this, set the variable @code{org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done}.}. In
5832addition, a reminder that the scheduled date has passed will be present 5832addition, a reminder that the scheduled date has passed will be present
5833in the compilation for @emph{today}, until the entry is marked DONE, i.e.@: 5833in the compilation for @emph{today}, until the entry is marked DONE, i.e.,
5834the task will automatically be forwarded until completed. 5834the task will automatically be forwarded until completed.
5835 5835
5836@example 5836@example
@@ -5919,7 +5919,7 @@ Sparse tree for deadlines and scheduled items after a given date.
5919@end table 5919@end table
5920 5920
5921Note that @code{org-schedule} and @code{org-deadline} supports 5921Note that @code{org-schedule} and @code{org-deadline} supports
5922setting the date by indicating a relative time: e.g. +1d will set 5922setting the date by indicating a relative time: e.g., +1d will set
5923the date to the next day after today, and --1w will set the date 5923the date to the next day after today, and --1w will set the date
5924to the previous week before any current timestamp. 5924to the previous week before any current timestamp.
5925 5925
@@ -6488,7 +6488,7 @@ trees to an archive file keeps the system compact and fast.
6488* Capture:: Capturing new stuff 6488* Capture:: Capturing new stuff
6489* Attachments:: Add files to tasks 6489* Attachments:: Add files to tasks
6490* RSS Feeds:: Getting input from RSS feeds 6490* RSS Feeds:: Getting input from RSS feeds
6491* Protocols:: External (e.g.@: Browser) access to Emacs and Org 6491* Protocols:: External (e.g., Browser) access to Emacs and Org
6492* Refiling notes:: Moving a tree from one place to another 6492* Refiling notes:: Moving a tree from one place to another
6493* Archiving:: What to do with finished projects 6493* Archiving:: What to do with finished projects
6494@end menu 6494@end menu
@@ -7676,7 +7676,7 @@ commands}.
7676 7676
7677@cindex Boolean logic, for tag/property searches 7677@cindex Boolean logic, for tag/property searches
7678A search string can use Boolean operators @samp{&} for AND and @samp{|} for 7678A search string can use Boolean operators @samp{&} for AND and @samp{|} for
7679OR. @samp{&} binds more strongly than @samp{|}. Parentheses are currently 7679OR@. @samp{&} binds more strongly than @samp{|}. Parentheses are currently
7680not implemented. Each element in the search is either a tag, a regular 7680not implemented. Each element in the search is either a tag, a regular
7681expression matching tags, or an expression like @code{PROPERTY OPERATOR 7681expression matching tags, or an expression like @code{PROPERTY OPERATOR
7682VALUE} with a comparison operator, accessing a property value. Each element 7682VALUE} with a comparison operator, accessing a property value. Each element
@@ -7712,7 +7712,7 @@ example, the ``property'' @code{TODO} represents the TODO keyword of the
7712entry. Or, the ``property'' @code{LEVEL} represents the level of an entry. 7712entry. Or, the ``property'' @code{LEVEL} represents the level of an entry.
7713So a search @samp{+LEVEL=3+boss-TODO="DONE"} lists all level three headlines 7713So a search @samp{+LEVEL=3+boss-TODO="DONE"} lists all level three headlines
7714that have the tag @samp{boss} and are @emph{not} marked with the TODO keyword 7714that have the tag @samp{boss} and are @emph{not} marked with the TODO keyword
7715DONE. In buffers with @code{org-odd-levels-only} set, @samp{LEVEL} does not 7715DONE@. In buffers with @code{org-odd-levels-only} set, @samp{LEVEL} does not
7716count the number of stars, but @samp{LEVEL=2} will correspond to 3 stars etc. 7716count the number of stars, but @samp{LEVEL=2} will correspond to 3 stars etc.
7717The ITEM special property cannot currently be used in tags/property 7717The ITEM special property cannot currently be used in tags/property
7718searches@footnote{But @pxref{x-agenda-skip-entry-regexp, 7718searches@footnote{But @pxref{x-agenda-skip-entry-regexp,
@@ -7751,7 +7751,7 @@ brackets (like @samp{DEADLINE<="<2008-12-24 18:30>"}), both values are
7751assumed to be date/time specifications in the standard Org way, and the 7751assumed to be date/time specifications in the standard Org way, and the
7752comparison will be done accordingly. Special values that will be recognized 7752comparison will be done accordingly. Special values that will be recognized
7753are @code{"<now>"} for now (including time), and @code{"<today>"}, and 7753are @code{"<now>"} for now (including time), and @code{"<today>"}, and
7754@code{"<tomorrow>"} for these days at 0:00 hours, i.e.@: without a time 7754@code{"<tomorrow>"} for these days at 0:00 hours, i.e., without a time
7755specification. Also strings like @code{"<+5d>"} or @code{"<-2m>"} with units 7755specification. Also strings like @code{"<+5d>"} or @code{"<-2m>"} with units
7756@code{d}, @code{w}, @code{m}, and @code{y} for day, week, month, and year, 7756@code{d}, @code{w}, @code{m}, and @code{y} for day, week, month, and year,
7757respectively, can be used. 7757respectively, can be used.
@@ -7784,7 +7784,7 @@ tags/property part of the search string (which may include several terms
7784connected with @samp{|}) with a @samp{/} and then specify a Boolean 7784connected with @samp{|}) with a @samp{/} and then specify a Boolean
7785expression just for TODO keywords. The syntax is then similar to that for 7785expression just for TODO keywords. The syntax is then similar to that for
7786tags, but should be applied with care: for example, a positive selection on 7786tags, but should be applied with care: for example, a positive selection on
7787several TODO keywords cannot meaningfully be combined with boolean AND. 7787several TODO keywords cannot meaningfully be combined with boolean AND@.
7788However, @emph{negative selection} combined with AND can be meaningful. To 7788However, @emph{negative selection} combined with AND can be meaningful. To
7789make sure that only lines are checked that actually have any TODO keyword 7789make sure that only lines are checked that actually have any TODO keyword
7790(resulting in a speed-up), use @kbd{C-c a M}, or equivalently start the TODO 7790(resulting in a speed-up), use @kbd{C-c a M}, or equivalently start the TODO
@@ -8175,7 +8175,7 @@ always show a table with the clocked times for the timespan and file scope
8175covered by the current agenda view. The initial setting for this mode in new 8175covered by the current agenda view. The initial setting for this mode in new
8176agenda buffers can be set with the variable 8176agenda buffers can be set with the variable
8177@code{org-agenda-start-with-clockreport-mode}. By using a prefix argument 8177@code{org-agenda-start-with-clockreport-mode}. By using a prefix argument
8178when toggling this mode (i.e.@: @kbd{C-u R}), the clock table will not show 8178when toggling this mode (i.e., @kbd{C-u R}), the clock table will not show
8179contributions from entries that are hidden by agenda filtering@footnote{Only 8179contributions from entries that are hidden by agenda filtering@footnote{Only
8180tags filtering will be respected here, effort filtering is ignored.}. See 8180tags filtering will be respected here, effort filtering is ignored.}. See
8181also the variable @code{org-clock-report-include-clocking-task}. 8181also the variable @code{org-clock-report-include-clocking-task}.
@@ -9337,7 +9337,7 @@ switch to the end of the @code{BEGIN} line, to get the lines of the example
9337numbered. If you use a @code{+n} switch, the numbering from the previous 9337numbered. If you use a @code{+n} switch, the numbering from the previous
9338numbered snippet will be continued in the current one. In literal examples, 9338numbered snippet will be continued in the current one. In literal examples,
9339Org will interpret strings like @samp{(ref:name)} as labels, and use them as 9339Org will interpret strings like @samp{(ref:name)} as labels, and use them as
9340targets for special hyperlinks like @code{[[(name)]]} (i.e.@: the reference name 9340targets for special hyperlinks like @code{[[(name)]]} (i.e., the reference name
9341enclosed in single parenthesis). In HTML, hovering the mouse over such a 9341enclosed in single parenthesis). In HTML, hovering the mouse over such a
9342link will remote-highlight the corresponding code line, which is kind of 9342link will remote-highlight the corresponding code line, which is kind of
9343cool. 9343cool.
@@ -9408,7 +9408,7 @@ include your @file{.emacs} file, you could use:
9408#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" src emacs-lisp 9408#+INCLUDE: "~/.emacs" src emacs-lisp
9409@end example 9409@end example
9410@noindent 9410@noindent
9411The optional second and third parameter are the markup (e.g.@: @samp{quote}, 9411The optional second and third parameter are the markup (e.g., @samp{quote},
9412@samp{example}, or @samp{src}), and, if the markup is @samp{src}, the 9412@samp{example}, or @samp{src}), and, if the markup is @samp{src}, the
9413language for formatting the contents. The markup is optional; if it is not 9413language for formatting the contents. The markup is optional; if it is not
9414given, the text will be assumed to be in Org mode format and will be 9414given, the text will be assumed to be in Org mode format and will be
@@ -9866,13 +9866,13 @@ Insert template with export options, see example below.
9866#+AUTHOR: the author (default taken from @code{user-full-name}) 9866#+AUTHOR: the author (default taken from @code{user-full-name})
9867#+DATE: a date, an Org timestamp@footnote{@code{org-export-date-timestamp-format} defines how this timestamp will be exported.}, or a format string for @code{format-time-string} 9867#+DATE: a date, an Org timestamp@footnote{@code{org-export-date-timestamp-format} defines how this timestamp will be exported.}, or a format string for @code{format-time-string}
9868#+EMAIL: his/her email address (default from @code{user-mail-address}) 9868#+EMAIL: his/her email address (default from @code{user-mail-address})
9869#+DESCRIPTION: the page description, e.g.@: for the XHTML meta tag 9869#+DESCRIPTION: the page description, e.g., for the XHTML meta tag
9870#+KEYWORDS: the page keywords, e.g.@: for the XHTML meta tag 9870#+KEYWORDS: the page keywords, e.g., for the XHTML meta tag
9871#+LANGUAGE: language for HTML, e.g.@: @samp{en} (@code{org-export-default-language}) 9871#+LANGUAGE: language for HTML, e.g., @samp{en} (@code{org-export-default-language})
9872#+TEXT: Some descriptive text to be inserted at the beginning. 9872#+TEXT: Some descriptive text to be inserted at the beginning.
9873#+TEXT: Several lines may be given. 9873#+TEXT: Several lines may be given.
9874#+OPTIONS: H:2 num:t toc:t \n:nil @@:t ::t |:t ^:t f:t TeX:t ... 9874#+OPTIONS: H:2 num:t toc:t \n:nil @@:t ::t |:t ^:t f:t TeX:t ...
9875#+BIND: lisp-var lisp-val, e.g.@:: @code{org-export-latex-low-levels itemize} 9875#+BIND: lisp-var lisp-val, e.g., @code{org-export-latex-low-levels itemize}
9876 @r{You need to confirm using these, or configure @code{org-export-allow-BIND}} 9876 @r{You need to confirm using these, or configure @code{org-export-allow-BIND}}
9877#+LINK_UP: the ``up'' link of an exported page 9877#+LINK_UP: the ``up'' link of an exported page
9878#+LINK_HOME: the ``home'' link of an exported page 9878#+LINK_HOME: the ``home'' link of an exported page
@@ -9972,11 +9972,11 @@ separate Emacs process@footnote{To make this behavior the default, customize
9972the variable @code{org-export-run-in-background}.}. 9972the variable @code{org-export-run-in-background}.}.
9973@orgcmd{C-c C-e v,org-export-visible} 9973@orgcmd{C-c C-e v,org-export-visible}
9974Like @kbd{C-c C-e}, but only export the text that is currently visible 9974Like @kbd{C-c C-e}, but only export the text that is currently visible
9975(i.e.@: not hidden by outline visibility). 9975(i.e., not hidden by outline visibility).
9976@orgcmd{C-u C-u C-c C-e,org-export} 9976@orgcmd{C-u C-u C-c C-e,org-export}
9977@vindex org-export-run-in-background 9977@vindex org-export-run-in-background
9978Call the exporter, but reverse the setting of 9978Call the exporter, but reverse the setting of
9979@code{org-export-run-in-background}, i.e.@: request background processing if 9979@code{org-export-run-in-background}, i.e., request background processing if
9980not set, or force processing in the current Emacs process if set. 9980not set, or force processing in the current Emacs process if set.
9981@end table 9981@end table
9982 9982
@@ -9987,7 +9987,7 @@ not set, or force processing in the current Emacs process if set.
9987@cindex UTF-8 export 9987@cindex UTF-8 export
9988 9988
9989ASCII export produces a simple and very readable version of an Org mode 9989ASCII export produces a simple and very readable version of an Org mode
9990file, containing only plain ASCII. Latin-1 and UTF-8 export augment the file 9990file, containing only plain ASCII@. Latin-1 and UTF-8 export augment the file
9991with special characters and symbols available in these encodings. 9991with special characters and symbols available in these encodings.
9992 9992
9993@cindex region, active 9993@cindex region, active
@@ -10179,7 +10179,7 @@ All lines between these markers are exported literally
10179@cindex links, in HTML export 10179@cindex links, in HTML export
10180@cindex internal links, in HTML export 10180@cindex internal links, in HTML export
10181@cindex external links, in HTML export 10181@cindex external links, in HTML export
10182Internal links (@pxref{Internal links}) will continue to work in HTML. This 10182Internal links (@pxref{Internal links}) will continue to work in HTML@. This
10183includes automatic links created by radio targets (@pxref{Radio 10183includes automatic links created by radio targets (@pxref{Radio
10184targets}). Links to external files will still work if the target file is on 10184targets}). Links to external files will still work if the target file is on
10185the same @i{relative} path as the published Org file. Links to other 10185the same @i{relative} path as the published Org file. Links to other
@@ -10919,7 +10919,7 @@ exported DocBook XML files invalid by not quoting DocBook code correctly.
10919@cindex DocBook recursive sections 10919@cindex DocBook recursive sections
10920 10920
10921DocBook exporter exports Org files as articles using the @code{article} 10921DocBook exporter exports Org files as articles using the @code{article}
10922element in DocBook. Recursive sections, i.e.@: @code{section} elements, are 10922element in DocBook. Recursive sections, i.e., @code{section} elements, are
10923used in exported articles. Top level headlines in Org files are exported as 10923used in exported articles. Top level headlines in Org files are exported as
10924top level sections, and lower level headlines are exported as nested 10924top level sections, and lower level headlines are exported as nested
10925sections. The entire structure of Org files will be exported completely, no 10925sections. The entire structure of Org files will be exported completely, no
@@ -11996,7 +11996,7 @@ time.
11996 11996
11997@subsection Export of properties 11997@subsection Export of properties
11998 11998
11999The exporter also takes TODO state information into consideration, i.e.@: if a 11999The exporter also takes TODO state information into consideration, i.e., if a
12000task is marked as done it will have the corresponding attribute in 12000task is marked as done it will have the corresponding attribute in
12001TaskJuggler (@samp{complete 100}). Also it will export any property on a task 12001TaskJuggler (@samp{complete 100}). Also it will export any property on a task
12002resource or resource node which is known to TaskJuggler, such as 12002resource or resource node which is known to TaskJuggler, such as
@@ -12048,7 +12048,7 @@ examples should illustrate this:
12048@subsection Reports 12048@subsection Reports
12049 12049
12050@vindex org-export-taskjuggler-default-reports 12050@vindex org-export-taskjuggler-default-reports
12051TaskJuggler can produce many kinds of reports (e.g.@: gantt chart, resource 12051TaskJuggler can produce many kinds of reports (e.g., gantt chart, resource
12052allocation, etc). The user defines what kind of reports should be generated 12052allocation, etc). The user defines what kind of reports should be generated
12053for a project in the TaskJuggler file. The exporter will automatically insert 12053for a project in the TaskJuggler file. The exporter will automatically insert
12054some default reports in the file. These defaults are defined in 12054some default reports in the file. These defaults are defined in
@@ -12104,7 +12104,7 @@ files in the calendar application. Org mode can export calendar information
12104in the standard iCalendar format. If you also want to have TODO entries 12104in the standard iCalendar format. If you also want to have TODO entries
12105included in the export, configure the variable 12105included in the export, configure the variable
12106@code{org-icalendar-include-todo}. Plain timestamps are exported as VEVENT, 12106@code{org-icalendar-include-todo}. Plain timestamps are exported as VEVENT,
12107and TODO items as VTODO. It will also create events from deadlines that are 12107and TODO items as VTODO@. It will also create events from deadlines that are
12108in non-TODO items. Deadlines and scheduling dates in TODO items will be used 12108in non-TODO items. Deadlines and scheduling dates in TODO items will be used
12109to set the start and due dates for the TODO entry@footnote{See the variables 12109to set the start and due dates for the TODO entry@footnote{See the variables
12110@code{org-icalendar-use-deadline} and @code{org-icalendar-use-scheduled}.}. 12110@code{org-icalendar-use-deadline} and @code{org-icalendar-use-scheduled}.}.
@@ -12208,7 +12208,7 @@ configures one project, and may be in one of the two following forms:
12208 12208
12209@lisp 12209@lisp
12210 ("project-name" :property value :property value ...) 12210 ("project-name" :property value :property value ...)
12211 @r{i.e.@: a well-formed property list with alternating keys and values} 12211 @r{i.e., a well-formed property list with alternating keys and values}
12212@r{or} 12212@r{or}
12213 ("project-name" :components ("project-name" "project-name" ...)) 12213 ("project-name" :components ("project-name" "project-name" ...))
12214 12214
@@ -12452,7 +12452,7 @@ something like @samp{[[file:foo.org][The foo]]} or simply
12452@samp{file:foo.org.} (@pxref{Hyperlinks}). When published, this link 12452@samp{file:foo.org.} (@pxref{Hyperlinks}). When published, this link
12453becomes a link to @file{foo.html}. In this way, you can interlink the 12453becomes a link to @file{foo.html}. In this way, you can interlink the
12454pages of your "org web" project and the links will work as expected when 12454pages of your "org web" project and the links will work as expected when
12455you publish them to HTML. If you also publish the Org source file and want 12455you publish them to HTML@. If you also publish the Org source file and want
12456to link to that, use an @code{http:} link instead of a @code{file:} link, 12456to link to that, use an @code{http:} link instead of a @code{file:} link,
12457because @code{file:} links are converted to link to the corresponding 12457because @code{file:} links are converted to link to the corresponding
12458@file{html} file. 12458@file{html} file.
@@ -12704,7 +12704,7 @@ This may be necessary in particular if files include other files via
12704@cindex source code, working with 12704@cindex source code, working with
12705 12705
12706Source code can be included in Org mode documents using a @samp{src} block, 12706Source code can be included in Org mode documents using a @samp{src} block,
12707e.g.@: 12707e.g.:
12708 12708
12709@example 12709@example
12710#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp 12710#+BEGIN_SRC emacs-lisp
@@ -12852,7 +12852,7 @@ variable @code{org-src-fontify-natively}.
12852It is possible to export the @emph{code} of code blocks, the @emph{results} 12852It is possible to export the @emph{code} of code blocks, the @emph{results}
12853of code block evaluation, @emph{both} the code and the results of code block 12853of code block evaluation, @emph{both} the code and the results of code block
12854evaluation, or @emph{none}. For most languages, the default exports code. 12854evaluation, or @emph{none}. For most languages, the default exports code.
12855However, for some languages (e.g.@: @code{ditaa}) the default exports the 12855However, for some languages (e.g., @code{ditaa}) the default exports the
12856results of code block evaluation. For information on exporting code block 12856results of code block evaluation. For information on exporting code block
12857bodies, see @ref{Literal examples}. 12857bodies, see @ref{Literal examples}.
12858 12858
@@ -13737,7 +13737,7 @@ then not supplying @code{:dir}. Under the surface, @code{:dir} simply sets
13737the value of the Emacs variable @code{default-directory}. 13737the value of the Emacs variable @code{default-directory}.
13738 13738
13739When using @code{:dir}, you should supply a relative path for file output 13739When using @code{:dir}, you should supply a relative path for file output
13740(e.g.@: @code{:file myfile.jpg} or @code{:file results/myfile.jpg}) in which 13740(e.g., @code{:file myfile.jpg} or @code{:file results/myfile.jpg}) in which
13741case that path will be interpreted relative to the default directory. 13741case that path will be interpreted relative to the default directory.
13742 13742
13743In other words, if you want your plot to go into a folder called @file{Work} 13743In other words, if you want your plot to go into a folder called @file{Work}
@@ -14177,7 +14177,7 @@ No column name pre-processing takes place
14177 14177
14178@item @code{yes} 14178@item @code{yes}
14179Column names are removed and reapplied as with @code{nil} even if the table 14179Column names are removed and reapplied as with @code{nil} even if the table
14180does not ``look like'' it has column names (i.e.@: the second row is not an 14180does not ``look like'' it has column names (i.e., the second row is not an
14181hline) 14181hline)
14182@end itemize 14182@end itemize
14183 14183
@@ -14219,7 +14219,7 @@ variable indexing @xref{var, Indexable variable values}.
14219@subsubsection @code{:shebang} 14219@subsubsection @code{:shebang}
14220 14220
14221Setting the @code{:shebang} header argument to a string value 14221Setting the @code{:shebang} header argument to a string value
14222(e.g.@: @code{:shebang "#!/bin/bash"}) causes the string to be inserted as the 14222(e.g., @code{:shebang "#!/bin/bash"}) causes the string to be inserted as the
14223first line of any tangled file holding the code block, and the file 14223first line of any tangled file holding the code block, and the file
14224permissions of the tangled file are set to make it executable. 14224permissions of the tangled file are set to make it executable.
14225 14225
@@ -14604,7 +14604,7 @@ option keyword is already complete, pressing @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} again
14604will insert example settings for this keyword. 14604will insert example settings for this keyword.
14605@item 14605@item
14606In the line after @samp{#+STARTUP: }, complete startup keywords, 14606In the line after @samp{#+STARTUP: }, complete startup keywords,
14607i.e.@: valid keys for this line. 14607i.e., valid keys for this line.
14608@item 14608@item
14609Elsewhere, complete dictionary words using Ispell. 14609Elsewhere, complete dictionary words using Ispell.
14610@end itemize 14610@end itemize
@@ -14657,7 +14657,7 @@ additional details.
14657@vindex org-speed-commands-user 14657@vindex org-speed-commands-user
14658 14658
14659Single keys can be made to execute commands when the cursor is at the 14659Single keys can be made to execute commands when the cursor is at the
14660beginning of a headline, i.e.@: before the first star. Configure the variable 14660beginning of a headline, i.e., before the first star. Configure the variable
14661@code{org-use-speed-commands} to activate this feature. There is a 14661@code{org-use-speed-commands} to activate this feature. There is a
14662pre-defined list of commands, and you can add more such commands using the 14662pre-defined list of commands, and you can add more such commands using the
14663variable @code{org-speed-commands-user}. Speed keys do not only speed up 14663variable @code{org-speed-commands-user}. Speed keys do not only speed up
@@ -14806,7 +14806,7 @@ buffer, most useful for specifying the allowed values of a property.
14806@item #+SETUPFILE: file 14806@item #+SETUPFILE: file
14807This line defines a file that holds more in-buffer setup. Normally this is 14807This line defines a file that holds more in-buffer setup. Normally this is
14808entirely ignored. Only when the buffer is parsed for option-setting lines 14808entirely ignored. Only when the buffer is parsed for option-setting lines
14809(i.e.@: when starting Org mode for a file, when pressing @kbd{C-c C-c} in a 14809(i.e., when starting Org mode for a file, when pressing @kbd{C-c C-c} in a
14810settings line, or when exporting), then the contents of this file are parsed 14810settings line, or when exporting), then the contents of this file are parsed
14811as if they had been included in the buffer. In particular, the file can be 14811as if they had been included in the buffer. In particular, the file can be
14812any other Org mode file with internal setup. You can visit the file the 14812any other Org mode file with internal setup. You can visit the file the
@@ -15168,7 +15168,7 @@ example using the color @code{grey90} on a white background.
15168Things become cleaner still if you skip all the even levels and use only odd 15168Things become cleaner still if you skip all the even levels and use only odd
15169levels 1, 3, 5..., effectively adding two stars to go from one outline level 15169levels 1, 3, 5..., effectively adding two stars to go from one outline level
15170to the next@footnote{When you need to specify a level for a property search 15170to the next@footnote{When you need to specify a level for a property search
15171or refile targets, @samp{LEVEL=2} will correspond to 3 stars, etc@.}. In this 15171or refile targets, @samp{LEVEL=2} will correspond to 3 stars, etc.}. In this
15172way we get the outline view shown at the beginning of this section. In order 15172way we get the outline view shown at the beginning of this section. In order
15173to make the structure editing and export commands handle this convention 15173to make the structure editing and export commands handle this convention
15174correctly, configure the variable @code{org-odd-levels-only}, or set this on 15174correctly, configure the variable @code{org-odd-levels-only}, or set this on
@@ -15259,7 +15259,7 @@ names for natural constants or units. Instead of defining your own
15259constants in the variable @code{org-table-formula-constants}, install 15259constants in the variable @code{org-table-formula-constants}, install
15260the @file{constants} package which defines a large number of constants 15260the @file{constants} package which defines a large number of constants
15261and units, and lets you use unit prefixes like @samp{M} for 15261and units, and lets you use unit prefixes like @samp{M} for
15262@samp{Mega}, etc@. You will need version 2.0 of this package, available 15262@samp{Mega}, etc. You will need version 2.0 of this package, available
15263at @url{http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools}. Org checks for 15263at @url{http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools}. Org checks for
15264the function @code{constants-get}, which has to be autoloaded in your 15264the function @code{constants-get}, which has to be autoloaded in your
15265setup. See the installation instructions in the file 15265setup. See the installation instructions in the file
@@ -15626,7 +15626,7 @@ the link description when the link is later inserted into an Org
15626buffer with @kbd{C-c C-l}. 15626buffer with @kbd{C-c C-l}.
15627 15627
15628When it makes sense for your new link type, you may also define a function 15628When it makes sense for your new link type, you may also define a function
15629@code{org-PREFIX-complete-link} that implements special (e.g.@: completion) 15629@code{org-PREFIX-complete-link} that implements special (e.g., completion)
15630support for inserting such a link with @kbd{C-c C-l}. Such a function should 15630support for inserting such a link with @kbd{C-c C-l}. Such a function should
15631not accept any arguments, and return the full link with prefix. 15631not accept any arguments, and return the full link with prefix.
15632 15632
@@ -15832,9 +15832,9 @@ When you are done, press @kbd{C-c C-c} in the table to get the converted
15832table inserted between the two marker lines. 15832table inserted between the two marker lines.
15833 15833
15834Now let's assume you want to make the table header by hand, because you 15834Now let's assume you want to make the table header by hand, because you
15835want to control how columns are aligned, etc@. In this case we make sure 15835want to control how columns are aligned, etc. In this case we make sure
15836that the table translator skips the first 2 lines of the source 15836that the table translator skips the first 2 lines of the source
15837table, and tell the command to work as a @i{splice}, i.e.@: to not produce 15837table, and tell the command to work as a @i{splice}, i.e., to not produce
15838header and footer commands of the target table: 15838header and footer commands of the target table:
15839 15839
15840@example 15840@example
@@ -15917,7 +15917,7 @@ hands processing over to the generic translator. Here is the entire code:
15917 15917
15918As you can see, the properties passed into the function (variable 15918As you can see, the properties passed into the function (variable
15919@var{PARAMS}) are combined with the ones newly defined in the function 15919@var{PARAMS}) are combined with the ones newly defined in the function
15920(variable @var{PARAMS2}). The ones passed into the function (i.e.@: the 15920(variable @var{PARAMS2}). The ones passed into the function (i.e., the
15921ones set by the @samp{ORGTBL SEND} line) take precedence. So if you 15921ones set by the @samp{ORGTBL SEND} line) take precedence. So if you
15922would like to use the @LaTeX{} translator, but wanted the line endings to 15922would like to use the @LaTeX{} translator, but wanted the line endings to
15923be @samp{\\[2mm]} instead of the default @samp{\\}, you could just 15923be @samp{\\[2mm]} instead of the default @samp{\\}, you could just
@@ -16086,7 +16086,7 @@ using @code{org-agenda-skip-function}.
16086Let's say you want to produce a list of projects that contain a WAITING 16086Let's say you want to produce a list of projects that contain a WAITING
16087tag anywhere in the project tree. Let's further assume that you have 16087tag anywhere in the project tree. Let's further assume that you have
16088marked all tree headings that define a project with the TODO keyword 16088marked all tree headings that define a project with the TODO keyword
16089PROJECT. In this case you would run a TODO search for the keyword 16089PROJECT@. In this case you would run a TODO search for the keyword
16090PROJECT, but skip the match unless there is a WAITING tag anywhere in 16090PROJECT, but skip the match unless there is a WAITING tag anywhere in
16091the subtree belonging to the project line. 16091the subtree belonging to the project line.
16092 16092
@@ -16179,7 +16179,7 @@ line in Emacs batch mode. This extracted information can be sent
16179directly to a printer, or it can be read by a program that does further 16179directly to a printer, or it can be read by a program that does further
16180processing of the data. The first of these commands is the function 16180processing of the data. The first of these commands is the function
16181@code{org-batch-agenda}, that produces an agenda view and sends it as 16181@code{org-batch-agenda}, that produces an agenda view and sends it as
16182ASCII text to STDOUT. The command takes a single string as parameter. 16182ASCII text to STDOUT@. The command takes a single string as parameter.
16183If the string has length 1, it is used as a key to one of the commands 16183If the string has length 1, it is used as a key to one of the commands
16184you have configured in @code{org-agenda-custom-commands}, basically any 16184you have configured in @code{org-agenda-custom-commands}, basically any
16185key you can use after @kbd{C-c a}. For example, to directly print the 16185key you can use after @kbd{C-c a}. For example, to directly print the
@@ -16292,7 +16292,7 @@ If WHICH is nil or `all', get all properties. If WHICH is
16292@vindex org-use-property-inheritance 16292@vindex org-use-property-inheritance
16293@findex org-insert-property-drawer 16293@findex org-insert-property-drawer
16294@defun org-entry-get pom property &optional inherit 16294@defun org-entry-get pom property &optional inherit
16295Get value of PROPERTY for entry at point-or-marker POM. By default, 16295Get value of PROPERTY for entry at point-or-marker POM@. By default,
16296this only looks at properties defined locally in the entry. If INHERIT 16296this only looks at properties defined locally in the entry. If INHERIT
16297is non-nil and the entry does not have the property, then also check 16297is non-nil and the entry does not have the property, then also check
16298higher levels of the hierarchy. If INHERIT is the symbol 16298higher levels of the hierarchy. If INHERIT is the symbol
@@ -16317,7 +16317,7 @@ Insert a property drawer for the current entry. Also
16317@end defun 16317@end defun
16318 16318
16319@defun org-entry-put-multivalued-property pom property &rest values 16319@defun org-entry-put-multivalued-property pom property &rest values
16320Set PROPERTY at point-or-marker POM to VALUES. VALUES should be a list of 16320Set PROPERTY at point-or-marker POM to VALUES@. VALUES should be a list of
16321strings. They will be concatenated, with spaces as separators. 16321strings. They will be concatenated, with spaces as separators.
16322@end defun 16322@end defun
16323 16323
@@ -16374,7 +16374,7 @@ does not need to preserve point. After evaluation, the cursor will be
16374moved to the end of the line (presumably of the headline of the 16374moved to the end of the line (presumably of the headline of the
16375processed entry) and search continues from there. Under some 16375processed entry) and search continues from there. Under some
16376circumstances, this may not produce the wanted results. For example, 16376circumstances, this may not produce the wanted results. For example,
16377if you have removed (e.g.@: archived) the current (sub)tree it could 16377if you have removed (e.g., archived) the current (sub)tree it could
16378mean that the next entry will be skipped entirely. In such cases, you 16378mean that the next entry will be skipped entirely. In such cases, you
16379can specify the position from where search should continue by making 16379can specify the position from where search should continue by making
16380FUNC set the variable `org-map-continue-from' to the desired buffer 16380FUNC set the variable `org-map-continue-from' to the desired buffer
diff --git a/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi b/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi
index 92c309f5e98..993ddc22d43 100644
--- a/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
63@ifnottex 63@ifnottex
64@top PCL-CVS 64@top PCL-CVS
65 65
66This manual describes PCL-CVS, the GNU Emacs front-end to CVS. It 66This manual describes PCL-CVS, the GNU Emacs front-end to CVS@. It
67is nowhere near complete, so you are advised to use @kbd{M-x 67is nowhere near complete, so you are advised to use @kbd{M-x
68customize-group RET pcl-cvs @key{RET}} and to look at the documentation strings 68customize-group RET pcl-cvs @key{RET}} and to look at the documentation strings
69of the various commands and major modes for further information. 69of the various commands and major modes for further information.
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ and cleanups.
202the build and installation procedure. 202the build and installation procedure.
203 203
204@item 204@item
205@email{woods@@weird.com, Greg A.@: Woods} contributed code to implement 205@email{woods@@weird.com, Greg A. Woods} contributed code to implement
206the use of per-file diff buffers, and vendor join diffs with emerge and 206the use of per-file diff buffers, and vendor join diffs with emerge and
207ediff, as well as various and sundry bug fixes and cleanups. 207ediff, as well as various and sundry bug fixes and cleanups.
208 208
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ there would be no new releases of PCL-CVS.
236@cindex Sample session 236@cindex Sample session
237 237
238This document assumes that you know what CVS is, and that you at least 238This document assumes that you know what CVS is, and that you at least
239know the fundamental concepts of CVS. If that is not the case, you 239know the fundamental concepts of CVS@. If that is not the case, you
240should read the CVS documentation. Type @kbd{info -f cvs} or @kbd{man 240should read the CVS documentation. Type @kbd{info -f cvs} or @kbd{man
241cvs}. 241cvs}.
242 242
@@ -476,7 +476,7 @@ This chapter describes all the commands that you can use in PCL-CVS.
476@end iftex 476@end iftex
477@ifnottex 477@ifnottex
478The nodes in this menu contains explanations about all the commands that 478The nodes in this menu contains explanations about all the commands that
479you can use in PCL-CVS. They are grouped together by type. 479you can use in PCL-CVS@. They are grouped together by type.
480@end ifnottex 480@end ifnottex
481 481
482@menu 482@menu
@@ -568,7 +568,7 @@ argument to the command (e.g., by typing
568@cindex Command-line options to CVS 568@cindex Command-line options to CVS
569 569
570This section describes the convention used by nearly all PCL-CVS 570This section describes the convention used by nearly all PCL-CVS
571commands for setting optional flags sent to CVS. A single @kbd{C-u} 571commands for setting optional flags sent to CVS@. A single @kbd{C-u}
572prefix argument is used to cause the command to prompt for flags to be 572prefix argument is used to cause the command to prompt for flags to be
573used for the current invocation of the command only. Two @kbd{C-u} prefix 573used for the current invocation of the command only. Two @kbd{C-u} prefix
574arguments are used to prompt for flags which will be set permanently, for the 574arguments are used to prompt for flags which will be set permanently, for the
@@ -582,7 +582,7 @@ and the file will be added. Subsequent @samp{cvs add}
582commands will use the previously prevailing flags. 582commands will use the previously prevailing flags.
583 583
584As a second example, say you are about to perform a diff and want to see 584As a second example, say you are about to perform a diff and want to see
585the result in unified diff format, i.e. you'd like to pass the flag 585the result in unified diff format, i.e., you'd like to pass the flag
586@samp{-u} to both @samp{cvs diff} and @samp{diff}. You'd also like all 586@samp{-u} to both @samp{cvs diff} and @samp{diff}. You'd also like all
587subsequent diffs to use this flag. You can type @kbd{C-u C-u = -u @key{RET}} 587subsequent diffs to use this flag. You can type @kbd{C-u C-u = -u @key{RET}}
588and the diff will be performed, and the default flags will be set to 588and the diff will be performed, and the default flags will be set to
@@ -789,8 +789,8 @@ risk of error, @kbd{C-c C-c} will ask for confirmation if the set of
789selected files has changed between the first step and the last. You can 789selected files has changed between the first step and the last. You can
790change this last detail with @code{log-edit-confirm}. 790change this last detail with @code{log-edit-confirm}.
791 791
792As for the difference between @kbd{c} (i.e. @code{cvs-mode-commit}) and 792As for the difference between @kbd{c} (i.e., @code{cvs-mode-commit}) and
793@kbd{C} (i.e. @code{cvs-mode-commit-setup}) is that the first gets you 793@kbd{C} (i.e., @code{cvs-mode-commit-setup}) is that the first gets you
794straight to @samp{*cvs-commit*} without erasing it or changing anything 794straight to @samp{*cvs-commit*} without erasing it or changing anything
795to its content, while the second first erases @samp{*cvs-commit*} 795to its content, while the second first erases @samp{*cvs-commit*}
796and tries to initialize it with a sane default (it does that by either 796and tries to initialize it with a sane default (it does that by either
@@ -1391,7 +1391,7 @@ Below is a partial list of currently known problems with PCL-CVS.
1391 1391
1392@table @asis 1392@table @asis
1393@item Unexpected output from CVS 1393@item Unexpected output from CVS
1394Unexpected output from CVS may confuse PCL-CVS. It will create 1394Unexpected output from CVS may confuse PCL-CVS@. It will create
1395warning messages in the @samp{*cvs*} buffer alerting you to any parse errors. 1395warning messages in the @samp{*cvs*} buffer alerting you to any parse errors.
1396If you get these messages, please send a bug report to the email 1396If you get these messages, please send a bug report to the email
1397addresses listed above. Include the contents of the @samp{*cvs*} buffer, the 1397addresses listed above. Include the contents of the @samp{*cvs*} buffer, the
diff --git a/doc/misc/pgg.texi b/doc/misc/pgg.texi
index 5aa9b1eb230..0ea0bbf84d1 100644
--- a/doc/misc/pgg.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/pgg.texi
@@ -89,12 +89,12 @@ PGG requires at least one implementation of privacy guard system.
89This document assumes that you have already obtained and installed them 89This document assumes that you have already obtained and installed them
90and that you are familiar with its basic functions. 90and that you are familiar with its basic functions.
91 91
92By default, PGG uses GnuPG. If you are new to such a system, I 92By default, PGG uses GnuPG@. If you are new to such a system, I
93recommend that you should look over the GNU Privacy Handbook (GPH) 93recommend that you should look over the GNU Privacy Handbook (GPH)
94which is available at @uref{http://www.gnupg.org/documentation/}. 94which is available at @uref{http://www.gnupg.org/documentation/}.
95 95
96When using GnuPG, we recommend the use of the @code{gpg-agent} 96When using GnuPG, we recommend the use of the @code{gpg-agent}
97program, which is distributed with versions 2.0 and later of GnuPG. 97program, which is distributed with versions 2.0 and later of GnuPG@.
98This is a daemon to manage private keys independently from any 98This is a daemon to manage private keys independently from any
99protocol, and provides the most secure way to input and cache your 99protocol, and provides the most secure way to input and cache your
100passphrases (@pxref{Caching passphrase}). By default, PGG will 100passphrases (@pxref{Caching passphrase}). By default, PGG will
diff --git a/doc/misc/rcirc.texi b/doc/misc/rcirc.texi
index ac97db414a4..b72211111a7 100644
--- a/doc/misc/rcirc.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/rcirc.texi
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Since this is so common, you can use @key{TAB} to do nick completion.
167Use the command @kbd{M-x irc} to connect using the defaults. 167Use the command @kbd{M-x irc} to connect using the defaults.
168@xref{Configuration}, if you want to change the defaults. 168@xref{Configuration}, if you want to change the defaults.
169 169
170Use @kbd{C-u M-x irc} if you don't want to use the defaults, eg. if you 170Use @kbd{C-u M-x irc} if you don't want to use the defaults, e.g., if you
171want to connect to a different network, or connect to the same network 171want to connect to a different network, or connect to the same network
172using a different nick. This will prompt you for four things: 172using a different nick. This will prompt you for four things:
173 173
@@ -514,7 +514,7 @@ like @code{rcirc-default-nick}.
514@cindex full name 514@cindex full name
515@cindex real name 515@cindex real name
516@cindex surname 516@cindex surname
517This variable is used to set your ``real name'' on IRC. It defaults 517This variable is used to set your ``real name'' on IRC@. It defaults
518to the name returned by @code{user-full-name}. If you want to hide 518to the name returned by @code{user-full-name}. If you want to hide
519your full name, you might want to set it to some pseudonym. 519your full name, you might want to set it to some pseudonym.
520 520
diff --git a/doc/misc/reftex.texi b/doc/misc/reftex.texi
index 1ffa2473b27..a6339e72de6 100644
--- a/doc/misc/reftex.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/reftex.texi
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ of the Makefile. Basically, you need to change the path specifications
272for Emacs Lisp files and info files. Also, enter the name of your Emacs 272for Emacs Lisp files and info files. Also, enter the name of your Emacs
273executable (usually either @samp{emacs} or @samp{xemacs}). 273executable (usually either @samp{emacs} or @samp{xemacs}).
274 274
275Then, type 275Then, type
276 276
277@example 277@example
278make 278make
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ PostScript or HTML files.
353@RefTeX{} needs to access all files which are part of a multifile 353@RefTeX{} needs to access all files which are part of a multifile
354document, and the BibTeX database files requested by the 354document, and the BibTeX database files requested by the
355@code{\bibliography} command. To find these files, @RefTeX{} will 355@code{\bibliography} command. To find these files, @RefTeX{} will
356require a search path, i.e. a list of directories to check. Normally 356require a search path, i.e., a list of directories to check. Normally
357this list is stored in the environment variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and 357this list is stored in the environment variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and
358@code{BIBINPUTS} which are also used by @RefTeX{}. However, on some 358@code{BIBINPUTS} which are also used by @RefTeX{}. However, on some
359systems these variables do not contain the full search path. If 359systems these variables do not contain the full search path. If
@@ -736,14 +736,14 @@ keymap @code{reftex-toc-map} may be used.
736@cindex Table of contents buffer, recentering 736@cindex Table of contents buffer, recentering
737@kindex C-c - 737@kindex C-c -
738If you call @code{reftex-toc} while the @file{*toc*} buffer already 738If you call @code{reftex-toc} while the @file{*toc*} buffer already
739exists, the cursor will immediately jump to the right place, i.e. the 739exists, the cursor will immediately jump to the right place, i.e., the
740section from which @code{reftex-toc} was called will be highlighted. 740section from which @code{reftex-toc} was called will be highlighted.
741The command @kbd{C-c -} (@code{reftex-toc-recenter}) will only redisplay 741The command @kbd{C-c -} (@code{reftex-toc-recenter}) will only redisplay
742the @file{*toc*} buffer and highlight the correct line without actually 742the @file{*toc*} buffer and highlight the correct line without actually
743selecting the @file{*toc*} window. This can be useful to quickly find 743selecting the @file{*toc*} window. This can be useful to quickly find
744out where in the document you currently are. You can also automate this 744out where in the document you currently are. You can also automate this
745by asking RefTeX to keep track of your current editing position in the 745by asking RefTeX to keep track of your current editing position in the
746TOC. The TOC window will then be updated whenever you stop typing for 746TOC@. The TOC window will then be updated whenever you stop typing for
747more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds. By default this works only 747more than @code{reftex-idle-time} seconds. By default this works only
748with the dedicated @file{*TOC*} frame. But you can also force automatic 748with the dedicated @file{*TOC*} frame. But you can also force automatic
749recentering of the TOC window on the current frame with 749recentering of the TOC window on the current frame with
@@ -894,7 +894,7 @@ start a selection process and finally insert the complete
894 894
895@vindex reftex-ref-macro-prompt 895@vindex reftex-ref-macro-prompt
896First, you can select which reference macro you want to use, 896First, you can select which reference macro you want to use,
897e.g. @samp{\ref} or @samp{\pageref}. Later in the process you have 897e.g., @samp{\ref} or @samp{\pageref}. Later in the process you have
898another chance to make this selection and you can therefore disable this 898another chance to make this selection and you can therefore disable this
899step by customizing @code{reftex-ref-macro-prompt} if you find it too 899step by customizing @code{reftex-ref-macro-prompt} if you find it too
900intrusive. @xref{Reference Styles}. 900intrusive. @xref{Reference Styles}.
@@ -1021,7 +1021,7 @@ Cycle forward through active reference macros. The selected macro is
1021displayed by the @samp{S<...>} indicator in the mode line of the 1021displayed by the @samp{S<...>} indicator in the mode line of the
1022selection buffer. This mechanism comes in handy if you are using 1022selection buffer. This mechanism comes in handy if you are using
1023@LaTeX{} packages like @code{varioref} or @code{fancyref} and want to 1023@LaTeX{} packages like @code{varioref} or @code{fancyref} and want to
1024use the special referencing macros they provide (e.g. @code{\vref} or 1024use the special referencing macros they provide (e.g., @code{\vref} or
1025@code{\fref}) instead of @code{\ref}. 1025@code{\fref}) instead of @code{\ref}.
1026 1026
1027@item V 1027@item V
@@ -1102,7 +1102,7 @@ keymap @code{reftex-select-label-map} may be used.
1102@vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin 1102@vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin
1103 1103
1104@RefTeX{} needs to be aware of the environments which can be referenced 1104@RefTeX{} needs to be aware of the environments which can be referenced
1105with a label (i.e. which carry their own counters). By default, @RefTeX{} 1105with a label (i.e., which carry their own counters). By default, @RefTeX{}
1106recognizes all labeled environments and macros discussed in @cite{The 1106recognizes all labeled environments and macros discussed in @cite{The
1107@LaTeX{} Companion by Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley 1107@LaTeX{} Companion by Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley
11081994.}. These are: 11081994.}. These are:
@@ -1257,7 +1257,7 @@ to be used like this:
1257 1257
1258So we need to tell @RefTeX{} that @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} are new 1258So we need to tell @RefTeX{} that @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} are new
1259labeled environments which define their own label categories. We can 1259labeled environments which define their own label categories. We can
1260either use Lisp to do this (e.g. in @file{.emacs}) or use the custom 1260either use Lisp to do this (e.g., in @file{.emacs}) or use the custom
1261library. With Lisp it would look like this 1261library. With Lisp it would look like this
1262 1262
1263@lisp 1263@lisp
@@ -1712,7 +1712,7 @@ extra step for reference macro selection, you can disable it by
1712customizing @code{reftex-ref-macro-prompt} and relying only on the 1712customizing @code{reftex-ref-macro-prompt} and relying only on the
1713selection facilities provided in the last step. 1713selection facilities provided in the last step.
1714 1714
1715In the last step, i.e. the label selection, two key bindings are 1715In the last step, i.e., the label selection, two key bindings are
1716provided to set the reference macro. Type @key{v} in order to cycle 1716provided to set the reference macro. Type @key{v} in order to cycle
1717forward through the list of available macros or @key{V} to cycle 1717forward through the list of available macros or @key{V} to cycle
1718backward. The mode line of the selection buffer shows the macro 1718backward. The mode line of the selection buffer shows the macro
@@ -1723,11 +1723,11 @@ through them you should adapt the order of entries in the variable
1723@code{reftex-ref-style-alist} to fit your liking. 1723@code{reftex-ref-style-alist} to fit your liking.
1724 1724
1725For each entry in @code{reftex-ref-style-alist} a function with the name 1725For each entry in @code{reftex-ref-style-alist} a function with the name
1726@code{reftex-<package>-<macro>} (e.g. @code{reftex-varioref-vref}) will 1726@code{reftex-<package>-<macro>} (e.g., @code{reftex-varioref-vref}) will
1727be created automatically by @RefTeX{}. These functions can be used 1727be created automatically by @RefTeX{}. These functions can be used
1728instead of @kbd{C-c )} and provide an alternative way of having your 1728instead of @kbd{C-c )} and provide an alternative way of having your
1729favorite referencing macro preselected and if cycling through the macros 1729favorite referencing macro preselected and if cycling through the macros
1730seems inconvenient to you.@footnote{You could e.g. bind 1730seems inconvenient to you.@footnote{You could, e.g., bind
1731@code{reftex-varioref-vref} to @kbd{C-c v} and 1731@code{reftex-varioref-vref} to @kbd{C-c v} and
1732@code{reftex-fancyref-fref} to @kbd{C-c f}.} 1732@code{reftex-fancyref-fref} to @kbd{C-c f}.}
1733 1733
@@ -3059,7 +3059,7 @@ Specify the full search path directly in @RefTeX{}'s variables.
3059 3059
3060@item 3060@item
3061Some @TeX{} systems provide stand-alone programs to do the file search just 3061Some @TeX{} systems provide stand-alone programs to do the file search just
3062like @TeX{} and @BibTeX{}. E.g. Thomas Esser's @code{teTeX} uses the 3062like @TeX{} and @BibTeX{}. E.g., Thomas Esser's @code{teTeX} uses the
3063@code{kpathsearch} library which provides the command @code{kpsewhich} 3063@code{kpathsearch} library which provides the command @code{kpsewhich}
3064to search for files. @RefTeX{} can be configured to use this 3064to search for files. @RefTeX{} can be configured to use this
3065program. Note that the exact syntax of the @code{kpsewhich} 3065program. Note that the exact syntax of the @code{kpsewhich}
@@ -3353,7 +3353,7 @@ association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage}
3353commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for 3353commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for
3354@RefTeX{} in such a style file is useful when the @LaTeX{} style 3354@RefTeX{} in such a style file is useful when the @LaTeX{} style
3355defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the 3355defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the
3356index. Many style files (e.g. @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) 3356index. Many style files (e.g., @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el})
3357distributed with @AUCTeX{} already support @RefTeX{} in this 3357distributed with @AUCTeX{} already support @RefTeX{} in this
3358way. 3358way.
3359 3359
@@ -3541,7 +3541,7 @@ document. @xref{AUCTeX}.
3541@cindex @code{iso-cvt}, Emacs package 3541@cindex @code{iso-cvt}, Emacs package
3542@cindex Emacs packages, @code{iso-cvt} 3542@cindex Emacs packages, @code{iso-cvt}
3543When using packages which make the buffer representation of a file 3543When using packages which make the buffer representation of a file
3544different from its disk representation (e.g. x-symbol, isotex, 3544different from its disk representation (e.g., x-symbol, isotex,
3545iso-cvt) you may find that @RefTeX{}'s parsing information sometimes 3545iso-cvt) you may find that @RefTeX{}'s parsing information sometimes
3546reflects the disk state of a file. This happens only in @emph{unvisited} 3546reflects the disk state of a file. This happens only in @emph{unvisited}
3547parts of a multifile document, because @RefTeX{} visits these files 3547parts of a multifile document, because @RefTeX{} visits these files
@@ -3555,7 +3555,7 @@ this:
3555@vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers 3555@vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers
3556@code{(setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers t)}@* 3556@code{(setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers t)}@*
3557This implies that @RefTeX{} will load all parts of a multifile 3557This implies that @RefTeX{} will load all parts of a multifile
3558document into Emacs (i.e. there won't be any temporary buffers). 3558document into Emacs (i.e., there won't be any temporary buffers).
3559@item 3559@item
3560@vindex reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers 3560@vindex reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers
3561@code{(setq reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers t)}@* 3561@code{(setq reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers t)}@*
@@ -3573,7 +3573,7 @@ See also the variable @code{reftex-refontify-context}.
3573@cindex @code{pf}, LaTeX package 3573@cindex @code{pf}, LaTeX package
3574@cindex LaTeX packages, @code{pf} 3574@cindex LaTeX packages, @code{pf}
3575Some packages use an additional argument to a @code{\begin} macro 3575Some packages use an additional argument to a @code{\begin} macro
3576to specify a label. E.g. Lamport's @file{pf.sty} uses both 3576to specify a label. E.g., Lamport's @file{pf.sty} uses both
3577@example 3577@example
3578\step@{@var{label}@}@{@var{claim}@} and \begin@{step+@}@{@var{label}@} 3578\step@{@var{label}@}@{@var{claim}@} and \begin@{step+@}@{@var{label}@}
3579 @var{claim} 3579 @var{claim}
@@ -3932,7 +3932,7 @@ commands always select the nearest entry with the correct new level.
3932@end defopt 3932@end defopt
3933 3933
3934@defopt reftex-toc-max-level 3934@defopt reftex-toc-max-level
3935The maximum level of toc entries which will be included in the TOC. 3935The maximum level of toc entries which will be included in the TOC@.
3936Section headings with a bigger level will be ignored. In RefTeX, 3936Section headings with a bigger level will be ignored. In RefTeX,
3937chapters are level 1, sections level 2 etc. This variable can be 3937chapters are level 1, sections level 2 etc. This variable can be
3938changed from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{t} key. 3938changed from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{t} key.
@@ -4138,7 +4138,7 @@ If an integer, use the nth argument of the macro. As a special case,
41381000 means to get text after the last macro argument. 41381000 means to get text after the last macro argument.
4139@item 4139@item
4140If a string, use as regexp to search @emph{backward} from the label. 4140If a string, use as regexp to search @emph{backward} from the label.
4141Context is then the text following the end of the match. E.g. setting 4141Context is then the text following the end of the match. E.g., setting
4142this to @samp{\\caption[[@{]} will use the caption in a figure or table 4142this to @samp{\\caption[[@{]} will use the caption in a figure or table
4143environment. @samp{\\begin@{eqnarray@}\|\\\\} works for 4143environment. @samp{\\begin@{eqnarray@}\|\\\\} works for
4144eqnarrays. 4144eqnarrays.
@@ -4166,7 +4166,7 @@ context:
4166Label context is used in two ways by @RefTeX{}: For display in the label 4166Label context is used in two ways by @RefTeX{}: For display in the label
4167menu, and to derive a label string. If you want to use a different 4167menu, and to derive a label string. If you want to use a different
4168method for each of these, specify them as a dotted pair. 4168method for each of these, specify them as a dotted pair.
4169E.g. @code{(nil . t)} uses the text after the label (@code{nil}) for 4169E.g., @code{(nil . t)} uses the text after the label (@code{nil}) for
4170display, and text from the default position (@code{t}) to derive a label 4170display, and text from the default position (@code{t}) to derive a label
4171string. This is actually used for section labels. 4171string. This is actually used for section labels.
4172 4172
@@ -4237,13 +4237,13 @@ Possible values for this option are:
4237t @r{This means to trust any label prefixes found.} 4237t @r{This means to trust any label prefixes found.}
4238regexp @r{If a regexp, only prefixes matched by the regexp are trusted.} 4238regexp @r{If a regexp, only prefixes matched by the regexp are trusted.}
4239list @r{List of accepted prefixes, as strings. The colon is part of} 4239list @r{List of accepted prefixes, as strings. The colon is part of}
4240 @r{the prefix, e.g. ("fn:" "eqn:" "item:").} 4240 @r{the prefix, e.g., ("fn:" "eqn:" "item:").}
4241nil @r{Never trust a label prefix.} 4241nil @r{Never trust a label prefix.}
4242@end example 4242@end example
4243The only disadvantage of using this feature is that the label context 4243The only disadvantage of using this feature is that the label context
4244displayed in the label selection buffer along with each label is 4244displayed in the label selection buffer along with each label is
4245simply some text after the label definition. This is no problem if you 4245simply some text after the label definition. This is no problem if you
4246place labels keeping this in mind (e.g. @i{before} the equation, @i{at 4246place labels keeping this in mind (e.g., @i{before} the equation, @i{at
4247the beginning} of a fig/tab caption ...). Anyway, it is probably best 4247the beginning} of a fig/tab caption ...). Anyway, it is probably best
4248to use the regexp or the list value types to fine-tune this feature. 4248to use the regexp or the list value types to fine-tune this feature.
4249For example, if your document contains thousands of footnotes with 4249For example, if your document contains thousands of footnotes with
@@ -4446,7 +4446,7 @@ Controls if @code{reftex-reference} prompts for the reference macro.
4446If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to 4446If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to
4447insert as a reference. Note that the insertion format can also be 4447insert as a reference. Note that the insertion format can also be
4448changed with @code{reftex-label-alist}. This hook also is used by the 4448changed with @code{reftex-label-alist}. This hook also is used by the
4449special commands to insert e.g. @code{\vref} and @code{\fref} 4449special commands to insert, e.g., @code{\vref} and @code{\fref}
4450references, so even if you set this, your setting will be ignored by the 4450references, so even if you set this, your setting will be ignored by the
4451special commands. The function will be called with three arguments, the 4451special commands. The function will be called with three arguments, the
4452@var{label}, the @var{default format} which normally is 4452@var{label}, the @var{default format} which normally is
@@ -4760,7 +4760,7 @@ The default can be selected with @key{RET} during selection or
4760completion. Valid values of this variable are: 4760completion. Valid values of this variable are:
4761@example 4761@example
4762nil @r{Do not provide a default index} 4762nil @r{Do not provide a default index}
4763"tag" @r{The default index tag given as a string, e.g. "idx"} 4763"tag" @r{The default index tag given as a string, e.g., "idx"}
4764last @r{The last used index tag will be offered as default} 4764last @r{The last used index tag will be offered as default}
4765@end example 4765@end example
4766@end defopt 4766@end defopt
@@ -4770,7 +4770,7 @@ Format of index entries when copied from inside math mode. When
4770@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} is executed inside @TeX{} math mode, 4770@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} is executed inside @TeX{} math mode,
4771the index key copied from the buffer is processed with this format 4771the index key copied from the buffer is processed with this format
4772string through the @code{format} function. This can be used to add the 4772string through the @code{format} function. This can be used to add the
4773math delimiters (e.g. @samp{$}) to the string. Requires the 4773math delimiters (e.g., @samp{$}) to the string. Requires the
4774@file{texmathp.el} library which is part of @AUCTeX{}. 4774@file{texmathp.el} library which is part of @AUCTeX{}.
4775@end defopt 4775@end defopt
4776 4776
@@ -5170,7 +5170,7 @@ Never refontify.
5170@item t 5170@item t
5171Always refontify. 5171Always refontify.
5172@item 1 5172@item 1
5173Refontify when necessary, e.g. with old versions of the x-symbol 5173Refontify when necessary, e.g., with old versions of the x-symbol
5174package. 5174package.
5175@end table 5175@end table
5176The option is ignored when @code{reftex-use-fonts} is @code{nil}. 5176The option is ignored when @code{reftex-use-fonts} is @code{nil}.
@@ -5418,7 +5418,7 @@ the TOC buffer promote/demote the section at point or all sections in
5418the current region. 5418the current region.
5419@item 5419@item
5420New option @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-fraction} to set the size of 5420New option @code{reftex-toc-split-windows-fraction} to set the size of
5421the window used by the TOC. This makes the old variable 5421the window used by the TOC@. This makes the old variable
5422@code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction} obsolete. 5422@code{reftex-toc-split-windows-horizontally-fraction} obsolete.
5423@item 5423@item
5424A dedicated frame can show the TOC with the current section 5424A dedicated frame can show the TOC with the current section
@@ -5812,7 +5812,7 @@ Fixed bug with AUCTeX @code{TeX-master}.
5812@itemize @bullet 5812@itemize @bullet
5813@item 5813@item
5814The selection now uses a recursive edit, much like minibuffer input. 5814The selection now uses a recursive edit, much like minibuffer input.
5815This removes all restrictions during selection. E.g. you can now 5815This removes all restrictions during selection. E.g., you can now
5816switch buffers at will, use the mouse etc. 5816switch buffers at will, use the mouse etc.
5817@item 5817@item
5818New option @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. 5818New option @code{reftex-highlight-selection}.
@@ -5888,7 +5888,7 @@ When no BibTeX database files are specified, citations can also use
5888@noindent @b{Version 3.11} 5888@noindent @b{Version 3.11}
5889@itemize @bullet 5889@itemize @bullet
5890@item 5890@item
5891Fixed bug which led to naked label in (e.g.) footnotes. 5891Fixed bug which led to naked label in (e.g.@:) footnotes.
5892@item 5892@item
5893Added scroll-other-window functions to RefTeX-Select. 5893Added scroll-other-window functions to RefTeX-Select.
5894@end itemize 5894@end itemize
diff --git a/doc/misc/remember.texi b/doc/misc/remember.texi
index 1dd7d1b6153..f97d835e50c 100644
--- a/doc/misc/remember.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/remember.texi
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ There are many different databases out there---and good ones---which
100this mode is not trying to replace. Rather, it's how that data gets 100this mode is not trying to replace. Rather, it's how that data gets
101there that's the question. Most of the time, we just want to say 101there that's the question. Most of the time, we just want to say
102"Remember so-and-so's phone number, or that I have to buy dinner for the 102"Remember so-and-so's phone number, or that I have to buy dinner for the
103cats tonight." That's the FACT. How it's stored is really the 103cats tonight." That's the FACT@. How it's stored is really the
104computer's problem. But at this point in time, it's most definitely 104computer's problem. But at this point in time, it's most definitely
105also the user's problem, and sometimes so laboriously so that people 105also the user's problem, and sometimes so laboriously so that people
106just let data slip, rather than expend the effort to record it. 106just let data slip, rather than expend the effort to record it.
diff --git a/doc/misc/sc.texi b/doc/misc/sc.texi
index a2fe0f68a74..d6d57421ec2 100644
--- a/doc/misc/sc.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/sc.texi
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ sent. Supercite is re-initialized in each new reply buffer.
120@cindex attribute, attributing 120@cindex attribute, attributing
121 121
122Typical usage is as follows. You want to reply or followup to a message 122Typical usage is as follows. You want to reply or followup to a message
123in your MUA. You will probably hit @kbd{r} (i.e., ``reply'') or @kbd{f} 123in your MUA@. You will probably hit @kbd{r} (i.e., ``reply'') or @kbd{f}
124(i.e., ``forward'') to begin composing the reply. In response, the MUA 124(i.e., ``forward'') to begin composing the reply. In response, the MUA
125will create a reply buffer and initialize the outgoing mail headers 125will create a reply buffer and initialize the outgoing mail headers
126appropriately. The body of the reply will usually be empty at this 126appropriately. The body of the reply will usually be empty at this
@@ -165,7 +165,7 @@ reply or forward command. This command will actually perform citations
165by calling a hook variable to which Supercite's top-level function 165by calling a hook variable to which Supercite's top-level function
166@code{sc-cite-original} has been added. When @code{sc-cite-original} is 166@code{sc-cite-original} has been added. When @code{sc-cite-original} is
167executed, the original message must be set up in a very specific way, 167executed, the original message must be set up in a very specific way,
168but this is handled automatically by the MUA. @xref{Hints to MUA 168but this is handled automatically by the MUA@. @xref{Hints to MUA
169Authors}.@refill 169Authors}.@refill
170 170
171@cindex info alist 171@cindex info alist
@@ -202,7 +202,7 @@ When the original message is cited by @code{sc-cite-original}, it will
202cited text and want to re-fill it, you must use an add-on package such 202cited text and want to re-fill it, you must use an add-on package such
203as @cite{filladapt} or @cite{gin-mode}. These packages can recognize 203as @cite{filladapt} or @cite{gin-mode}. These packages can recognize
204Supercited text and will fill them appropriately. Emacs's built-in 204Supercited text and will fill them appropriately. Emacs's built-in
205filling routines, e.g@. @code{fill-paragraph}, do not recognize cited 205filling routines, e.g., @code{fill-paragraph}, do not recognize cited
206text and will not re-fill them properly because it cannot guess the 206text and will not re-fill them properly because it cannot guess the
207@code{fill-prefix} being used. 207@code{fill-prefix} being used.
208@xref{Post-yank Formatting Commands}, for details.@refill 208@xref{Post-yank Formatting Commands}, for details.@refill
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ beautifications on the cited original text, maintaining consistent and
213informative citations throughout. Supercite tries to be as configurable 213informative citations throughout. Supercite tries to be as configurable
214as possible to allow for a wide range of personalized citation styles, 214as possible to allow for a wide range of personalized citation styles,
215but it is also immediately useful with the default configuration, once 215but it is also immediately useful with the default configuration, once
216it has been properly connected to your MUA. @xref{Getting Connected}, 216it has been properly connected to your MUA@. @xref{Getting Connected},
217for more details.@refill 217for more details.@refill
218 218
219@node Citations 219@node Citations
@@ -388,7 +388,7 @@ change @code{sc-citation-root-regexp} you should always also change
388 388
389@dfn{Mail header information keys} are nuggets of information that 389@dfn{Mail header information keys} are nuggets of information that
390Supercite extracts from the various mail headers of the original 390Supercite extracts from the various mail headers of the original
391message, placed in the reply buffer by the MUA. Information is kept in 391message, placed in the reply buffer by the MUA@. Information is kept in
392the @dfn{Info Alist} as key-value pairs, and can be retrieved for use in 392the @dfn{Info Alist} as key-value pairs, and can be retrieved for use in
393various places within Supercite, such as in header rewrite functions and 393various places within Supercite, such as in header rewrite functions and
394attribution selection. Other bits of data, composed and created by 394attribution selection. Other bits of data, composed and created by
@@ -532,7 +532,7 @@ beginning at zero.
532@cindex header rewrite functions, built-in 532@cindex header rewrite functions, built-in
533 533
534Below are examples of the various built-in header rewrite functions. 534Below are examples of the various built-in header rewrite functions.
535Please note the following:@: first, the text which appears in the 535Please note the following: first, the text which appears in the
536examples below as @var{infokey} indicates that the corresponding value 536examples below as @var{infokey} indicates that the corresponding value
537of the info key from the info alist will be inserted there. 537of the info key from the info alist will be inserted there.
538(@pxref{Information Keys and the Info Alist}). For example, in @code{sc-header-on-said} 538(@pxref{Information Keys and the Info Alist}). For example, in @code{sc-header-on-said}
@@ -1132,8 +1132,8 @@ Each element in this list contains lists of the following form:
1132 1132
1133@example 1133@example
1134@group 1134@group
1135(@var{infokey} ((@var{regexp} @. @var{attribution}) 1135(@var{infokey} ((@var{regexp} . @var{attribution})
1136 (@var{regexp} @. @var{attribution}) 1136 (@var{regexp} . @var{attribution})
1137 (@dots{}))) 1137 (@dots{})))
1138@end group 1138@end group
1139@end example 1139@end example
@@ -1240,7 +1240,7 @@ post-selection hook, the local variables @code{attribution} and
1240variables in your hook functions, you change the attribution and 1240variables in your hook functions, you change the attribution and
1241citation strings used by Supercite. One possible use of this would be 1241citation strings used by Supercite. One possible use of this would be
1242to override any automatically derived attribution string when it is only 1242to override any automatically derived attribution string when it is only
1243one character long; e.g. you prefer to use @code{"initials"} but the 1243one character long; e.g., you prefer to use @code{"initials"} but the
1244author only has one name.@refill 1244author only has one name.@refill
1245 1245
1246@node Author Names 1246@node Author Names
@@ -1284,7 +1284,7 @@ is used for this purpose. As implied by its name, this variable is an
1284association list, where each element is a cons cell of the form: 1284association list, where each element is a cons cell of the form:
1285 1285
1286@example 1286@example
1287(@var{regexp} @. @var{position}) 1287(@var{regexp} . @var{position})
1288@end example 1288@end example
1289 1289
1290@noindent 1290@noindent
@@ -1295,7 +1295,7 @@ Thus to strip out all titles of ``Dr.'', ``Mr.'', etc. from the name,
1295@code{sc-name-filter-alist} would have an entry such as: 1295@code{sc-name-filter-alist} would have an entry such as:
1296 1296
1297@example 1297@example
1298("^\\(Mr\\|Mrs\\|Ms\\|Dr\\)[.]?$" @. 0) 1298("^\\(Mr\\|Mrs\\|Ms\\|Dr\\)[.]?$" . 0)
1299@end example 1299@end example
1300 1300
1301@noindent 1301@noindent
@@ -1486,8 +1486,8 @@ consulted to find the frame to use (@code{sc-cite-frame-alist},
1486respectively). These frames can contain alists of the form: 1486respectively). These frames can contain alists of the form:
1487 1487
1488@example 1488@example
1489((@var{infokey} (@var{regexp} @. @var{frame}) (@var{regexp} @. @var{frame}) @dots{}) 1489((@var{infokey} (@var{regexp} . @var{frame}) (@var{regexp} . @var{frame}) @dots{})
1490 (@var{infokey} (@var{regexp} @. @var{frame}) (@var{regexp} @. @var{frame}) @dots{}) 1490 (@var{infokey} (@var{regexp} . @var{frame}) (@var{regexp} . @var{frame}) @dots{})
1491 (@dots{})) 1491 (@dots{}))
1492@end example 1492@end example
1493 1493
@@ -1819,7 +1819,7 @@ steps:
1819@item 1819@item
1820Insert the original message, including the mail headers into the reply 1820Insert the original message, including the mail headers into the reply
1821buffer. At this point you should not modify the raw text in any way 1821buffer. At this point you should not modify the raw text in any way
1822(except for any necessary decoding, e.g. of quoted-printable text), and 1822(except for any necessary decoding, e.g., of quoted-printable text), and
1823you should place all the original headers into the body of the reply. 1823you should place all the original headers into the body of the reply.
1824This means that many of the mail headers will be duplicated, one copy 1824This means that many of the mail headers will be duplicated, one copy
1825above the @code{mail-header-separator} line and one copy below, however 1825above the @code{mail-header-separator} line and one copy below, however
diff --git a/doc/misc/sem-user.texi b/doc/misc/sem-user.texi
index 9d6fb11db50..f483c899bf2 100644
--- a/doc/misc/sem-user.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/sem-user.texi
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ minor modes. The variable @code{semantic-default-submodes} determines
59which auxiliary modes are enabled; the defaults are SemanticDB mode 59which auxiliary modes are enabled; the defaults are SemanticDB mode
60(@pxref{SemanticDB}) and Global Semantic Idle Scheduler mode 60(@pxref{SemanticDB}) and Global Semantic Idle Scheduler mode
61(@pxref{Idle Scheduler}). You can also toggle the auxiliary minor 61(@pxref{Idle Scheduler}). You can also toggle the auxiliary minor
62modes separately, using their mode functions (e.g. @kbd{M-x 62modes separately, using their mode functions (e.g., @kbd{M-x
63semanticdb-minor-mode}), or via the @samp{Development} menu. The 63semanticdb-minor-mode}), or via the @samp{Development} menu. The
64various auxiliary minor modes are described in the following sections. 64various auxiliary minor modes are described in the following sections.
65 65
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ valid mode symbols are:
105Semantic mode provides a number of commands for navigating, querying, 105Semantic mode provides a number of commands for navigating, querying,
106and editing source code in a language-aware manner. These commands 106and editing source code in a language-aware manner. These commands
107generally act on @dfn{tags}, which are the source-code units deemed 107generally act on @dfn{tags}, which are the source-code units deemed
108``important'' by the present programming language (e.g. functions in 108``important'' by the present programming language (e.g., functions in
109the C programming language). 109the C programming language).
110 110
111These commands may be used in any buffer that has been parsed by 111These commands may be used in any buffer that has been parsed by
diff --git a/doc/misc/ses.texi b/doc/misc/ses.texi
index cccd74dec0f..fecba99952f 100644
--- a/doc/misc/ses.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/ses.texi
@@ -912,7 +912,7 @@ You can edit the data area, but don't insert or delete any newlines
912except in the local-variables part, since @acronym{SES} locates things by 912except in the local-variables part, since @acronym{SES} locates things by
913counting newlines. Use @kbd{C-x C-e} at the end of a line to install 913counting newlines. Use @kbd{C-x C-e} at the end of a line to install
914your edits into the spreadsheet data structures (this does not update 914your edits into the spreadsheet data structures (this does not update
915the print area, use e.g. @kbd{C-c C-l} for that). 915the print area, use, e.g., @kbd{C-c C-l} for that).
916 916
917The data area is maintained as an image of spreadsheet data 917The data area is maintained as an image of spreadsheet data
918structures that area stored in buffer-local variables. If the data 918structures that area stored in buffer-local variables. If the data
diff --git a/doc/misc/smtpmail.texi b/doc/misc/smtpmail.texi
index 4e4df3f0bbb..67824afb898 100644
--- a/doc/misc/smtpmail.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/smtpmail.texi
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ spool, then.
101@cindex IMAP 101@cindex IMAP
102 When your computer is not always connected to the internet, you 102 When your computer is not always connected to the internet, you
103must get the mail from the remote mail host using a protocol such as 103must get the mail from the remote mail host using a protocol such as
104POP3 or IMAP. POP3 essentially downloads all your mail from the mail 104POP3 or IMAP@. POP3 essentially downloads all your mail from the mail
105host to your computer. The mail is stored in some file on your 105host to your computer. The mail is stored in some file on your
106computer, and again, all your MUA has to do is read mail from the 106computer, and again, all your MUA has to do is read mail from the
107spool. 107spool.
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ The following example illustrates what you could put in
219@cindex user name 219@cindex user name
220Most SMTP servers require clients to authenticate themselves before 220Most SMTP servers require clients to authenticate themselves before
221they are allowed to send mail. Authentication usually involves 221they are allowed to send mail. Authentication usually involves
222supplying a user name and password. 222supplying a user name and password.
223 223
224If you have not configured anything, then the first time you try to 224If you have not configured anything, then the first time you try to
225send mail via a server, Emacs (version 24.1 and later) prompts you 225send mail via a server, Emacs (version 24.1 and later) prompts you
@@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ file, @pxref{Top,,auth-source, auth, Emacs auth-source Library}.
260The process by which the SMTP library authenticates you to the server 260The process by which the SMTP library authenticates you to the server
261is known as ``Simple Authentication and Security Layer'' (SASL). 261is known as ``Simple Authentication and Security Layer'' (SASL).
262There are various SASL mechanisms, and this library supports three of 262There are various SASL mechanisms, and this library supports three of
263them: CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, and LOGIN. It tries each of them, in that order, 263them: CRAM-MD5, PLAIN, and LOGIN@. It tries each of them, in that order,
264until one succeeds. The first uses a form of encryption to obscure 264until one succeeds. The first uses a form of encryption to obscure
265your password, while the other two do not. 265your password, while the other two do not.
266 266
diff --git a/doc/misc/tramp.texi b/doc/misc/tramp.texi
index 708478ca8e9..4918321b171 100644
--- a/doc/misc/tramp.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/tramp.texi
@@ -716,7 +716,7 @@ This is another method from the Kerberos suite. It behaves like @option{su}.
716@cindex plink method 716@cindex plink method
717 717
718This method is mostly interesting for Windows users using the PuTTY 718This method is mostly interesting for Windows users using the PuTTY
719implementation of SSH. It uses @samp{plink -ssh} to log in to the 719implementation of SSH@. It uses @samp{plink -ssh} to log in to the
720remote host. 720remote host.
721 721
722This supports the @samp{-P} argument. 722This supports the @samp{-P} argument.
@@ -1006,7 +1006,7 @@ XP, MS Windows Vista, and MS Windows 7.
1006The first directory in the localname must be a share name on the remote 1006The first directory in the localname must be a share name on the remote
1007host. Remember that the @code{$} character, in which default shares 1007host. Remember that the @code{$} character, in which default shares
1008usually end, must be written @code{$$} due to environment variable 1008usually end, must be written @code{$$} due to environment variable
1009substitution in file names. If no share name is given (i.e. remote 1009substitution in file names. If no share name is given (i.e., remote
1010directory @code{/}), all available shares are listed. 1010directory @code{/}), all available shares are listed.
1011 1011
1012Since authorization is done on share level, you will always be 1012Since authorization is done on share level, you will always be
@@ -1053,7 +1053,7 @@ name.
1053 1053
1054The connection methods described in this section are based on GVFS 1054The connection methods described in this section are based on GVFS
1055@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GVFS}. Via GVFS, the remote 1055@uref{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GVFS}. Via GVFS, the remote
1056filesystem is mounted locally through FUSE. @value{tramp} uses 1056filesystem is mounted locally through FUSE@. @value{tramp} uses
1057this local mounted directory internally. 1057this local mounted directory internally.
1058 1058
1059The communication with GVFS is implemented via D-Bus messages. 1059The communication with GVFS is implemented via D-Bus messages.
@@ -1093,7 +1093,7 @@ FUSE, it also needs the SYNCE-GVFS plugin.
1093 1093
1094@defopt tramp-gvfs-methods 1094@defopt tramp-gvfs-methods
1095This customer option, a list, defines the external methods which 1095This customer option, a list, defines the external methods which
1096shall be used with GVFS. Per default, these are @option{dav}, 1096shall be used with GVFS@. Per default, these are @option{dav},
1097@option{davs}, @option{obex} and @option{synce}. Other possible 1097@option{davs}, @option{obex} and @option{synce}. Other possible
1098values are @option{ftp}, @option{sftp} and @option{smb}. 1098values are @option{ftp}, @option{sftp} and @option{smb}.
1099@end defopt 1099@end defopt
@@ -2939,7 +2939,7 @@ to @code{nil}, @ref{Filename completion}.
2939 2939
2940Disable version control. If you access remote files which are not 2940Disable version control. If you access remote files which are not
2941under version control, a lot of check operations can be avoided by 2941under version control, a lot of check operations can be avoided by
2942disabling VC. This can be achieved by 2942disabling VC@. This can be achieved by
2943 2943
2944@lisp 2944@lisp
2945(setq vc-ignore-dir-regexp 2945(setq vc-ignore-dir-regexp
@@ -3268,7 +3268,7 @@ local host as @samp{root} user, is possible just by @kbd{C-x C-f
3268 3268
3269@item Use configuration possibilities of your method: 3269@item Use configuration possibilities of your method:
3270 3270
3271Several connection methods (i.e. the programs used) offer powerful 3271Several connection methods (i.e., the programs used) offer powerful
3272configuration possibilities (@pxref{Customizing Completion}). In the 3272configuration possibilities (@pxref{Customizing Completion}). In the
3273given case, this could be @file{~/.ssh/config}: 3273given case, this could be @file{~/.ssh/config}:
3274 3274
diff --git a/doc/misc/url.texi b/doc/misc/url.texi
index 90ab7f5554f..f42007348ee 100644
--- a/doc/misc/url.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/url.texi
@@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Given a parsed URI, this function returns the corresponding URI string.
137@cindex parsed URI 137@cindex parsed URI
138 The return value of @code{url-generic-parse-url}, and the argument 138 The return value of @code{url-generic-parse-url}, and the argument
139expected by @code{url-recreate-url}, is a @dfn{parsed URI}: a CL 139expected by @code{url-recreate-url}, is a @dfn{parsed URI}: a CL
140structure whose slots hold the various components of the URI. 140structure whose slots hold the various components of the URI@.
141@xref{top,the CL Manual,,cl,GNU Emacs Common Lisp Emulation}, for 141@xref{top,the CL Manual,,cl,GNU Emacs Common Lisp Emulation}, for
142details about CL structures. Most of the other functions in the 142details about CL structures. Most of the other functions in the
143@code{url} library act on parsed URIs. 143@code{url} library act on parsed URIs.
@@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ details about CL structures. Most of the other functions in the
154 154
155@table @code 155@table @code
156@item type 156@item type
157The URI scheme (a string, e.g.@: @code{http}). @xref{Supported URL 157The URI scheme (a string, e.g., @code{http}). @xref{Supported URL
158Types}, for a list of schemes that the @code{url} library knows how to 158Types}, for a list of schemes that the @code{url} library knows how to
159process. This slot can also be @code{nil}, if the URI is not fully 159process. This slot can also be @code{nil}, if the URI is not fully
160specified. 160specified.
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ component specifies a ``secondary resource'', such as a section of a
190webpage. 190webpage.
191 191
192@item fullness 192@item fullness
193This is @code{t} if the URI is fully specified, i.e.@: the 193This is @code{t} if the URI is fully specified, i.e., the
194hierarchical components of the URI (the hostname and/or username 194hierarchical components of the URI (the hostname and/or username
195and/or password) are preceded by @samp{//}. 195and/or password) are preceded by @samp{//}.
196@end table 196@end table
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ percent-encoded in accordance with RFC 3986.
239@defun url-encode-url url-string 239@defun url-encode-url url-string
240This function return a properly URI-encoded version of 240This function return a properly URI-encoded version of
241@var{url-string}. It also performs @dfn{URI normalization}, 241@var{url-string}. It also performs @dfn{URI normalization},
242e.g.@: converting the scheme component to lowercase if it was 242e.g., converting the scheme component to lowercase if it was
243previously uppercase. 243previously uppercase.
244@end defun 244@end defun
245 245
@@ -278,7 +278,7 @@ carriage returns and line feeds, which are normally forbidden in URIs.
278@chapter Retrieving URLs 278@chapter Retrieving URLs
279 279
280 The @code{url} library defines the following three functions for 280 The @code{url} library defines the following three functions for
281retrieving the data specified by a URL. The actual retrieval protocol 281retrieving the data specified by a URL@. The actual retrieval protocol
282depends on the URL's URI scheme, and is performed by lower-level 282depends on the URL's URI scheme, and is performed by lower-level
283scheme-specific functions. (Those lower-level functions are not 283scheme-specific functions. (Those lower-level functions are not
284documented here, and generally should not be called directly.) 284documented here, and generally should not be called directly.)
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ The @code{http} scheme refers to the Hypertext Transfer Protocol. The
385Its default port is 80. 385Its default port is 80.
386 386
387 The @code{https} scheme is a secure version of @code{http}, with 387 The @code{https} scheme is a secure version of @code{http}, with
388transmission via SSL. It is defined in RFC 2069, and its default port 388transmission via SSL@. It is defined in RFC 2069, and its default port
389is 443. When using @code{https}, the @code{url} library performs SSL 389is 443. When using @code{https}, the @code{url} library performs SSL
390encryption via the @code{ssl} library, by forcing the @code{ssl} 390encryption via the @code{ssl} library, by forcing the @code{ssl}
391gateway method to be used. @xref{Gateways in general}. 391gateway method to be used. @xref{Gateways in general}.
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ HTTP supports an @samp{OPTIONS} method describing things supported by
485the URL@. 485the URL@.
486 486
487@defun url-http-options url 487@defun url-http-options url
488Returns a property list describing options available for URL. The 488Returns a property list describing options available for URL@. The
489property list members are: 489property list members are:
490 490
491@table @code 491@table @code
@@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ A @code{mailto} URL specifies an email message to be sent to a given
583email address. For example, @samp{mailto:foo@@bar.com} specifies 583email address. For example, @samp{mailto:foo@@bar.com} specifies
584sending a message to @samp{foo@@bar.com}. The ``retrieval method'' 584sending a message to @samp{foo@@bar.com}. The ``retrieval method''
585for such URLs is to open a mail composition buffer in which the 585for such URLs is to open a mail composition buffer in which the
586appropriate content (e.g.@: the recipient address) has been filled in. 586appropriate content (e.g., the recipient address) has been filled in.
587 587
588 As defined in RFC 2368, a @code{mailto} URL has the form 588 As defined in RFC 2368, a @code{mailto} URL has the form
589 589
@@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ tunneled through SSL and has default port 563.
652@vindex NNTPSERVER 652@vindex NNTPSERVER
653@defopt url-news-server 653@defopt url-news-server
654This variable specifies the default news server from which to fetch 654This variable specifies the default news server from which to fetch
655news, if no server was specified in the URL. The default value, 655news, if no server was specified in the URL@. The default value,
656@code{nil}, means to use the server specified by the standard 656@code{nil}, means to use the server specified by the standard
657environment variable @samp{NNTPSERVER}, or @samp{news} if that 657environment variable @samp{NNTPSERVER}, or @samp{news} if that
658environment variable is unset. 658environment variable is unset.
diff --git a/doc/misc/vip.texi b/doc/misc/vip.texi
index 0d9bb286330..4e85da70ca2 100644
--- a/doc/misc/vip.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/vip.texi
@@ -53,13 +53,13 @@ concentrate mainly on differences from Vi, especially features unique to
53VIP. 53VIP.
54 54
55It is recommended that you read nodes on survey and on customization before 55It is recommended that you read nodes on survey and on customization before
56you start using VIP. Other nodes may be visited as needed. 56you start using VIP@. Other nodes may be visited as needed.
57 57
58Comments and bug reports are welcome. Please send messages to 58Comments and bug reports are welcome. Please send messages to
59@code{ms@@Sail.Stanford.Edu} if you are outside of Japan and to 59@code{ms@@Sail.Stanford.Edu} if you are outside of Japan and to
60@code{masahiko@@sato.riec.tohoku.junet} if you are in Japan.@refill 60@code{masahiko@@sato.riec.tohoku.junet} if you are in Japan.@refill
61 61
62@insertcopying 62@insertcopying
63 63
64@end ifnottex 64@end ifnottex
65 65
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ concentrate mainly on differences from Vi, especially features unique to
83VIP. 83VIP.
84 84
85It is recommended that you read chapters on survey and on customization 85It is recommended that you read chapters on survey and on customization
86before you start using VIP. Other chapters may be used as future 86before you start using VIP@. Other chapters may be used as future
87references. 87references.
88 88
89Comments and bug reports are welcome. Please send messages to 89Comments and bug reports are welcome. Please send messages to
@@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ emacs mode vi mode insert mode
263 263
264@kindex 032 @kbd{C-z} (@code{vip-change-mode-to-vi}) 264@kindex 032 @kbd{C-z} (@code{vip-change-mode-to-vi})
265 265
266You will be in this mode just after you loaded VIP. You can do all 266You will be in this mode just after you loaded VIP@. You can do all
267normal Emacs editing in this mode. Note that the key @kbd{C-z} is globally 267normal Emacs editing in this mode. Note that the key @kbd{C-z} is globally
268bound to @code{vip-change-mode-to-vi}. So, if you type @kbd{C-z} in this mode 268bound to @code{vip-change-mode-to-vi}. So, if you type @kbd{C-z} in this mode
269then you will be in vi mode.@refill 269then you will be in vi mode.@refill
@@ -688,7 +688,7 @@ Replace.
688@chapter Vi Commands 688@chapter Vi Commands
689 689
690This chapter describes Vi commands other than Ex commands implemented in 690This chapter describes Vi commands other than Ex commands implemented in
691VIP. Except for the last section which discusses insert mode, all the 691VIP@. Except for the last section which discusses insert mode, all the
692commands described in this chapter are to be used in vi mode. 692commands described in this chapter are to be used in vi mode.
693 693
694@menu 694@menu
@@ -1716,7 +1716,7 @@ character @samp{|}.
1716@end menu 1716@end menu
1717@node Ex Command Reference, Customization, Ex Commands, Ex Commands 1717@node Ex Command Reference, Customization, Ex Commands, Ex Commands
1718@section Ex Command Reference 1718@section Ex Command Reference
1719In this section we briefly explain all the Ex commands supported by VIP. 1719In this section we briefly explain all the Ex commands supported by VIP@.
1720Most Ex commands expect @var{address} as their argument, and they use 1720Most Ex commands expect @var{address} as their argument, and they use
1721default addresses if they are not explicitly given. In the following, such 1721default addresses if they are not explicitly given. In the following, such
1722default addresses will be shown in parentheses. 1722default addresses will be shown in parentheses.
@@ -1875,7 +1875,7 @@ customizing VIP.
1875@node Customizing Constants, Customizing Key Bindings, Customization, Customization 1875@node Customizing Constants, Customizing Key Bindings, Customization, Customization
1876@section Customizing Constants 1876@section Customizing Constants
1877An easy way to customize VIP is to change the values of constants used 1877An easy way to customize VIP is to change the values of constants used
1878in VIP. Here is the list of the constants used in VIP and their default 1878in VIP@. Here is the list of the constants used in VIP and their default
1879values. 1879values.
1880 1880
1881@table @code 1881@table @code
diff --git a/doc/misc/viper.texi b/doc/misc/viper.texi
index 94f7e53ce8c..5fb1f92363a 100644
--- a/doc/misc/viper.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/viper.texi
@@ -208,7 +208,7 @@ A buffer has a distinguished position called the @dfn{point}.
208A @dfn{point} is always between 2 characters, and is @dfn{looking at} 208A @dfn{point} is always between 2 characters, and is @dfn{looking at}
209the right hand character. The cursor is positioned on the right hand 209the right hand character. The cursor is positioned on the right hand
210character. Thus, when the @dfn{point} is looking at the end-of-line, 210character. Thus, when the @dfn{point} is looking at the end-of-line,
211the cursor is on the end-of-line character, i.e.@: beyond the last 211the cursor is on the end-of-line character, i.e., beyond the last
212character on the line. This is the default Emacs behavior.@refill 212character on the line. This is the default Emacs behavior.@refill
213 213
214The default settings of Viper try to mimic the behavior of Vi, preventing 214The default settings of Viper try to mimic the behavior of Vi, preventing
@@ -301,7 +301,7 @@ You can also turn Viper on and off at any time while in Vi command mode.
301more information.@refill 301more information.@refill
302 302
303Emacs uses Control and Meta modifiers. These are denoted as C and M, 303Emacs uses Control and Meta modifiers. These are denoted as C and M,
304e.g.@: @kbd{^Z} as @kbd{C-z} and @kbd{Meta-x} as @kbd{M-x}. The Meta key is 304e.g., @kbd{^Z} as @kbd{C-z} and @kbd{Meta-x} as @kbd{M-x}. The Meta key is
305usually located on each side of the Space bar; it is used in a manner 305usually located on each side of the Space bar; it is used in a manner
306similar to the Control key, e.g., @kbd{M-x} means typing @kbd{x} while 306similar to the Control key, e.g., @kbd{M-x} means typing @kbd{x} while
307holding the Meta key down. For keyboards that do not have a Meta key, 307holding the Meta key down. For keyboards that do not have a Meta key,
@@ -2681,7 +2681,7 @@ just left. This lets one use these functions in a multi-frame
2681configuration. However, this may require some getting used to. For 2681configuration. However, this may require some getting used to. For
2682instance, if you are typing in a frame, A, and then move the mouse to frame 2682instance, if you are typing in a frame, A, and then move the mouse to frame
2683B and click to invoke mouse search, search (or insertion) will be performed 2683B and click to invoke mouse search, search (or insertion) will be performed
2684in frame A. To perform search/insertion in frame B, you will first have to 2684in frame A@. To perform search/insertion in frame B, you will first have to
2685shift focus there, which doesn't happen until you type a character or 2685shift focus there, which doesn't happen until you type a character or
2686perform some other action in frame B---mouse search doesn't shift focus. 2686perform some other action in frame B---mouse search doesn't shift focus.
2687 2687
@@ -3670,7 +3670,7 @@ Join <count> lines (default 2).
3670@item :[x,y]s/<pat>/<repl>/<f> 3670@item :[x,y]s/<pat>/<repl>/<f>
3671Substitute (on lines x through y) the pattern 3671Substitute (on lines x through y) the pattern
3672<pat> (default the last pattern) with <repl>. Useful 3672<pat> (default the last pattern) with <repl>. Useful
3673flags <f> are @samp{g} for @samp{global} (i.e.@: change every 3673flags <f> are @samp{g} for @samp{global} (i.e., change every
3674non-overlapping occurrence of <pat>) and @samp{c} for 3674non-overlapping occurrence of <pat>) and @samp{c} for
3675@samp{confirm} (type @samp{y} to confirm a particular 3675@samp{confirm} (type @samp{y} to confirm a particular
3676substitution, else @samp{n} ). Instead of @kbd{/} any 3676substitution, else @samp{n} ). Instead of @kbd{/} any
@@ -3694,7 +3694,7 @@ Same as @kbd{:copy}.
3694@item :[x,y]move [z] 3694@item :[x,y]move [z]
3695Move text between @kbd{x} and @kbd{y} to the position after @kbd{z}. 3695Move text between @kbd{x} and @kbd{y} to the position after @kbd{z}.
3696@item & 3696@item &
3697Repeat latest Ex substitute command, e.g. 3697Repeat latest Ex substitute command, e.g.,
3698@kbd{:s/wrong/right}. 3698@kbd{:s/wrong/right}.
3699@item :x,yp 3699@item :x,yp
3700@itemx :g/Pat/p 3700@itemx :g/Pat/p
@@ -3794,7 +3794,7 @@ Search in the tags file where <name> is defined (file, line), and go to it.
3794@item :[x,y]s/<pat>/<repl>/<f> 3794@item :[x,y]s/<pat>/<repl>/<f>
3795Substitute (on lines x through y) the pattern <pat> (default the last 3795Substitute (on lines x through y) the pattern <pat> (default the last
3796pattern) with <repl>. Useful 3796pattern) with <repl>. Useful
3797flags <f> are @samp{g} for @samp{global} (i.e.@: change every 3797flags <f> are @samp{g} for @samp{global} (i.e., change every
3798non-overlapping occurrence of <pat>) and @samp{c} for 3798non-overlapping occurrence of <pat>) and @samp{c} for
3799@samp{confirm} (type @samp{y} to confirm a particular 3799@samp{confirm} (type @samp{y} to confirm a particular
3800substitution, else @samp{n}). Instead of @kbd{/} any 3800substitution, else @samp{n}). Instead of @kbd{/} any
@@ -3804,7 +3804,7 @@ delimiter.
3804Note: @emph{The newline character (inserted as @kbd{C-qC-j}) 3804Note: @emph{The newline character (inserted as @kbd{C-qC-j})
3805can be used in <repl>}. 3805can be used in <repl>}.
3806@item & 3806@item &
3807Repeat latest Ex substitute command, e.g.@: @kbd{:s/wrong/right}. 3807Repeat latest Ex substitute command, e.g., @kbd{:s/wrong/right}.
3808@item :global /<pattern>/<ex-command> 3808@item :global /<pattern>/<ex-command>
3809@itemx :g /<pattern>/<ex-command> 3809@itemx :g /<pattern>/<ex-command>
3810Execute <ex-command> on all lines that match <pattern>. 3810Execute <ex-command> on all lines that match <pattern>.
@@ -4476,12 +4476,12 @@ dxc@@xprt.net (David X Callaway),
4476edmonds@@edmonds.home.cs.ubc.ca (Brian Edmonds), 4476edmonds@@edmonds.home.cs.ubc.ca (Brian Edmonds),
4477gin@@mo.msk.ru (Golubev I.N.), 4477gin@@mo.msk.ru (Golubev I.N.),
4478gviswana@@cs.wisc.edu (Guhan Viswanathan), 4478gviswana@@cs.wisc.edu (Guhan Viswanathan),
4479gvr@@halcyon.com (George V.@: Reilly), 4479gvr@@halcyon.com (George V. Reilly),
4480hatazaki@@bach.convex.com (Takao Hatazaki), 4480hatazaki@@bach.convex.com (Takao Hatazaki),
4481hpz@@ibmhpz.aug.ipp-garching.mpg.de (Hans-Peter Zehrfeld), 4481hpz@@ibmhpz.aug.ipp-garching.mpg.de (Hans-Peter Zehrfeld),
4482irie@@t.email.ne.jp (Irie Tetsuya), 4482irie@@t.email.ne.jp (Irie Tetsuya),
4483jackr@@dblues.engr.sgi.com (Jack Repenning), 4483jackr@@dblues.engr.sgi.com (Jack Repenning),
4484jamesm@@bga.com (D.J.@: Miller II), 4484jamesm@@bga.com (D.J. Miller II),
4485jjm@@hplb.hpl.hp.com (Jean-Jacques Moreau), 4485jjm@@hplb.hpl.hp.com (Jean-Jacques Moreau),
4486jl@@cse.ogi.edu (John Launchbury), 4486jl@@cse.ogi.edu (John Launchbury),
4487jobrien@@hchp.org (John O'Brien), 4487jobrien@@hchp.org (John O'Brien),
diff --git a/doc/misc/widget.texi b/doc/misc/widget.texi
index 24fe3e63ac9..4152b52250c 100644
--- a/doc/misc/widget.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/widget.texi
@@ -663,7 +663,7 @@ in the buffer with a positive tabbing order, or @code{nil}
663 663
664@vindex parent@r{ keyword} 664@vindex parent@r{ keyword}
665@item :parent 665@item :parent
666The parent of a nested widget (e.g.@: a @code{menu-choice} item or an 666The parent of a nested widget (e.g., a @code{menu-choice} item or an
667element of a @code{editable-list} widget). 667element of a @code{editable-list} widget).
668 668
669@vindex sibling-args@r{ keyword} 669@vindex sibling-args@r{ keyword}
@@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ Face used for highlighting the editable field. Default is
813 813
814@vindex secret@r{ keyword} 814@vindex secret@r{ keyword}
815@item :secret 815@item :secret
816Character used to display the value. You can set this to e.g.@: @code{?*} 816Character used to display the value. You can set this to, e.g., @code{?*}
817if the field contains a password or other secret information. By 817if the field contains a password or other secret information. By
818default, this is @code{nil}, and the value is not secret. 818default, this is @code{nil}, and the value is not secret.
819 819
@@ -918,8 +918,8 @@ Insert a literal @samp{%}.
918 918
919@vindex button-args@r{ keyword} 919@vindex button-args@r{ keyword}
920@item :button-args 920@item :button-args
921A list of keywords to pass to the radio buttons. Useful for setting 921A list of keywords to pass to the radio buttons. Useful for setting,
922e.g.@: the @samp{:help-echo} for each button. 922e.g., the @samp{:help-echo} for each button.
923 923
924@vindex buttons@r{ keyword} 924@vindex buttons@r{ keyword}
925@item :buttons 925@item :buttons
@@ -1068,12 +1068,12 @@ Usually a checklist will only match if the items are in the exact
1068sequence given in the specification. By setting @code{:greedy} to 1068sequence given in the specification. By setting @code{:greedy} to
1069non-@code{nil}, it will allow the items to come in any sequence. 1069non-@code{nil}, it will allow the items to come in any sequence.
1070However, if you extract the value they will be in the sequence given 1070However, if you extract the value they will be in the sequence given
1071in the checklist, i.e.@: the original sequence is forgotten. 1071in the checklist, i.e., the original sequence is forgotten.
1072 1072
1073@vindex button-args@r{ keyword} 1073@vindex button-args@r{ keyword}
1074@item :button-args 1074@item :button-args
1075A list of keywords to pass to the checkboxes. Useful for setting 1075A list of keywords to pass to the checkboxes. Useful for setting,
1076e.g.@: the @samp{:help-echo} for each checkbox. 1076e.g., the @samp{:help-echo} for each checkbox.
1077 1077
1078@vindex buttons@r{ keyword} 1078@vindex buttons@r{ keyword}
1079@item :buttons 1079@item :buttons
@@ -1464,7 +1464,7 @@ property @var{property}.
1464@end defun 1464@end defun
1465 1465
1466Occasionally it can be useful to know which kind of widget you have, 1466Occasionally it can be useful to know which kind of widget you have,
1467i.e.@: the name of the widget type you gave when the widget was created. 1467i.e., the name of the widget type you gave when the widget was created.
1468 1468
1469@defun widget-type widget 1469@defun widget-type widget
1470Return the name of @var{widget}, a symbol. 1470Return the name of @var{widget}, a symbol.
diff --git a/doc/misc/woman.texi b/doc/misc/woman.texi
index 7f72b5faafb..16fb83ad18f 100644
--- a/doc/misc/woman.texi
+++ b/doc/misc/woman.texi
@@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ configuration file named (by default) @file{man.conf} (or something very
385similar), which seems to be the standard mechanism under GNU/Linux, then 385similar), which seems to be the standard mechanism under GNU/Linux, then
386it parses that. To be precise, ``something very similar'' means 386it parses that. To be precise, ``something very similar'' means
387starting with @samp{man} and ending with @samp{.conf} and possibly more 387starting with @samp{man} and ending with @samp{.conf} and possibly more
388lowercase letters, e.g.@: @file{manual.configuration}. 388lowercase letters, e.g., @file{manual.configuration}.
389The search path and/or precise full path name for this file are set by 389The search path and/or precise full path name for this file are set by
390the value of the customizable user option @code{woman-man.conf-path}. 390the value of the customizable user option @code{woman-man.conf-path}.
391If all else fails, WoMan uses a plausible default man search path. 391If all else fails, WoMan uses a plausible default man search path.
@@ -414,7 +414,7 @@ files that it can access, which can be very slow, especially if a
414network is involved. For this reason, it caches various amounts of 414network is involved. For this reason, it caches various amounts of
415information, after which retrieving it from the cache is very fast. If 415information, after which retrieving it from the cache is very fast. If
416the cache ever gets out of synchronism with reality, running the 416the cache ever gets out of synchronism with reality, running the
417@code{woman} command with a prefix argument (e.g.@: @kbd{C-u M-x woman}) 417@code{woman} command with a prefix argument (e.g., @kbd{C-u M-x woman})
418will force it to rebuild its cache. This is necessary only if the names 418will force it to rebuild its cache. This is necessary only if the names
419or locations of any man files change; it is not necessary if only their 419or locations of any man files change; it is not necessary if only their
420contents change. It would always be necessary if such a change occurred 420contents change. It would always be necessary if such a change occurred
@@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ You can also bind the variable @code{woman-use-topic-at-point} locally
485to a non-@code{nil} value (using @code{let}), in which case 485to a non-@code{nil} value (using @code{let}), in which case
486@code{woman} will can use the suggested topic without confirmation if 486@code{woman} will can use the suggested topic without confirmation if
487possible. This may be useful to provide special private key bindings, 487possible. This may be useful to provide special private key bindings,
488e.g.@: this key binding for @kbd{C-c w} runs WoMan on the topic at 488e.g., this key binding for @kbd{C-c w} runs WoMan on the topic at
489point without seeking confirmation: 489point without seeking confirmation:
490 490
491@lisp 491@lisp
@@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ The filename interface is accessed principally via the extended command
511all (provided WoMan is installed and loaded or set up to autoload). 511all (provided WoMan is installed and loaded or set up to autoload).
512This command can be used to browse any accessible man file, regardless 512This command can be used to browse any accessible man file, regardless
513of its filename or location. If the file is compressed then automatic 513of its filename or location. If the file is compressed then automatic
514file decompression must already be turned on (e.g.@: see the 514file decompression must already be turned on (e.g., see the
515@samp{Help->Options} submenu)---it is turned on automatically only by 515@samp{Help->Options} submenu)---it is turned on automatically only by
516the @code{woman} topic interface. 516the @code{woman} topic interface.
517 517
@@ -554,7 +554,7 @@ primarily used internally by WoMan.
554 554
555Emacs provides an interface to detect automatically the format of a file 555Emacs provides an interface to detect automatically the format of a file
556and decode it when it is visited. It is used primarily by the 556and decode it when it is visited. It is used primarily by the
557facilities for editing rich (i.e.@: formatted) text, as a way to store 557facilities for editing rich (i.e., formatted) text, as a way to store
558formatting information transparently as @acronym{ASCII} markup. WoMan can in 558formatting information transparently as @acronym{ASCII} markup. WoMan can in
559principle use this interface, but it must be configured explicitly. 559principle use this interface, but it must be configured explicitly.
560 560
@@ -686,7 +686,7 @@ described by @code{Man-see-also-regexp}.
686 686
687Man pages usually contain a ``SEE ALSO'' section containing references 687Man pages usually contain a ``SEE ALSO'' section containing references
688to other man pages. If these man pages are installed then WoMan can 688to other man pages. If these man pages are installed then WoMan can
689easily be directed to follow the reference, i.e.@: to find and format the 689easily be directed to follow the reference, i.e., to find and format the
690man page. When the mouse is passed over a correctly formatted reference 690man page. When the mouse is passed over a correctly formatted reference
691it is highlighted, in which case clicking the middle button 691it is highlighted, in which case clicking the middle button
692@kbd{Mouse-2} will cause WoMan to follow the reference. Alternatively, 692@kbd{Mouse-2} will cause WoMan to follow the reference. Alternatively,
@@ -763,13 +763,13 @@ item had been used.
763@kindex q 763@kindex q
764@findex Man-quit 764@findex Man-quit
765Bury the buffer containing the current man page (@code{Man-quit}), 765Bury the buffer containing the current man page (@code{Man-quit}),
766i.e.@: move it to the bottom of the buffer stack. 766i.e., move it to the bottom of the buffer stack.
767 767
768@item k 768@item k
769@kindex k 769@kindex k
770@findex Man-kill 770@findex Man-kill
771Kill the buffer containing the current man page (@code{Man-kill}), 771Kill the buffer containing the current man page (@code{Man-kill}),
772i.e.@: delete it completely so that it can be retrieved only by formatting 772i.e., delete it completely so that it can be retrieved only by formatting
773the page again. 773the page again.
774 774
775@item M-p 775@item M-p
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ Find the next WoMan buffer (@code{WoMan-next-manpage}).
786@kindex R 786@kindex R
787@findex woman-reformat-last-file 787@findex woman-reformat-last-file
788Call WoMan to reformat the last man page formatted by WoMan 788Call WoMan to reformat the last man page formatted by WoMan
789(@code{woman-reformat-last-file}), e.g.@: after changing the fill column. 789(@code{woman-reformat-last-file}), e.g., after changing the fill column.
790@end table 790@end table
791 791
792 792
@@ -862,7 +862,7 @@ All WoMan user options are customizable, and it is recommended to
862change them only via the standard Emacs customization facilities. 862change them only via the standard Emacs customization facilities.
863WoMan defines a top-level customization group called @code{WoMan} 863WoMan defines a top-level customization group called @code{WoMan}
864under the parent group @code{Help}. It can be accessed either via the 864under the parent group @code{Help}. It can be accessed either via the
865standard Emacs facilities, e.g.@: via the @samp{Help->Customize} 865standard Emacs facilities, e.g., via the @samp{Help->Customize}
866submenu, or via the WoMan major mode menu. 866submenu, or via the WoMan major mode menu.
867 867
868The top-level WoMan group contains only a few general options and three 868The top-level WoMan group contains only a few general options and three
@@ -874,7 +874,7 @@ customization should be possible via existing user options.
874@vtable @code 874@vtable @code
875@item woman-show-log 875@item woman-show-log
876A boolean value that defaults to @code{nil}. If non-@code{nil} then show the 876A boolean value that defaults to @code{nil}. If non-@code{nil} then show the
877@code{*WoMan-Log*} buffer if appropriate, i.e.@: if any warning messages 877@code{*WoMan-Log*} buffer if appropriate, i.e., if any warning messages
878are written to it. @xref{Log, , The *WoMan-Log* Buffer}. 878are written to it. @xref{Log, , The *WoMan-Log* Buffer}.
879 879
880@item woman-pre-format-hook 880@item woman-pre-format-hook
@@ -960,13 +960,13 @@ is
960@end lisp 960@end lisp
961 961
962Any environment variables (names of which must have the Unix-style form 962Any environment variables (names of which must have the Unix-style form
963@code{$NAME}, e.g.@: @code{$HOME}, @code{$EMACSDATA}, @code{$EMACS_DIR}, 963@code{$NAME}, e.g., @code{$HOME}, @code{$EMACSDATA}, @code{$EMACS_DIR},
964regardless of platform) are evaluated first but each element must 964regardless of platform) are evaluated first but each element must
965evaluate to a @emph{single} directory name. Trailing @file{/}s are 965evaluate to a @emph{single} directory name. Trailing @file{/}s are
966ignored. (Specific directories in @code{woman-path} are also searched.) 966ignored. (Specific directories in @code{woman-path} are also searched.)
967 967
968On Microsoft platforms I recommend including drive letters explicitly, 968On Microsoft platforms I recommend including drive letters explicitly,
969e.g. 969e.g.:
970 970
971@lisp 971@lisp
972("C:/Cygwin/usr/man" "C:/usr/man" "C:/usr/local/man") 972("C:/Cygwin/usr/man" "C:/usr/man" "C:/usr/local/man")
@@ -1010,7 +1010,7 @@ and unreadable files are ignored. The default value on MS-DOS is
1010and on other platforms is @code{nil}. 1010and on other platforms is @code{nil}.
1011 1011
1012Any environment variables (names of which must have the Unix-style form 1012Any environment variables (names of which must have the Unix-style form
1013@code{$NAME}, e.g.@: @code{$HOME}, @code{$EMACSDATA}, @code{$EMACS_DIR}, 1013@code{$NAME}, e.g., @code{$HOME}, @code{$EMACSDATA}, @code{$EMACS_DIR},
1014regardless of platform) are evaluated first but each element must 1014regardless of platform) are evaluated first but each element must
1015evaluate to a @emph{single} directory name (regexp, see above). For 1015evaluate to a @emph{single} directory name (regexp, see above). For
1016example 1016example
@@ -1064,7 +1064,7 @@ suppresses this action. The ``standard'' non-@code{nil} filename is
1064 1064
1065@item woman-dired-keys 1065@item woman-dired-keys
1066A list of @code{dired} mode keys to be defined to run WoMan on the 1066A list of @code{dired} mode keys to be defined to run WoMan on the
1067current file, e.g.@: @code{("w" "W")} or any non-@code{nil} atom to 1067current file, e.g., @code{("w" "W")} or any non-@code{nil} atom to
1068automatically define @kbd{w} and @kbd{W} if they are unbound, or 1068automatically define @kbd{w} and @kbd{W} if they are unbound, or
1069@code{nil} to do nothing. Default is @code{t}. 1069@code{nil} to do nothing. Default is @code{t}.
1070 1070
@@ -1229,7 +1229,7 @@ WoMan provides partial experimental support for special symbols,
1229initially only for MS-Windows and only for MS-Windows fonts. This 1229initially only for MS-Windows and only for MS-Windows fonts. This
1230includes both non-@acronym{ASCII} characters from the main text font and use 1230includes both non-@acronym{ASCII} characters from the main text font and use
1231of a separate symbol font. Later, support will be added for other font 1231of a separate symbol font. Later, support will be added for other font
1232types (e.g.@: @code{bdf} fonts) and for the X Window System. In Emacs 1232types (e.g., @code{bdf} fonts) and for the X Window System. In Emacs
123320.7, the current support works partially under Windows 9x but may not 123320.7, the current support works partially under Windows 9x but may not
1234work on any other platform. 1234work on any other platform.
1235 1235
@@ -1312,7 +1312,7 @@ is output.
1312@cindex reporting bugs 1312@cindex reporting bugs
1313@cindex bugs, reporting 1313@cindex bugs, reporting
1314 1314
1315If WoMan fails completely, or formats a file incorrectly (i.e.@: 1315If WoMan fails completely, or formats a file incorrectly (i.e.,
1316obviously wrongly or significantly differently from @code{man}) or 1316obviously wrongly or significantly differently from @code{man}) or
1317inelegantly, then please 1317inelegantly, then please
1318 1318